Manual HPLC Primaide Hitachi

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER
(DETAILED OPERATION)
This system is intended for research use only.

It is not to be used for reporting patient diagnostic or therapeutic results.
Please read through this manual carefully

and keep it in a safe place.
Before using the instrument, read the safety
instructions and precautions carefully.
Keep this manual in a safe place nearby so it can
be referred to whenever needed.
Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation

24-14, Nishi-Shimbashi 1-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Copyright
Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation 2012.

All rights reserved. Printed in China.
1st Edition, 2012

Part No. 895-9635
Be sure to read through and understand the following points

with regard to this manual.
1. Information contained in this document is subject to
change without notice for improvement.
2. This manual is copyrighted by Hitachi High-Technologies
Corporation with all rights reserved.
No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted
or disclosed to a third party in any form or by any means
without the express written permission of Hitachi
High-Technologies Corporation.
3. Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation assumes no
liability for any direct, indirect, or consequential damages
arising from use not described in this manual.
Utmost care must be exercised when using the
instrument.
4. This document does not provide any warranty or
permission for industrial properties or any rights to grant
license lawfully and without infringement.
PREFACE
Thank you very much for purchasing the Primaide System Manager.
The Primaide System Manager is the Chromato data station for high
performance liquid chromatography (HPLC).
This software is intended for use by persons having a basic
knowledge of chemical analysis.
Remember that improper use of analytical instruments,
chemicals or samples can result not only in wrong analytical
data but also in consequences adverse to safety. Note that only
persons with a basic knowledge of chemical analysis procedures
may use this instrument.
Carefully read this instruction manual before attempting operation. For
proper use of the software, please acquaint yourself with it.
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

The manual of the Primaide System Manager is consists of ;
(1) INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR Primaide System Manager
(INSTALLATION)
(ADMINISTRATION)
(DETAILE OPERATION)
(MAINTENANCE SOFTWARE)
Manuals (2), (3) and (4) have been saved to the Instruction Manual
CD as PDF files.
These instruction manuals describe how to install and use the
Primaide System Manager. The operating procedures and points
that should be especially noted in regard to the software are
contained in this manual.
First of all, read "IMPORTANT" and "SAFETY SUMMARY" at the
beginning of this manual to ensure safe operation of the
Primaide System Manager.
For operation of the Primaide System Manager read the each
instruction manual.
IMPORTANT
Warranty on Product
The Primaide System Manager is warranted to be free from
defects in material or workmanship under normal use within the
product specifications indicated in this manual and under
conditions given below. This warranty is void if the software is
not used according to the instruction manual.
The manufacturer makes no warranties, either express or implied,
except as provided herein, including without limitation thereof,
warranties as to marketability or merchantability, for a particular
purpose or use, or against infringement of any patent.
No oral or written information or advice given by the
manufacturer, its dealers, distributors, agents or employees shall
create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of this
warranty.
(1)
Scope of Warranty
Any parts that prove to be defective in design or
workmanship during the warranty period will be repaired,
adjusted or replaced without charge. A substitute part
may be used for repair, or replacement with an equivalent
product may be made instead of repair. Such system
components as a personal computer and printer to be
updated frequently for improvement may not be available in
original versions at the time of replacement.
Note that this warranty does not apply to the instrument
after it is discarded, or if modified by the user or resold
without permission from the manufacturer, consumable
parts, and any failure of lifetime-expired parts.
The manufacturer assumes no liability for any damage to
data or application software due to any possible fault or
failure of this instrument.
(2)
Warranty Period
One year from the date of initial installation.
(In case a separate warranty document has been issued,
the warranty period indicated in it takes precedence over
the above period.)
IMPORTANT - 1
(3)
Limitations and Exclusions on Warranty

Note that the following cases are excluded from the scope
of this warranty, i.e., these cases are beyond the coverage
of free-of-charge repair even during the warranty period
indicated above.
(a)
Failure due to operation at a place not meeting the

installation requirements specified by the
manufacturer.
(b)
Failure due to power supply voltage/frequency other

than specified by the manufacturer or due to
abnormality in power supply.
(c)
Corrosion or deterioration of the piping due to

impurities contained in gas, compressed air or
cooling water supplied by the user.
(d)
Corrosion of the electric circuits or deterioration of

the optical elements due to highly corrosive
atmospheric gas.
(e)
Failure due to use of software, hardware or spare

parts not supplied by the manufacturer.
(f)
Failure due to use not described in the manual or

improper repair not approved by the manufacturer.
(g)
Failure due to maintenance or repair by other than

service personnel qualified by the manufacturer.
(h)
Failure due to relocation or transport conducted not

under the supervision of the manufacturer after the
initial installation of the instrument.
(i)
Failure due to disassembly, modification or relocation

not approved by the manufacturer.
(j)
Failure due to acts of God, including fire, earthquake,

storm, flood, lightning, social disturbance, riot, crime,
insurrection, terrorism, war (declared or undeclared),
radioactive pollution, contamination with harmful
substances, etc.
IMPORTANT - 2
(4)
(k)
Failure of the hardware, or damage to the system

software, application software or data due to
computer virus infection.
(l)
After disposal of this instrument, after its resale

without prior approval from the manufacturer,
consumable parts, and failure of any part that have
reached the end of its service life.
Disclaimer of Warranty
THE MANUFACTURER MAKES NO WARRANTIES,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS
PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR USE, OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY
PATENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE MANUFACTURER
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR
LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY
DEFECTIVE PRODUCT OR THE USE OF ANY
PRODUCT.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY THE MANUFACTURER, ITS DEALERS,
DISTRIBUTORS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE
THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY.
IMPORTANT - 3
Installation, Relocation and After-sale Technical Service

(1)
(2)
Installation and Relocation

(a)
Installation at delivery shall not be carried out by the

user. It shall be carried out by our sales
representative or the engineers who have been
trained and qualified for this purpose by us in order to
use the instrument safely and accurately.
(b)
Before installation, the user shall make preparations

for satisfying the installation requirements in
accordance with this instruction manual.
(c)
If relocation becomes necessary after initial

installation (delivery), please contact the dealer from
whom you purchased the instrument or our sales
representative.
After-sales Service
(a)
For after-sales service, contact our sales

representative or service office of our sales
representative.
(b)
For service after the warranty period, consult us with

regard to a maintenance and inspection service
contract.
Technical Seminars and Training Courses for Users

We offer technical seminars and training courses at either our or
users facilities to ensure proper and safe operation of the
analytical instrument to its full performance. For further
information, contact our sales representative. (Applicants will
be charged.)
IMPORTANT - 4
Other Precautions
(1)
(2)
Handling of Chemicals and Samples

(a)
The user is responsible for following relevant legal

standards and regulations in handling, storage and
disposal of chemicals and samples used in analytical
operations with this instrument.
(b)
Reagents, standard solutions and accuracy-control

samples shall be handled, stored and discarded as
instructed by the respective suppliers.
Trademark Acknowledgements
Primaide System Manager is registered trademarks of
Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation.
Microsoft, MS, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word, and
Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Windows 7 is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation (USA).
All other trademarks are the property of their respective
holders and are hereby acknowledged.
IMPORTANT - 5
SAFETY SUMMARY
General Safety Guidelines
Before using the Primaide System Manager, be sure to read the
following safety instructions carefully.
The hazard warnings which appear on the warning labels on the
product or in the manual have one of the following alert headings
consisting of a safety alert symbol
and signal word
DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION.
: Safety alert symbol used for calling
attention to a potential hazard which
could cause personal injury.
To avoid possible injury or death,
observe all the safety messages
following this symbol.
DANGER : Indicates an imminently hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING : Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, can
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION : Indicates a hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, can result in minor or
moderate injury.
NOTICE
: Indicates a hazardous situation which, if
avoided, can result in damage to
property.
In addition to the above, the following signal word is used to
indicate instructions for ensuring proper use of the product.
NOTE:
Indicates an instruction for ensuring correct use

of the product and accurate analysis therewith.
SAFETY - 1
SAFETY SUMMARY
Common Safety Precautions
Prior to Use
Before using the product, be sure to read this instruction
manual carefully to attain a full understanding of its
operations.
Keep the instruction manual handy nearby so it can be
referred to whenever needed.
Be sure to observe the procedures specified in the manual.
Be sure to understand and follow all the safety instructions
given in the manual.
Be sure to observe all the hazard warnings attached to the
instrument or provided in the manual. Failure to do so could
result in personal injury or damage to the instrument.
Be sure to follow all the methods of use instructed in the
manual for proper application of the product.
Absolutely avoid modifying the product, using non-specified
parts, or removing safety devices as it could be hazardous.
Do not perform any operation or action other than described
in the manual.
On occurrence of any trouble in the instrument, notify the
nearest sales representative or service office of Hitachi HighTechnologies Corporation.
When using chemicals for the instrument, be sure to provide
proper ventilation of the room. Inadequate ventilation could
endanger human health.
Keep in mind that the hazard warnings in the manuals or on
the product cannot cover every possible case, as it is
impossible to predict and evaluate all circumstances
beforehand. Always be alert and use your common sense.
SAFETY - 2
SAFETY SUMMARY
Common Safety Precautions (Continued)
In Use
If an abnormality such as unusual noise, odor, fuming or gas
leakage occurs during operation of the instrument, immediately
disconnect power to the instrument, and take proper safety
measures as required. Then, notify the nearest Hitachi HighTechnologies Corporation sales representative or service office
of Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation sales representative.
Installation, Maintenance, and Relocation

At the time of delivery, installation of the instrument shall be
carried out by or under supervision of qualified service
personnel of the manufacturer or its authorized service agent
for ensuring safety and high accuracy in operation of the
instrument. It is not permitted for the user to carry out
installation.
After completion of installation, check that all the standard
parts are equipped. If the instrument is made active with any
one of the standard parts not equipped, a failure could occur
to result in a hazardous condition.
If any item is missing or damaged or if you have any question,
notify the installation personnel at site or the nearest Hitachi
High-Technologies Corporation sales representative or
service office of Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation sales
representative.
The maintenance and checkup procedures to be taken by the
user are only those described in the manual. When taking
the maintenance and checkup procedures described in the
manual, attain a clear understanding of them.
Do not perform other maintenance and checkup procedures
to avoid jeopardizing safety and causing troubles in the
instrument.
SAFETY - 3
SAFETY SUMMARY
Common Safety Precautions (Continued)
After installation, do not relocate the instrument. If the
instrument is relocated, vibration or impact to be applied
during relocation could cause a malfunction in the optical
components that have been adjusted precisely.
SAFETY - 4
SAFETY SUMMARY
Safety Instructions in This Manual
Shown below are the safety instructions contained in this manual
and their relevant sections in it.
DANGER Indications
The indication
DANGER does not apply to this product.
WARNING Indications
The indication
WARNING does not apply to this product.
CAUTION Indications
Fatigue due to Long-Hour Operation
If you keep working with the display monitor and keyboard for
long hours, your eyes and body will be fatigued to jeopardize
your health. When working with the display monitor for a long
time, take a break for 10 to 15 minutes per hour for health of
your eyes and body.
(Chapter 1)
SAFETY - 5
SAFETY SUMMARY
NOTICE
Accuracy and Precision of Measured Values
Carry out control sample measurements to ensure that the
performance of the instrument is normal.
Data Backup
Data on the hard disk may become unusable due to a system
failure, wrong operation, computer virus infection, etc.
To ensure data integrity in case of accidental damage to the hard
disk, periodically make backup copies of hard disk files onto
floppy disks. Be sure to carry out this data backup procedure
periodically.
Power Interruption
On occurrence of momentary power voltage drop due to power
interruption or lightning, the personal computer may become
faulty or the basic software, application software or data may be
damaged.
For protection against momentary power voltage drop, it is
advisable to use an AC uninterruptible power supply unit (stated
according to the Japanese Electronic Industry Development
Association guidelines for protection against momentary power
voltage drop in personal computers).
SAFETY - 6
SAFETY SUMMARY
NOTICE (Continued)
About Personal Computer
About handling of the personal computer, read the manual
that is standard-furnished for personal computer and use as
directed.
When using this product, be sure to observe the warnings
and cautions shown by the personal computer manufacturer.
Do not turn off the personal computer main circuit while the
hard disk or removable disk drive is active. If power to the
personal computer is turned off while the hard disk or
removable disk is being accessed, the personal computer
may become faulty or data/software stored in it may be
damaged. Before turning off power to the personal
computer, quit the Primaide System Manager and then take
the shutdown sequence of the operating system of the
personal computer.
Do not locate the personal computer on an unstable place or
a narrow place. Failure to do so could result in personal
injury or damage to the personal computer.
Do not spill the solvent on the personal computer because
there is a possibility that the personal computer fails. Should
you spill the solvent on the personal computer, wipe it off
immediately.
If you use as it is, it cause an electric shock, release of fume
and ignition.
Do not use the volatile liquid near the personal computer
because of the possibility of ignition hazard.
SAFETY - 7
SAFETY SUMMARY
NOTICE (Continued)
Protection against Computer Viruses
If any program/data is damaged suddenly or an unexpected
operation/screen is encountered, the personal computer may be
infected by a computer virus. Computer viruses are malicious
programs that sneak into personal computers to cause
misbehavior or damage to data. And, a program designed to
offer protection against computer viruses is called a vaccine
program.
Possible causes of virus infection are:
(a) Downloading a virus-laden program through
communication.
(b) Using a floppy disk or other storage medium infected by a
virus.
Note also that once a virus infects any personal computer, it
may spread to other computers via communication or storage
medium.
Never use a program or storage medium that is suspected of
containing a virus.
If there is a possibility of virus infection, check for a virus using a
vaccine program. Note, however, that some kinds of vaccine
programs cannot eradicate particular viruses.
In such a case, be sure to make a backup of hard disk files.
The user is requested to prepare a vaccine program and carry
out virus removal on his or her responsibility.
SAFETY - 8
CONTENTS
PREFACE
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
IMPORTANT ....................................................................................................... IMPORTANT-1
Warranty on Product ................................................ IMPORTANT-1
Installation, Relocation and After-sale
Technical Service..................................................... IMPORTANT-4
Technical Seminars and Training Courses for
Users ....................................................................... IMPORTANT-4
Other Precautions .................................................... IMPORTANT-5
SAFETY SUMMARY .................................................................................................. SAFETY-1
General Safety Guidelines ....................................... SAFETY-1
Common Safety Precautions ................................... SAFETY-2
Safety Instructions in This Manual ........................... SAFETY-5
DANGER Indications ..................................... SAFETY-5
WARNING Indications................................... SAFETY-5
CAUTION Indications .................................... SAFETY-5
Fatigue due to Long-Hour Operation ............ SAFETY-5
NOTICE .......................................................................... SAFETY-6
1.
OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1
The Primaide System Manager ...................................... 1-1
1.2
The Main Function .......................................................... 1-2
2.
STARTING/EXITING THE PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER ........................................... 2-1

2.1
Introduction .................................................................... 2-1
2.2
Starting/Exiting the Primaide System Manager ........... 2-2
2.3
Menu ................................................................................ 2-3
2.3.1 File Menu ............................................................. 2-3
2.3.2 Edit Menu ............................................................. 2-7
2.3.3 Window Menu ...................................................... 2-8
2.3.4 Help Menu ............................................................ 2-8
3.
PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER MAIN WINDOW .......................................................... 3-1

3.1
Menu Command Function of Main Window ................. 3-3
3.1.1 File Menu ............................................................. 3-3
3.1.2 Help Menu ............................................................ 3-4
3.2
Main Tool Bar Icons ....................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Change Application Icon ...................................... 3-6
3.2.2 Method Setup Icon ............................................... 3-6
-i-
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
4.
Sampler Setup Icon .............................................. 3-8

Acquire Data Icon................................................. 3-8
Reprocess Data Icon ............................................ 3-9
Report Icon ........................................................ 3-10
System Status Icon ............................................ 3-11
Pump(A) ON/OFF and Pump(B) On/Off Icon ..... 3-13
Module Detailed Information Icon ....................... 3-13
Quick Analysis Start Icon ................................... 3-13
FUNCTION AND OPERATION OF METHOD WINDOW ................................................. 4-1

4.1
Menu Command Function of Main Window ................. 4-1
4.1.1 File Menu ............................................................. 4-2
4.1.2 Edit Menu ............................................................. 4-2
4.1.3 Module Setup Menu ............................................. 4-3
4.1.4 Data Process Setup Menu ................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Option Menu......................................................... 4-5
4.1.6 Window Menu ...................................................... 4-7
4.1.7 Help Menu ............................................................ 4-8
4.2
Using a Method ............................................................... 4-9
4.2.1 Opening an Existing Method .............................. 4-10
4.2.2 Creating a New Method ...................................... 4-11
4.2.3 Adding or Modifying Method Parameters ........... 4-12
4.2.4 Using Reference Methods .................................. 4-12
4.2.5 Saving a Method ................................................ 4-14
4.3
Module Setup Menu...................................................... 4-15
4.3.1 Method Information ............................................ 4-15
4.3.2 Method Configuration ......................................... 4-16
4.3.3 Pump Setup ....................................................... 4-18
4.3.4 Autosampler Setup ............................................. 4-20
4.3.5 Column Oven Setup ........................................... 4-22
4.3.6 Channel 1 or 2 Detector Setup ........................... 4-23
4.3.7 1410 UV Detector Setup .................................... 4-23
4.3.8 USB-AID Setup (AID: Analog Input Device) ....... 4-26
4.3.9 1430 DAD Setup ................................................ 4-28
4.3.10 Time Summary ................................................... 4-30
4.4
Data Processing Setup Menu ...................................... 4-31
4.4.1 Channel 1 or Channel 2 ..................................... 4-31
4.4.2 Calculation Method............................................. 4-31
4.4.3 Component Table............................................... 4-36
4.4.4 Concentration Table ........................................... 4-40
4.4.5 Coefficient Table ................................................ 4-42
4.4.6 Integration Time Table ....................................... 4-44
4.4.7 DAD Data Processing ........................................ 4-47
4.4.8 Chromatogram Display Format .......................... 4-49
4.4.9 DAD Data Display .............................................. 4-52
- ii -
4.4.10 Confidence Report ............................................. 4-54

4.4.11 Report Format .................................................... 4-56
5.
SAMPLE TABLE ............................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1
Sample Table setup ........................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 File Menu ............................................................. 5-2
5.1.2 Edit Menu ............................................................. 5-3
5.1.3 SampleSetup Menu and Sample Table Tool Bar .. 5-4
5.1.4 Window Menu ...................................................... 5-4
5.1.5 Help Menu ............................................................ 5-4
5.2
Using Sample Table ....................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 Opening an Existing Sample Table ...................... 5-5
5.2.2 Creating a Single-Method Sample Table .............. 5-5
5.2.3 Creating a Multi-Method Sample Table ................ 5-7
5.2.4 Editing a Sample Table During Data Acquisition .. 5-8
5.2.5 Saving a Sample Table ........................................ 5-9
5.3
Sample Table Window .................................................. 5-10
5.3.1 Setup Information Screen................................... 5-10
5.3.2 Edit Table Screen............................................... 5-14
6.
ACQUIRING DATA.......................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1
Data Acquisition Window............................................... 6-2
6.1.1 File Menu ............................................................. 6-3
6.1.2 Acquire Menu ....................................................... 6-4
6.1.3 Data Display Menu ............................................... 6-9
6.2
Running Data Acquisition ............................................ 6-12
6.2.1 Initiating the Idle Monitor .................................... 6-13
6.2.2 Starting a Run .................................................... 6-15
6.2.3 Starting Series ................................................... 6-16
6.2.4 Performing a Manual and Auto Noise Test ......... 6-20
6.2.5 Editing a Sample Table During Data Acquisition 6-22
6.2.6 Data Acquisition from arbitrary line of
Sample Table ..................................................... 6-23
6.2.7 Data Reprocess of Data Series of incomplete
Starting series .................................................... 6-24
6.3
Performing On-Line Data Processing ......................... 6-25
6.3.1 Printing of a Report ............................................ 6-25
6.3.2 Statistical Calculation ......................................... 6-25
6.3.3 Calibration .......................................................... 6-26
6.3.4 Blank Subtraction ............................................... 6-26
6.3.5 DAD Data Processing ........................................ 6-27
6.3.6 Data Processing for Two Detectors .................... 6-27
6.4
Quick Analysis Start ..................................................... 6-28
6.4.1 Setting Parameter .............................................. 6-28
- iii -
7.
FUCTION AND OPERATION OF DATA-PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW .............. 7-1

7.1
Configuration of Data-Processing Control Window .... 7-1
7.1.1 File Menu ............................................................. 7-2
7.1.2 Edit Menu ............................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 Option Menu......................................................... 7-3
7.1.4 Window Menu ...................................................... 7-4
7.1.5 Help Menu ............................................................ 7-4
7.2
Operation of Data-Processing Control Window ........... 7-5
7.2.1 Overview .............................................................. 7-5
7.2.2 Injection Table ...................................................... 7-5
7.2.3 Function Buttons .................................................. 7-6
7.3
Calibration Curve Window ........................................... 7-10
7.3.1 Overview ............................................................ 7-10
7.3.2 Options Menu ..................................................... 7-11
7.3.3 View Menu ......................................................... 7-13
7.3.4 Using Calibration Curves .................................... 7-14
7.4
Modify Report screen ................................................... 7-18
7.4.1 File Menu ........................................................... 7-18
7.4.2 Options Menu ..................................................... 7-19
7.4.3 Help Menu .......................................................... 7-20
7.5
Injection Table .............................................................. 7-21
7.5.1 Injection Table .................................................... 7-21
7.5.2 Recalculating...................................................... 7-22
8.
DATA-PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW -CHROMATOGRAM- ................................ 8-1

8.1
Configuration of Data-Processing control Window ..... 8-2
8.1.1 File Menu ............................................................. 8-3
8.1.2 Edit Menu ............................................................. 8-4
8.1.3 Data control Menu ................................................ 8-5
8.1.4 Options Menu ....................................................... 8-7
8.1.5 View Menu ........................................................... 8-9
8.1.6 Window Menu .................................................... 8-10
8.1.7 Manual Baseline Icons ....................................... 8-10
8.2
Setting up/Modifying Data Processing Parameters ... 8-11
8.2.1 Setting Up a Component Table with a
Chromatogram ................................................... 8-11
8.2.2 Setting Up Integration Time Table Using the
Displayed Chromatogram ................................... 8-12
8.2.3 Other Data Control Parameters .......................... 8-13
8.2.4 Manually Correcting Baselines ........................... 8-14
8.3
Using Multi-Display Mode ............................................ 8-16
8.3.1 Multi-Display window .......................................... 8-16
8.3.2 File Menu ........................................................... 8-17
8.3.3 Edit Menu ........................................................... 8-18
8.3.4 Option Menu....................................................... 8-19
- iv -
8.4
8.5
9.
8.3.5 Window Menu .................................................... 8-26

8.3.6 Help Menu .......................................................... 8-26
Manipulating Display Features .................................... 8-27
8.4.1 Manipulating Display Features ........................... 8-27
8.4.2 Panning Graphs ................................................. 8-28
8.4.3 Changing the Upper Y-Axis Value ...................... 8-28
8.4.4 Moving the Line Cursor ...................................... 8-29
Include Statistics Report for QC or Unk Vials ............ 8-30
MODIFY REPORT ........................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1
Print Preview Window .................................................... 9-2
9.2
Opening the Report Preview Window ........................... 9-3
9.3
Functional Buttons ......................................................... 9-3
10. REPORT LAYOUT EDITOR .......................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Outline for Creating Report ......................................... 10-1
10.2 Report Layout Editor .................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 Report Layout Editor Window............................. 10-3
10.2.2 Template Display Area ....................................... 10-4
10.2.3 Separator ........................................................... 10-4
10.2.4 Flame ................................................................. 10-5
10.3 Menu Bar/Toolbar ......................................................... 10-6
10.3.1 File Menu ........................................................... 10-6
10.3.2 Edit Menu ........................................................... 10-7
10.3.3 Option Menu....................................................... 10-8
10.3.4 Window Menu .................................................... 10-8
10.3.5 Help Menu .......................................................... 10-9
10.4 Selection Buttons ....................................................... 10-10
10.4.1 Selection Buttons ............................................. 10-10
10.4.2 Report Items List .............................................. 10-12
10.4.3 Framed Report Items ....................................... 10-13
10.5 Report Layout Editor .................................................. 10-14
10.5.1 Generating a Report ......................................... 10-14
10.5.2 Mismatched Layout Items Dialog ..................... 10-15
10.6 Method Layout Template ........................................... 10-16
10.6.1 Creating a New Master Layout ......................... 10-16
10.6.2 Load Master Layout Dialog............................... 10-16
10.6.3 Basic Steps in Formatting a Layout .................. 10-17
10.7 Dependency Function of Report Items ..................... 10-34
10.7.1 Modifying Dependencies .................................. 10-34
10.7.2 Modify Dependencies Dialog ............................ 10-35
10.8 Master Layout ............................................................. 10-37
10.8.1 Modify Master Layout Dialog ............................ 10-37
10.8.2 Save Master Layout Dialog .............................. 10-38
10.9 Master Layout File ...................................................... 10-38
-v-
10.10 Special Report Items .................................................. 10-39

10.10.1 Multi-Chrom Overlay Report ............................. 10-39
10.10.2 Resolution Report ............................................ 10-39
11. FUNCTIONS AND OPERATIONS OF MODULE
DETAILED INFORMATION WINDOW .......................................................................... 11-1
11.1 Status Display on Module Detailed Information
Window ......................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 Common (system status) ................................... 11-1
11.1.2 1110 Pump ......................................................... 11-2
11.1.3 1210 autosampler .............................................. 11-2
11.1.4 1310 column oven .............................................. 11-3
11.1.5 1410 UV detector ............................................... 11-3
11.1.6 USB-AID ............................................................ 11-3
11.1.7 1430 DAD .......................................................... 11-4
11.2 Control Commands on Module Detailed Information
Window ......................................................................... 11-5
11.3 Status Display............................................................... 11-8
11.3.1 1110 Pump Status Display ................................. 11-8
11.3.2 1210 Autosampler Status Display .................... 11-12
11.3.3 1310 Column Oven Status Display ................... 11-16
11.3.4 1410 UV Detector Status Display ..................... 11-17
11.3.5 USB-AID Status Display ................................... 11-20
11.3.6 1430 DAD Status Display ................................. 11-21
12. DATA RE-PROCESSING - 3D DATA - .......................................................................... 12-1
12.1 Composition of a data re-processing window ........... 12-2
12.1.1 File Menu ........................................................... 12-3
12.1.2 Edit Menu ........................................................... 12-4
12.1.3 Process Data Menu ............................................ 12-5
12.1.4 Options Menu ..................................................... 12-7
12.1.5 Library Menu .................................................... 12-11
12.1.6 View Menu ....................................................... 12-12
12.1.7 Window Menu .................................................. 12-15
12.2 Set and Modify Extracted Parameters of
Chromatogram ............................................................ 12-16
12.2.1 Display Chromatogram with
Arbitrary Wavelength........................................ 12-16
12.2.2 Selecting/Displaying Chromatograms with
Fixed Wavelengths........................................... 12-17
12.2.3 Displaying Integrated Chromatogram ............... 12-18
12.2.4 Displaying/Editing the Best Chromatogram ...... 12-19
12.2.5 Other Data Processing Parameter ................... 12-22
- vi -
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.2.6 Data Reprocessing of Extracted

Chromatogram ................................................. 12-23
Set and Modify Extracted Parameter of Spectrum ... 12-24
12.3.1 Spectrum Display of Arbitrary Time .................. 12-24
12.3.2 Overlapping Display of Spectrum ..................... 12-25
12.3.3 Selecting a Background-Spectrum/Displaying
a Background-Subtracted Spectrum ................ 12-26
12.3.4 Specify Integrated Spectrum ............................ 12-27
Performing/Displaying Peak-Purity Checks ............. 12-28
12.4.1 Perform Peak Purity Check .............................. 12-28
12.4.2 Check purity Check Spectrum .......................... 12-29
12.4.3 Set and modify Peak Purity Check Processing
Parameter ........................................................ 12-30
Other Display Window ............................................... 12-31
12.5.1 Chromatogram Display Window ....................... 12-31
12.5.2 Spectrum Display Window ............................... 12-32
12.5.3 Using 3-D Mesh View ....................................... 12-34
Change Operation of Graph View ............................. 12-36
12.6.1 Zooming and Un-zooming of Graph ................. 12-36
12.6.2 Moving the Chromatogram ............................... 12-37
12.6.3 changing Signal Intensity Scale........................ 12-37
12.6.4 Moving Wavelength Cursor and Time Cursor ... 12-37
13. Spectrum Library Window .......................................................................................... 13-1

13.1 Configuration of Spectrum library Window ................ 13-1
13.1.1 Process Menu .................................................... 13-2
13.1.2 Options Menu ..................................................... 13-3
13.2 Managing Spectrum Library ........................................ 13-5
13.2.1 Modifying Library Spectrum Information ............. 13-5
13.2.2 Filtering of Spectrum List ................................... 13-8
13.2.3 Delete Spectrum ................................................ 13-9
13.3 Using Spectrum Library ............................................. 13-10
13.3.1 Library Menu .................................................... 13-12
13.3.2 Searching and Saving Spectrum Library .......... 13-14
13.3.3 Reverse Search library ..................................... 13-19
13.3.4 Search library under Data Acquisition .............. 13-21
14. HPLC APPLICATION INFORMATION .......................................................................... 14-1
14.1 Introduction .................................................................. 14-1
14.2 Example of a Solvent Time Table for
Gradient Elution ........................................................... 14-1
14.3 Determining a Sampling Period .................................. 14-2
14.3.1 Automatic Sampling Period Mode ...................... 14-2
14.3.2 Manual Sampling Period Mode........................... 14-2
14.4 Detector WL Table and Best WL Chromatogram ....... 14-3
- vii -
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
14.10
14.11
14.12
14.13
14.14
Quantification Methods................................................ 14-3

14.5.1 Area% / Height% Method ................................... 14-3
14.5.2 Calibration Curve ............................................... 14-4
14.5.3 External Standard Method .................................. 14-5
14.5.4 Normalized-% Method ........................................ 14-7
14.5.5 Internal Standard Method ................................... 14-8
Peak Identification ...................................................... 14-10
14.6.1 Example of Percentage Time Window (%TIME)
......................................................................... 14-10
14.6.2 Example of Absolute Time Window
(Absolute Time) ................................................ 14-10
14.6.3 Peak Identification Rules .................................. 14-11
Blank Subtraction ....................................................... 14-12
Grouping Individual Components ............................. 14-14
Retention Time ........................................................... 14-15
14.9.1 Relative Retention Time (RRT) ........................ 14-15
14.9.2 Corrected Retention Time (CRT)...................... 14-16
Integration and Baseline Correction ......................... 14-18
14.10.1 Peak Detection and Integration ........................ 14-18
14.10.2 Noise ................................................................ 14-21
14.10.3 Bunching .......................................................... 14-22
14.10.4 Smoothing ........................................................ 14-22
14.10.5 Sensitivity ......................................................... 14-23
14.10.6 Peak Detection ................................................. 14-23
14.10.7 N-Method ......................................................... 14-23
14.10.8 Integration-Inhibit ............................................. 14-24
14.10.9 Tail ................................................................... 14-24
14.10.10 Vertical .......................................................... 14-24
14.10.11 Forward- and Backward-Horizontal ................ 14-24
14.10.12 Negative Peak ............................................... 14-25
14.10.13 Group ............................................................ 14-25
14.10.14 Precedence of Baseline Functions................. 14-26
14.10.15 Baseline Code ............................................... 14-26
Peak Purity Check Using Spectra ............................. 14-28
Spectral Correlation in Spectral Peak ID, Peak Purity,
and Spectrum Library Search .................................... 14-30
Statistical Calculations Used by Primaide System
Manager ...................................................................... 14-31
14.13.1 Average............................................................ 14-31
14.13.2 Dispersion (Variance) ....................................... 14-31
14.13.3 Standard Deviation ........................................... 14-31
14.13.4 Relative Standard Deviation ............................. 14-31
14.13.5 Coefficient of Determination ............................. 14-32
System Suitability Test (SST) .................................... 14-33
14.14.1 Capacity Factor, (k') ......................................... 14-34
- viii -
14.14.2 Selectivity, () .................................................. 14-34

14.14.3 Number of Theoretical Plates, N ...................... 14-35
14.14.4 Resolution, R.................................................... 14-37
14.14.5 Asymmetry, Asym ............................................ 14-39
14.14.6 Signal -to- Noise Ratio ..................................... 15-40
14.15 Data Diagnosis ........................................................... 14-42
14.15.1 Designating a Diagnosis Peak ......................... 14-42
14.15.2 Designating Expected Concentration (E-Conc)
Peaks ............................................................... 14-43
14.16 Decomposed Substance Report................................ 14-44
14.16.1 Rule on Component Peak Search .................... 14-44
14.16.2 Calculation Method for Decomposed Substance
Report .............................................................. 14-45
14.17 Troubleshooting ......................................................... 14-46
14.17.1 Peak Determination Problems .......................... 14-46
14.17.2 Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis Problems14-49
14.17.3 Error Clearing Method ...................................... 14-50
APPENDIX .......................................................................................................... APPENDIX 1-1
APPENDIX 1. FUNCTION AND OPERATION OF
ONLINE DDE .................................... APPENDIX 1-1
AP.1.1 Operating Environment of Attached Online DDE
Program ............................................ APPENDIX 1-1
AP.1.2 Setting of Method .............................. APPENDIX 1-2
AP.1.3 Details of Attached Online DDE
Program ............................................ APPENDIX 1-3
AP.1.4 Setup of Online DDE ......................... APPENDIX 1-5
AP.1.5 Example of Online DDE Result ......... APPENDIX 1-6
APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION OF PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER
.......................................................... APPENDIX 2-1
AP.2.1 Application in Internal Standard
Method .............................................. APPENDIX 2-1
AP.2.2 Application of Report Output ............. APPENDIX 2-3
APPENDIX. 3 AIA FILE CONVERSIONS ................ APPENDIX 3-1
AP3.1 To Convert from Raw Data to
AIA Format ........................................ APPENDIX 3-1
APPENDIX. 4 CAUTION ON SETTING OF
SAMPLING PERIOD ......................... APPENDIX 4-1
APPENDIX. 5 CAUTION ON SETTING OF
RESPONSE ...................................... APPENDIX 5-1
APPENDIX. 6 ABOUT ERROR MESSAGE ............. APPENDIX 6-1
AP6.1 1110Pump A/B Message ................... APPENDIX 6-1
AP6.2 1210Autosampler .............................. APPENDIX 6-2
AP6.3 1310Column Oven ............................ APPENDIX 6-4
AP6.4 1410UV Detector............................... APPENDIX 6-6
- ix -
AP6.5 USB-AID ........................................... APPENDIX 6-7

AP6.6 1430 DAD ......................................... APPENDIX 6-8
TERMINOLOGY .............................................. TERMINOLOGY - 1
INDEX .............................................................................. INDEX - 1
-x-
1.1
1. OVERVIEW
CAUTION
Fatigue due to Long-Hour Operation
If you keep working with the display monitor and
keyboard for long hours, your eyes and body will be
fatigued to jeopardize your health. When working
with the display monitor for a long time, take a break
for 10 to 15 minutes per hour for health of your eyes
and body.
1.1 The Primaide System Manager

The Primaide System Manager is supported the control function, the data
acquisition and the data processing function to a High Performance Liquid
Chromatography (HPLC) with the personal computer (PC).
The Primaide System Manager is linked through a USB interface board (IFB) to
control Primaide 1000 Series Pumps, autosampler, column oven, and UV
detector using Hitachi e-Line (elite Line).
3 D data acquisition and 3 D data processing from PC by the Primaide System
Manager become possible.
Primaide System Manager
Control
HPLC System
1-1
1.2 The Main Function
1.2 The Main Function

1) Method Development
Instrument-control parameters
Data-processing parameters
Report Layout Editor
2) Data Acquisition
On-line monitoring of HPLC units
On-line display of Chromatogram data
Multi-Method data acquisition
On-line monitor of 3 D contour map
Spectrum search library
3) Chromatogram Data Processing
Quantitation
System suitability testing
Identification of components by time window and spectra
Identifying the component by retention time and spectrum
4) 3 D Data Processing
Spectrum data processing
Contour map display and 3 D map display
Creating and searching the spectrum library
Comparing spectrum
Blank subtraction
Peak purity check
Extracting the chromatogram from 3 D data (DAD data)
5) Report Generation
On-line quantitation report
On-line confidence report
Reprocess-mode report generation
Export report files to Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Word
Data report of on-line DAD
6) File Management
Opening a Method, sample table, data, or report file
Saving a Method, sample table, data or report file
Copying files from one application to another
Deleting a Method, sample table, data, or report file
1-2
1.2
7) Module
Detailed information
Module control
Maintenance information/reset
1-3
2.
2. STARTING/EXITING THE PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER

2.1 Introduction
The Primaide System Manager program uses the basic terminology and
techniques established for Windows operating system with regard to screen,
menu, mouse, keyboard, and Help functions.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows operating system User's Guide for a review of
these fundamentals.
NOTE:
NOT RESPONDING message will be indicated on the screen of

Primaide System Manager when you execute a low-speed operation
such as a communication connection to an instrument.
software will not be affected.
processing.
2-1
However,
Please wait for a completion of
2.2 Starting/Exiting the Primaide System Manager
2.2 Starting/Exiting the Primaide System Manager

Click [Primaide] icon on desktop.
The Primaide System Manager is started and the Main Window appears.
The Primaide System Manager clicks [All Program][Primaide][Primaide] of
the Start menu under the left of the window, Or, the Main Window is displayed
by starting when the [Primaide] icon of desktop is double-clicked.
Windows 7 Start Menu
(Primaide Icon)
Primaide System Manager is operated from the Main Window.
Chose [Exit] in File Menu of the Main Window for exiting the Primaide System
Manager.
Or, please click button on the right of the Main Window.
2-2
2.3
2.3 Menu
The main menu item is as follows.
2.3.1 File Menu

The File menu on the Primaide System Manager program contains the
following commands.
New
Ctrl+N
Opens the New dialog box and creates a new Method or Sample Table.
Choose the New command from the File menu to open the New dialog box
shown below.
Highlight the desired file type (Method or Sample Table) and choose OK.
Either the Method Setup or Sample Setup starts with parameters set to
program defaults or blank settings.
You can modify parameters and choose Save As from the File menu to save the
file with a new name.
Open...
Ctrl+O
Opens the Open File dialog box so you can open an existing Method, Sample
Table, Data Series, or Report.
Choose Open from the File menu to display the Open File dialog box shown
below:
2-3
2.3.1 File Menu
Refer to Table 2.1 for the functions of the Open File command buttons.
Table 2-1 Open File Commands
Button
Copy
Function
Opens the Copy dialog box to allow you to copy Methods,
Sample Tables, Data Series, and Reports.
The Delete button opens the Delete dialog box to delete files.
The Delete function is only available to certain users whom the
System Administrator has granted file deletion rights using the
Primaide Administration program.
Delete
Sort
Opens the Sort dialog box to sort Methods, Sample Tables,

Data, and Reports. The type of file being sorted is reflected in
the name visible in the Title Bar of the dialog box (e. g. , Sort
Sample). Files cannot be sorted by name or by date/time. The
sort order can be either ascending or descending.
Filter
Initiates the Data Filter dialog box, but only when the chosen
File Type is Data.
Rename
Opens the Rename dialog when the File Type is either Data or
Report. Use to change the file name or report name.
OK
Opens the highlighted file. If the File Type is Method, the

Method Information screen is opened. If it is Sample Tables,
the Setup Information screen is opened. If the File Type is
Data, the associated Injection Table is displayed. If the File
type is Report, the selected report is displayed in the Report
Preview window.
Cancel
Cancels the Open File dialog box.
The Open File dialog box is accessible via the Method, Sample Table,
Data-Processing Control, and Preview/Print Report icons on the Main Tool Bar
in particular situations (See Section 3.2, Main Tool Bar Icons) Regardless of how
the dialog box is opened, you may select any file type.
2-4
2.3.1
Close
In general, choose Close from the File menu to close the window that is active.
The window can be for a Method, Sample Table, Injection Table, or data display.
In the following cases, however, the Close command is disabled by the Primaide
System Manager program:
(1) If one Method and one or more Injection Tables are open, the Primaide
System Manager program disables the Close command so that the Method
cannot be closed before the Injection Table.
(2) If one Sample Table is open and active, and the Data acquisition window is
also open, the Primaide System Manager program disables the Close
command so that the Sample Table that is currently in use for data
acquisition cannot be closed until the Data Acquisition window is closed.
When closing an Injection Table with the Close command, the Primaide System
Manager program automatically closes any associated data display windows
that are open.
Close All
Closes all open functions in all open windows regardless of focus. If any window
has been modified, the program offers the opportunity to save it.
When Data Acquisition is in a mode other than Idle Monitor, the Primaide
System Manager program closes all other types of windows except the Data
Acquisition window and the Sample Table that currently is in use.
If data acquisition is in Idle Monitor mode, the Primaide System Manager
program closes all windows.
Print Preview
The preview screen of the contents of the display can be displayed by clicking
menu bar. The print output can be performed from this screen.
Print Setup...
Lets you pick a printer, paper orientation (Portrait or Landscape), paper size
(letter, legal, A4, B5) and the paper source (tray or manual).
Print...
Ctrl+P
The contents of the display can be printed.

Save Method
Saves the current Method on display in the Window. The previous version on
the hard disk is over-written after you respond to all Method validation
messages, if any.
2-5
2.3.1 File Menu
Save Method As...

The Save As dialog boxes allow you to specify the name of the current Method or
Sample Table and the name of the Application under which the Method or Table
is to be saved.
The Save As dialog box offers the following options:

a)Name
Enter a new name in the text-entry box or highlight an existing name displayed
in the list box.
b)Application
Highlight the application name in the list box to indicate where the Method or
Sample Table is to be saved.
c)Comment
Enter appropriate comments (99 characters, maximum) regarding the file saved
using the Save As function.
d)OK
Choose the OK button to save the Method or Sample Table with the specified
name to the specified application. If the name already exists in the application,
the Primaide System Manager program requests an OK to overwrite the
existing file.
e)Cancel
Choose the Cancel function to cancel the Save As dialog box.
2-6
2.3.2
Save Sample
Saves the Sample Table in focus.
When you select this command, the Primaide System Manager program starts
to validate the Sample Table and then initiate the Save As dialog box. The
previous file version on the hard disk is overwritten.
Save Sample As...
Initiates Sample Table validation and opens the Save As dialog box so that you
can specify the Title of the Sample Table and the name of the Application.
Exit
Exits the Primaide System Manager program.
Exit is inactive while you are acquiring data using Data Acquisition.
Prompts to save documents.
2.3.2 Edit Menu

The Edit menu on the Primaide System Manager program contains the
following commands.
Copy
Ctrl+C
Copies a selection to the Windows clipboard. The original from which the
selection was copied remains unchanged. To transfer the selected (highlighted)
Method, Sample Table, Data or Report files from the current application to
another application, select (highlight) the application on the Copy dialog box.
Cut
Ctrl+X
If it is a screen of the table, copies a highlighted item to the Windows clip-board,

and deletes the highlighted item.
Delete
Ctrl+Del (table) , Del (Report edit)
If it is a screen of the table, deletes the highlighted item.

Paste
Ctrl+V
Used in conjunction with the Cut and Copy commands.

Inserts a copy of the selection stored in the Windows clipboard at the insertion
point determined by the mouse pointer.
Edit Colors...
Opens the Color Selection dialog box to allow you to change screen colors. Items
associated with the current window are listed in the upper left box.
The Color Selection dialog box appears as shown below. Select an item and
change colors using the score bars. Click on the Preview button to preview the
new color; click on the Save button to save the color.
2-7
2.3.3 Window Menu
2.3.3 Window Menu

following commands.
Arrange Icons
Arrange icons at the bottom of the window.
Cascade
Arrange windows so they overlap.
Tile
Arrange windows as non-overlapping tiles.
2.3.4 Help Menu

following commands.
Index
List Help topics.
Using Help
Display instructions about how to use help.
About Primaide...
Displays the About the Primaide System Manager Program dialog box. This box
provides specific information such as the program name, part number, version
number, serial number, licensee name, and a copyright notice.
2-8
3.
3. PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER MAIN WINDOW

Basic items on the Main window are shown below:
Display Area
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Main Tool Bar

Status Bar
1) Title Bar
The title bar is the horizontal bar located along the top of the Main window. It
displays the program title (Primaide System Manager) and the names of the
current application (e. g. , samples, in the above illustration) and the current
Method.
2) Menu Bar
The menu bar is the horizontal bar located directly below the title bar. It lists
program menus.
The menus that are available change according to the task that is active. Each
menu, when opened, provides a list of command options. See a more detailed
description of the menus available to the Primaide System Manager.
3) Display Area
The display area is the large open area of the Primaide System Manager
program Main window. Initially, when the program boots up, the display area
shows the Primaide System Manager program logo. Subsequently, dependent
on the task selected, it displays one of a variety of task windows.
3-1
3. PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER MAIN WINDOW
4) Main Tool Bar

The Main Tool Bar is the vertical bar located along the left side of the main
window. It contains the following icons.
5) Status Bar
The status bar is the horizontal bar located along the bottom of the main
window. It displays program messages, current date and time, and item
information.
3-2
3.1
3.1 Menu Command Function of Main Window

The menu of the main window is as follows.
3.1.1 File Menu

The following items are found in the File menu of the Main Window:
Please refer to [2.3.1 File Menu] for a general menu.
New
Ctrl+N
Create a new document.

Open...
Ctrl+O
Open an existing document.

Close All
Close all open documents.
Print Setup...
Change the printer and printing options.
Spectrum Library
The Spectrum Library window is opened. This command can be used in the
Main Window or the Reprocess Data window (See Chapter13 for library
window).
3-3
3.1.2 Help Menu
Exit
Quit the application; prompts to save documents.
3.1.2 Help Menu

The Help Menu contains the following commands. Index Opens a Help window
and displays a list of main topics.
Please refer to [2.3.4 Help Menu] for a general menu.
Index
List Help topics.
Using Help
About Primaide...
Display program information, version number and copyright.
3-4
3.2
3.2 Main Tool Bar Icons

The Main Tool Bar Icons contains the followings.
Table 3-1 Main Tool Bar Icons
Icon
Icon Name and Function

Change Application
Select to open the Application dialog to switch to a different

application.
Method Setup
Select to begin Method Setup functions.
Sampler Setup
Select to begin Sample Table Setup functions.
Acquire Data
Select to begin Data Acquisition functions.
Reprocess Data
Select to begin Data Processing Control functions.
Report
Select to open the Open File dialog box to review report

files.
System Status
Select to open the Hardware Status dialog box to display

the current hardware status, before and after downloading
and during idle monitoring or data processing.
Select upper icon to toggle Pump A on/off; select lower
icon to toggle Pump B on/off.
Pump(A/B) ON/OFF
Module Detailed
Information
Detailed information on the module (status) and the control

setting .
Quick Analysis Start
It is possible to shift to the data collection monitor

promptly by the input of the analysis file name and the
rack name, etc.
3-5
3.2.1 Change Application Icon
3.2.1 Change Application Icon

Application feature to change from one system application to another.
When you click the Change Application icon, the Icon Primaide System
Manager program displays the Application dialog box.
In the list box, highlight the application name and choose Select.
(1) If one or more types of windows other than a Data Acquisition window are
open, the Primaide System Manager closes all the windows (i. e. , executes
Close All) and changes to the new application.
(2) If one or more types of windows including the Data Acquisition window are
open and data acquisition is in progress, the Primaide System Manager
closes all windows except the Data Acquisition window and the Sample
Table used by Data Acquisition, and changes to the new application.
(3) If one or more types of windows including a Data Acquisition window are
open and the Data acquisition window is in the Idle Monitor mode, the
Primaide System Manager closes all the windows (including the Data
Acquisition window and the Sample Table being used) and changes to the
new application.
(4) If nothing is open in the Main window, the Primaide System Manager
changes to the new application.
3.2.2 Method Setup Icon

Clicking on the Set Up Method icon initiates the Method Setup function.
The Primaide System Manager program requires that only one Method be open
at any time (except for reference Methods).
You cannot close a Method being used for data processing.
Depending on the situation, the Primaide System Manager program takes the
following actions when you choose the Method Setup icon:
(1) If no Method window is open (first-time log-in), the Primaide System
Manager program displays the Open File dialog box with Method selected
as the default File Type (i. e. , performs the Open command from the File
menu). The last-used Method for the current application is highlighted.
3-6
3.2.2
(2) If one Method window is open but not active (minimized to an icon), the
Primaide System Manager program minimizes all other windows to icons
and activates (maximizes) the open Method window.
(3) If one Method window is open and active and no Injection Table is open, the
Primaide System Manager program displays the Open File dialog box with
Method as a default File Type (i. e. , performs the Open command from the
File menu). The last-used Method for the current application is highlighted.
When you select a Method, a message appears for you to confirm Close
current Method(s)?. If Cancel is chosen, the Primaide System Manager
cancels the entire open file function. If OK is chosen, the Primaide System
Manager closes and saves the cur-rent Method and opens the new Method.
All other windows are minimized.
(4) If one Method is open and active, and one or more Injection Tables are open
as well, the Primaide System Manager displays the Open File Dialog with
Method as a default Type.
The last used Method for the current application is highlighted.
When you select a Method, the Primaide System Manager first verifies the new
Method configuration. (See Injection Table or Data Processing Tool)
If it does not match, an error dialog is displayed with detector types listed for
the new Method and the open Injection Tables and the Primaide System
Manager fails to open the new Method.
If the succeeds, a message appears for you to confirm Close current Method(s).
If Cancel is pressed, the Primaide System Manager cancels the entire open file
function.
If OK is pressed, the Primaide System Manager closes the current Method,
opens the new Method, and minimizes all other windows.
The Primaide System Manager then updates all open Injection Tables and their
graphical displays according to the newly opened Method.
3-7
3.2.3 Sampler Setup Icon
3.2.3 Sampler Setup Icon

You can open multiple Sample Tables via the Sample Table Setup Table Icon
function. However, it requires that one Sample Table window must be selected
when the Data Acquisition window is open.
Depending on the situation, the Primaide System Manager program takes one
of the following actions when you choose the Sampler Setup icon.
(1) If no Sample Table window is open, the Primaide System Manager program
displays the Open File dialog box with Sample Table chosen as the File
Type (i. e. , performs the Open command from the File menu).
The last-used Sample Table for the current application is highlighted.
When you select a Sample Table and choose OK, the Primaide System
Manager program opens the Sample Table and sets all other windows to
background.
(2) If one or more Sample Tables are open and all of them are minimized, the
Primaide System Manager program minimizes all other windows (e. g., a
Method window and restores (maximizes) all Sample Tables. 3. If one or
more Sample Tables are open and one is selected (active), the Primaide
System Manager program displays the Open File dialog box with Sample
Table selected as a default File Type (i. e., performs the Open command).
The last-used Sample Table for the current application is highlighted.
When you select a Sample Table and choose OK, the Primaide System
Manager program opens the Sample Table, maximizes all other Sample
Tables, and minimizes all other types of windows (e. g., a Method window).
3.2.4 Acquire Data Icon

The Primaide System Manager allows you to open one Data Acquisition
Window.
The following rules are followed when you click on the Acquire Data icon:
(1) If no Data Acquisition Window is open, the Primaide System Manager
displays the Open Sample Table for Data Acquisition Dialog where all
sample tables in the current application are listed.
Upon your selection of a Sample Table, the Primaide System Manager
opens the Sample Table and starts the Data Acquisition window by
validating the first Method in the Sample Table for starting Idle Monitor.
(2) If no Data Acquisition Window is open and no Sample Tables can be found
in the current application, the Primaide System Manager displays the
message: No sample tables available.
3-8
3.2.5
(3) If the Data Acquisition Window is already open but not active, the Primaide
System Manager restores (maximize) the Data Acquisition Window.
3.2.5 Reprocess Data Icon

A Method must be open before injection data can be opened via the
Data-Processing Control function.
The Primaide System Manager program takes the following actions when you
choose the Reprocess Data icon.
(1) If no Method is open and no Injection Table is open, the Primaide System
Manager program displays the Open File dialog box with Data as the
default File Type (i. e. , performs the Open command from the File menu).
The last-used or last-acquired Injection Table (whichever is more recent) for
the current application is highlighted.
When you select an Injection Table and choose OK, the Primaide System
Manager program automatically opens the Method used to acquire the
stored data.
It then proceeds to the Method verification.
(2) If one Method is open and one or more Injection Tables (including their
graphical display windows) are also open but not active, the Primaide
System Manager program restores all Injection Tables (including graphical
displays) with the last-opened one set to foreground and sets the Method to
background.
(3) If one Method is open, and one or more Injection Tables (including their
data display windows) are also open with one of them selected (active), the
Primaide System Manager program displays the Open File dialog box with
Data as the default File Type (i. e. , performs the Open command from the
File menu).
The last-used or last-acquired Injection Table (whichever is more recent) for
the current application is highlighted.
Upon your selection of an Injection Table, the Primaide System Manager
program verifies the Method configuration with the new Injection Table.
If it does not match, the Primaide System Manager displays the error
dialog indicating the detector types of the Method and the Injection Table
and fails to open the data.
If the Method verification is successful, it opens the Injection Table.
3-9
3.2.6 Report Icon
3.2.6 Report Icon

Choose the Preview/Print Report icon to have the Primaide System Manager
program perform the Open command and display the Open File dialog box with
Report chosen as a default.
The Open File dialog box contains a list of report files available from the data
files open on display.
If no file is open, the list appears blank.
NOTE:
Before using Print Preview, ensure that the proper printer driver is
installed.
3-10
3.2.7
3.2.7 System Status Icon

When you choose the System Status icon, the Module Status dialog box appears
showing the current system configuration.
After connection for communications with each module, the following icons can
be accessed.
Data Acquisition
Pump on/off
Module Detailed Information
Quick Analysis Start
It changes by the Primaide Administration program in the module composition.
You can change the configuration via the Primaide Administration program.
NOTE:
The hardware components in the HPLC system must be set up using

the Primaide Administration program. If the program detects a
component that has not been set up in Primaide Administration, a
warning message appears, the component does not appear in the
screen display of system components, and the unconfigured
component is not considered a hardware component of the system.
3-11
3.2.7 System Status Icon
It explains the item of the Module Detailed Information dialog box as follows.
1) Status
Displays system status information that is also viewable in the Data
Acquisition window. When you first start the program, displays the message
"Downloading" while it downloads information to the Primaide System
Manager. Upon completion of the downloading process, the current system
status displays on screen.
2) Key Lock
The Lock/Unlock buttons are only activated for use by the System
Administrator.
Click on the respective button to Lock/Unlock instrument key. The Lock/Unlock
function over rides the setting on the GLP Options in the Primaide
Administration program.
3) Module
Interface
Displayed are the type of communication interface (namely, IFB), program No.
and serial No. that are recognized by the Primaide System Manager program.
When AID is connected, program No. will not be displayed.
Pump A
Pump A type of system, program No. and serial No. are displayed.
Pump B
Pump B type of system, program No. and serial No. are displayed.
Autosampler
The type of autosampler, program No. and serial No. are displayed.
Oven
The type of column oven, program No. and serial No. are displayed.
Detector Ch1/Ch2
The form, program No. , and cereal No. of the detector are shown.
Accessory
Connected attached device name or form (for instance, cooling unit) and
program No. and serial No. are shown.
4) OK
Click to the OK button to close the dialog box.
5) Initialize
Click to connect each module with Primaide System Manager. This allows the
interface module to recognize a new component that has been powered up after
the entire system was already operational.
6) Disconnection
Click to disable and disconnect from all data acquisition functions.
3-12
3.2.8
7) Error release
When the error occurs in connected module, the Error release button is
displayed.
NOTE:
The added component must have already been configured as a part of

the system at some time in the past, using the Primaide
3.2.8 Pump(A) ON/OFF and Pump(B) On/Off Icon

When you choose the Pump(A/B) On/Off icon, the pump is turned on and off.
3.2.9 Module Detailed Information Icon

When you choose the Module Detailed Information icon, Open the Module
Detailed Information window.
The Module Detailed Information window is usable for checking the detailed
information about modules and controlling them.
3.2.10 Quick Analysis Start Icon

When quick analysis start icon of main tool bar is clicked, quick analysis
starting dialog is displayed.
3-13
4.
4. FUNCTION AND OPERATION OF METHOD WINDOW

Method window contains the module operation parameters and the data
processing parameters.
You can not set/edit a file by opening two or more
method files at the same time in a method window, but you can open a method
file that want to refer as the reference method window.
You can copy all
parameters or a part of parameters of the reference method to the current

method. And the current method can be compared with the reference method.
4.1 Menu Command Function of Main Window

Icons of the Method window are displayed two steps in the top of window.
1st step : Module operation parameters
2nd step: Data processor parameters (CH1, CH2)
4-1
4.1.1 File Menu
4.1.1 File Menu

New...
Ctrl+N

Open...
Ctrl+O

Close
Close the active document.
Close All
Save Method
Ctrl+S
Save the current Method.

Save Method As...
Save the current Method with a new name.
Print...
Ctrl+P
Print the active document.

Print Preview
Display full pages.
Print Setup...
Exit
4.1.2 Edit Menu

The Edit menu allows you to perform a variety of editorial functions.
Please refer to [2.3.2 Edit Menu] for a general menu.
Cut
Ctrl+X
Cut the selection and put it on the Clipboard.

Copy
Ctrl+C
Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard.

Paste
Ctrl+V
Insert Clipboard contents.

Delete
Ctrl+Del
Erase the selection.

Add New
Adds a new row after the last row on either the Component Table, the
Integration Time Table, and all other tables with corresponding default values.
4-2
4.1.3
Edit Colors
The Color Selection dialog box appears as shown below.
Select an item and change colors using the score bars. Click on the Preview
button to preview the new color; click on the Save button to save the color.
4.1.3 Module Setup Menu

The instrument condition menu on the Main screen of the Primaide System
Manager program contains the following commands.
Method Configuration
You can review or modify Method Configuration parameters from the Method
Configuration screen.
Method Information
You can review or modify general Method information such as the Method
History, Column Type, Method Name, and Solvent Names.
History is available only when the Method Log Book is selected in GLP options
when running the Primaide Administration program.
Pump Setup
The Interface Module, the Gradient Mode, and the number of solvents specified
for each Pump on the Method Configuration screen must be the same in both
Methods.
Autosampler Setup
Autosampler setup parameters window is displayed.
4-3
4.1.4 Data Process Setup Menu
Column Oven Setup

The oven selected on the Method Configuration must be the same in both
Methods.
Channel 1/2 Detector Setup
Channel 1/2 detector setup parameters window is displayed.
Time Summary
Displays the Pump (solvent) table and event table graphically.
4.1.4 Data Process Setup Menu

You can access the following capabilities of the Primaide System Manager
program using the Data Processing Setup menu:
Channel 1 (CH. 1) or Channel 2 (CH. 2)
Use the Channel 1/2 command to review or modify the data-processing method
(on all Data-Processing Control windows) used exclusively for analyzing data
acquired with the channel 1/2 detector. If a single detector is configured on the
Method Configuration screen, only the one command corresponding to the
configured detector is enabled (the other is disabled). For example, if Channel 1
is selected, Channel 2 is disabled and the Primaide System Manager program
displays data-processing parameters only for the Channel 1 detector.
Calculation Method
This command reviews or modifies the calculation method in the Calculation
Method screen.
Component Table
Sets up, reviews, or modifies the Component Table for data processing.
Concentration Table
Select this command or icon to review or set up the Concentration Table.
Coefficient Table
Reviews or modifies the coefficients of the calibration curve for each component.
4-4
4.1.5
Integration Table
Use this command to review or set up the Integration Time Table.
DAD Data Processing
Select to review or modify DAD Data Processing parameters.
Chromatogram Display Format
Use this command to open the Chromatogram Display Format Screen.
DAD Display Format
Use this command to open the DAD Display Format Screen.
Confidence Report
Use this command to set report parameters for System Suitability Tests,
Module Performance Tests, and Data Diagnosis in the Confidence Report
screen.
Report Format
Displays the Report Format dialog box.
Update Method
Click on this icon to apply the changes you have made to the current method to
open Data Display windows.
This icon is also available in the Component Table, and Integration Time Table
in the Data-Processing Control window.
4.1.5 Option Menu

The commands and features described in this section are available in the
Option menu.
Copy DP Channels...
Copies all data-processing parameters from channel 1 to channel of the current
Method.
You can enter an optional time offset that is added to all the values in the Time
(min) column in the Component Table and Integration Time Table for Channel 2.
This command is available only when you have set up detectors for both
channels.
4-5
4.1.5 Option Menu
Open Reference Method...

Allows you to open a Reference Method at the same time as the current Method.
You can open a Reference Method as a read-only copy.
Copy Reference View
This command is available when a reference Method is open to allow you to copy
the currently displayed view from the reference Method to the currently open
Method.
NOTE:
This command is not available to the Method Configuration, Method

Information, Time Summary, Calculation Method, Concentration
Table, and Coefficient Table views. In addition, the command is
enabled in the following views only when specific requirements are
met:
Pump Setup
Methods.
Column Oven Setup
Methods.
Channel 1 or 2 Detector Setup
The detector selected on the Method Configuration screen must be the same in
both Methods.
Component Table
The Calculation Method in the Quantification section and the entire
Identification section of the Calculation Method screen must be the same in
both Methods.
Chromatogram Format
The Method Configuration screen for each Method has None selected for either
Interface Module or has None selected for the Gradient Mode.
Or, both Methods must have the same Gradient Mode and the same Interface
Module.
Report Format
The detector selected in the Method Configuration screen and the Calculation
Method selected on the Quantification section of the Calculation Method screen
must be the same in both Methods.
4-6
4.1.6
Confidence Report
The Quantification and Identification sections of the Calculation Method screen
Compare Methods
Select this command to compare the current Method with the Reference Method.
This command is available only when a reference Method is open. When Method
views are being compared, Tool Bar buttons are enabled only for the compared
views that are different. Note that some of the Method views are not
comparable with the reference Method.
Copy Primary Layout
This command is accessible only when the Open Reference Method command is
activated and a reference Method is displayed on the screen along with the
current Method. When you select the Copy Primary Layout command, the
primary layout from the reference Method is copied to the current Method.
Copy Secondary Layout
This command is accessible only when the Open Reference Method command is
activated and a reference Method is displayed on the screen along with the
current Method.
When you select the Copy Secondary Layout command, the secondary layout
from the reference Method is copied to the current Method.
Clear Coefficients
The Clear Coefficients command is selected from the Option menu in the
Method window.
Use this command to clear all coefficients to zero on the Coefficient Table and
change all units to Other
4.1.6 Window Menu

The following items are found in the Window menu of the Window:
Please refer to [2.3.3 Window Menu] for a general menu.
Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
4-7
4.1.7 Help Menu
4.1.7 Help Menu

Index
Using Help
About Primaide...
4-8
4.2
4.2 Using a Method

A Method contains the parameters that the Primaide System Manager program
uses to determine how it acquires data and how it processes the data after
acquisition.
Only one Method can be opened and edited at a time; however, you can open a
reference Method that is a read-only copy.
You can copy all or part of the reference Method to the open (editable) Method.
You can also compare the open Method with the reference Method.
If you attempt to open (or create) a Method while another Method is currently
open on the screen, the Primaide System Manager program prompts you to
close the currently open Method before proceeding.
The following sections describe basic procedures for using a Method:
(1) Opening an Existing Method
(2) Creating a New Method
(3) Adding or Modifying Method Parameters
(4) Using Reference Methods
(5) Saving a Method
4-9
4.2.1 Opening an Existing Method
4.2.1 Opening an Existing Method

Use these steps to open a Method:
(1) Either choose Open from the File menu, or click on the Set Up Method icon
in the Main Tool Bar to open the Open File dialog box.
(2) In the File Type box, verify that Method is selected. In the Application list
box, check that the correct application is highlighted.
NOTE:
At least one default application is listed in the Application list box.

The Method available in the Default application cannot be modified or
deleted but can be used as a reference to create new Methods.
(3) In the Method Name box, highlight the name of the Method and choose OK.
A Method Information window appears in the display area of the Main
window.
See a detailed description of each command and the corresponding dialog box
available via the Method Setup function.
NOTE:
The Method History is only available if Method Log Books is selected

from the GLP Options in the Primaide Administration program.
4-10
4.2.2
4.2.2 Creating a New Method

To create a new Method, use the following steps:
(1) From the File menu, choose New.
The New dialog box appears.
(2) Highlight Method and choose OK.

The Method Setup window appears with a blank Method Information dialog
box in the display area.
(3) Access to Method Setup commands is accomplished either via the Module
Setup and Data- Processing Setup menus on the menu bar or via the
quick-access icons on the two-line horizontal tool bar.
(4) From the File menu, choose Save (or Save Method As to give the file a new
name), type in a comment if necessary, and choose OK.
NOTE:
You can also create a new Method by using an existing Method as a

template; that is, after opening an existing Method, save the Method
with a new name using the Save Method As command on the File
menu. You can then add or Modify parameters, as necessary, in the
new Method.
4-11
4.2.3 Adding or Modifying Method Parameters
4.2.3 Adding or Modifying Method Parameters

Follow this procedure to add or modify parameter values:
(1) Choose Open from the menu bar, or click the Set Up Method icon from the
Main Tool Bar. The Open File dialog box appears. Select the Method file you
want to modify and choose OK.
(2) Access the Method Setup commands from either the Module Setup and
Data-Processing Setup menus on the menu bar or from the quick-access
icons on the two-line horizontal tool bar.
(3) From the File menu, choose Save Method (or Save Method As to give a new
name to the file) and choose OK.
4.2.4 Using Reference Methods

Use Reference Methods to copy all or part of their parameters to the open Method
being edited. Reference Methods are read-only; you cannot modify them. Follow
the steps below when using Reference Methods for setting up a new Method:
Opening a Reference Method
Copying views of a Reference Method onto the Current Method
Comparing Methods
1) Opening a Reference Method
To open a view of the Reference Method, follow these steps:
(1) With an open Method and activated, choose Open Reference Method from
the Option menu.
The Open File dialog box appears.
(2) Select the Reference Method and choose OK. A view of the Reference
Method appears along with the current Method in Tile format, entitled
Reference Method on the title bar.
Only one Method tool bar (two rows) appears between the two Method windows.
Clicking on one of the icons causes the views of both Methods to switch to the
corresponding selection.
2) Copying Views of a Reference Method on to the Current Method
This command is available when a reference Method is open for you to copy the
currently displayed view from the Reference Method to the currently open
Method. Note that this command is not available to the Method Configuration,
Method Information, Time Summary, Calculation Method, Concentration Table,
and Coefficient Table views. In addition, the command is enabled in the
following views only when specific requirements are met:
4-12
4.2.4
Pump Setup
Methods.
Column Oven Setup
Methods.
Channel 1 or 2 Detector Setup
The detector selected on the Method Configuration screen must be the same in
both Methods.
Component Table
The Calculation Method in the Quantification section and the entire
Identification section of the Calculation Method screen must be the same in
both Methods.
Chromatogram Format
The Method Configuration screen for each Method has None selected for either
Interface Module or has None selected for the Gradient Mode. Or, both Methods
must have the same Gradient Mode and the same Interface Module.
Report Format
The detector selected in the Method Configuration screen and the Calculation
Method selected on the Quantification section of the Calculation Method screen
Confidence Report
The Quantification and Identification sections of the Calculation Method screen
To copy the parameters in the Reference Method into the current Method, follow
these steps:
(1) On the current Method, select the Method Setup screen that is to change by
clicking on the icon or selecting the equivalent command from the menu bar.
(2) From the Option menu, select Copy Reference View.
The Primaide System Manager program copies the parameters in the
displayed screen of the Reference Method to the corresponding screen of the
current Method.
(3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 with each screen until you finish copying parameters.
4-13
4.2.5 Saving a Method
3) Comparing Methods
Select this command to compare the current Method with the Reference Method.
This command is available only when a reference Method is open. When Method
views are being compared, Tool Bar buttons are enabled only for the compared
views that are different. Note that some of the Method views are not
comparable with the reference Method.
(1) From the Option menu, select Compare Methods. The icons on the Method
tool bar indicate the difference between the two methods as follows:
The icons for the Method Setup screens that are set to the same
parameters appear disabled (gray).
The icons for the Method Setup screens that contain different parameters
appear active (in original color).
(2) Click an active icon to view the differences.
4.2.5 Saving a Method

Use the following steps to save a Method:
(1) With a Method on display, choose Save Method (or Save Method As to give a
new name to the file) from the File menu. The Save (or Save As) dialog box
appears.
(2) Select the application and type in a sample name and comment as required.
(3) Choose OK.
4-14
4.3
4.3 Module Setup Menu

The Module Setup menu contains the commands described below, that are
associated with the Method Setup function.
4.3.1 Method Information

This is the initial screen when you start the Method Setup function. From this
screen, you can review or modify general Method information such as the
Method History, Column Type, Method Name, and Solvent Names.
The Method Information screen provides the following Setup Options:

Method Name
Accepts a Method name of up to 15 characters.
Developed by
Accepts a Method-developer's name of up to 15 characters.
Description
Accepts a Method description of up to 1000 characters.
Solvent Names
Displays solvent names (15 characters maximum, each solvent) when you select
Pumps on the Method Configuration screen. You can enter names from either
the Method Information screen or the Method Configuration screen and they
will be updated on the other screen automatically.
4-15
4.3.2 Method Configuration
History
Displays the Method Log Book, which shows modifications made to the Method.
The Log Book entries include the following:
Date/time of modification
Name of the user who made the modification
User comments entered at the time of the modification
NOTE:
This field is available only when the Method Log Book is selected in
GLP options when running the Primaide Administration program.
4.3.2 Method Configuration

You can review or modify Method Configuration parameters from the Method
Configuration screen shown below.
The Method Configuration screen must reflect the actual configuration of the
HPLC system.
Interface
Select (highlight) one option from the drop-down list associated with the
Interface Module and one option from the drop-down list associated with each
available component.
These components may include the Channel 1/2 Detectors, the Pumps/Solvents,
the Column Oven, and the Autosampler.
See the Method Configuration Table for a summary of the components available
for each type interface module.
4-16
4.3.2
Column Oven.
Select a column from the drop-down list.
The columns available on the list are set up from the Primaide Administration
program by the program administrator.
Column
The drop-down list contain all the columns defined by the System
Administrator in the Primaide Administration program.
Select a name from the list or type in a name (30 characters, maximum).
A summary of options available on the Method Configuration screen is given in
Table 4.1
Table 4.1 Method Configuration
Interface
Pump
A
Pump
B
Column Oven
Auto-sampler
IFB
None
1110
None
1110
None
1310
Manual
1210
1210+Cooling Unit
4-17
Detector
CH1
None
1410
1430
USB-AID
Detector
CH2
None
1410
USB-AID
4.3.3 Pump Setup
4.3.3 Pump Setup

The Pump Setup command is only available when you have selected a Pump
(1110) from the Pump (A) drop-down list on the Method Configuration screen.
Otherwise, the command is disabled. Use this command if you want to review or
modify Pump-setup parameters in the Pump Setup screen that follows.
1) 1110 Pump
The following options are available for setting up the Pump:

Pressure Limit
Specifies the minimum and maximum pressure limits. The pressure unit
displayed here is the same as the pressure unit selected on the Primaide
Administration program. To change the pressure unit, you need to run the
Primaide Administration program.
Solvent Names
Specifies the names of the solvents associated with each Pump (30 characters,
maximum). The number of solvents is determined from the setup on the Method
Configuration screen.
Solvent names entered here are also automatically entered on the Method
Information dialog.
Solvent Time Table
The Solvent Time Table defines the ratio of solvents with respect to time.
The layout of the table is also dependent on the selections of the interface
module, and the number of Pumps and solvents on the Method Configuration
screen. It contains the following entries:
4-18
4.3.3
Time (min)
Use the Time column to enter the time (in minutes) at which the concentrations
of solvents change, or when the flow rates change, or when the event signal is
output.
AA -
AD
In each %xx column, enter the concentration of each solvent expressed as a

percentage.
Flow(ml/min)
Use the Flow columns to enter the flow rate for the Pump (A) and the Pump (B),
where applicable.
Event
Use the Event columns to enter events during a run that will take place at
specified times.
When you click in any row of the event column; a list box appears. Make a
selection from the list.
You may also leave a blank in a row (except the very first row) for some of these
Pump parameters if the row is used for changing other parameters.
However, the Primaide System Manager program requires that at least one
parameter field (besides Time) is not blank.
NOTE:
If you want to obtain the 1110 Pump pressure profile for the Module
Performance Test (see Confidence Report) you need to set up at least
two steps in the Pump table. The profile is available only to the time
you specified in the last step. No pressure profile is available if the
Pump table has only one step.
4-19
4.3.4 Autosampler Setup
4.3.4 Autosampler Setup

Only when 1210 Autosampler is set in analysis instrument, setting window of
Autosampler can be used.
1) 1210 Autosampler
Set up the following parameters:

Syringe
Syringe Speed
Select a speed number.
Needle Speed
Select the speed for the needle's downward movement from Fast and Slow.
Syringe Volume (mL)
From the drop-down list, select the appropriate value for the syringe volume.
(0.1:Standard/Default, 0.5 or 5.0)
Injection Wash Condition
Wash Port Strokes
Input wash port strokes
Wash Port Speed
Input wash port
Needle Wash Time (s)
Input needle wash time (s)
Cooling Unit
When 1210 + cooling unit is select on screen, this screen is displayed.
Temperature (
Input Setting temperature.

4-20
4.3.6
Temperature Check Before Injection

With Tolerance (+/-
When target temperature of cooling unit reaches at setting temperature

allowable temperature range, start injection. When Column temperature check
before injection is performed, allowable temperature range can be set.
Injection
Synchronize with a Pump
Specify whether to use the injection synchronizing signal from Pump.
The reproducibility of retention time can be improved by synchronizing with
synchronizing signal from the Pump and fitting to the injection beginning time.
Enable Vial Sensor
Specify whether vial sensor is turned on.
4-21
4.3.5 Column Oven Setup
4.3.5 Column Oven Setup

This command is only available when you select the 1310 on the Method
Configuration screen. Use the command to open the Column Oven Setup screen
if you want to review or modify the setup of the column oven. Make you entries
using the following fields:
Enter your maximum allowable temperature in the Temperature Upper Limit
field and your desired column Temperature in the Temperature field.
1) 1310 Column Oven
Temperature Setup
Temperature (
Input setting column

Temperature Upper Limit (
This function is to protect the column.

Input maximum allowable working temperature of column used usually.
Temperature Check at Injection
With Tolerance (+/-
Input allowable temperature range. When target temperature of column oven

reaches at setting temperature allowable temperature range, start smoothing
(waiting time). Start injection after smoothed time passes.
Wait Time (min)
Input smoothed time after reaching at allowable Temperature range.
4-22
4.3.6
4.3.6 Channel 1 or 2 Detector Setup

Use this command if you want to review or modify the detector parameters on
channel 1 or channel 2.
NOTE:
Depending on the options selected on the Method Configuration

screen, the dialog box that appears when you choose the Channel 1 or
2 Detector command may vary. Refer to the following list for a
description of each variation.
The following dialog box entries are provided:
4.3.7 1410 UV Detector Setup

When you select the 1410 UV detector as a Channel 1 or Channel 2 detector, the
Detector Setup screen appears as shown below:
NOTE:
To ensure program control from the Primaide System Manager, press

PARAM SET on the front-panel keypad of the detector and check that
the default setting for Use Time Programs Yes (1).
The following parameter entries are available in the Detector Setup screen:
Response Time (s)
Sets the desired time period (sec) over which data are averaged.
Generally, a longer a response time gives better noise filtering while a shorter
response time gives better sensitivity.
4-23
4.3.7 1410 UV Detector Setup
Absorbance Range (AU)

Select the absorbance range for the detector.
Offset (AU)
Sets the Offset value.
The offset value is added to the measured absorbance.
The resulting output values are routed through terminals on the rear panel of
the detector.
Polarity
Specify output signal polarity. Specify either of Positive or Negative.
Data Acquisition
Stop Time (min)
Input acquisition time of chromatogram. Data acquisition time is limited to the
minimum SP value set to the SP Time Table. The relation of the minimum is
shown below.
Sampling Period (SP)(ms)
50
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
MAX Stop Time (min)

36.25
72.50
145.00
290.00
580.00
600.00
600.00
Auto Zero Before Injection

When auto zero is selected, auto-zero of detector is performed before injection.
Auto Data Acquisition Period
Permits you to set up the Generate Sampling Period Table using be Primaide
System Manager program (which automatically generates the table using
Initial Sampling Period and Doubling Time). This selection makes the table
read-only.
Initial Sampling Period (ms)
Lets you select a sampling period from the drop-down list. Not available unless
Auto Data Sampling Mode is selected.
Doubling Time (min)
This parameter is the interval of time to double the Sampling Period for Auto
Data Acquisition Period. The interval of time increases by double of previous
interval, too. Not available unless Auto Data Acquisition Period is selected. Set
the doubling time between 0.0 and 200 minutes. Click on the Generate
Sampling Period Table button to generate a new Sampling Period Table. This
button is disabled if the Auto Data Sampling Mode is not selected.
4-24
4.3.7
Sampling Period Table (Auto/Manual)

Allows you to view the Sampling Period Table. In manual mode (when Auto
Data Sampling Mode is not selected), you can set the sampling rate by entering
Time (min) at which the Primaide System Manager program starts to acquire
data and Period (msec).
Detector Table
Permits you to view the Detector Table.
Time(min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) at which the program begins to acquire data at
the specified wavelength. The first time value must be 0.0.
Wavelength (nm)
Specifies the wavelength at which data is acquired.
Baseline
Lets you autozero the baseline or hold it as is. Select Autozero to trigger the
detector taking an autozero operation at the specified time or select Hold.
4-25
4.3.8 USB-AID Setup (AID: Analog Input Device)
4.3.8 USB-AID Setup (AID: Analog Input Device)

The detector setting window in which it is the following appears when
"USB-AID" is selected as a detector type of channel 1 or 2.
The following parameters are input in this window.

Data Acquisition
Stop Time (min)
Input acquisition time of chromatogram. Data acquisition time is limited to the
minimum SP value set to the SP Time Table. The relation of the minimum is
shown below.
Sampling PeriodSPms
MAX Stop Time (min)
50
36.25
100
72.50
200
145.00
400
290.00
800
580.00
1600
600.00
3200
600.00
Zero Offset
When this is selected, the signal value of the beginning point of chromatogram
is adjusted to 0.
Auto Data Acquisition Period
Permits you to set up the Generate Sampling Period Table using the Primaide
System Manager program (which automatically generates the table using
Initial Sampling Period and Doubling Time).
This selection makes the table read-only.
4-26
4.3.8
Initial Sampling Period (ms)

Lets you select a sampling period from the drop-down list. Not available unless
Auto Data Sampling Mode is selected.
Doubling Time (min)
This parameter is the interval of time to double the Sampling Period for Auto
Data Acquisition Period. The interval of time increases by double of previous
interval, too. Not available unless Auto Data Acquisition Period is selected. Set
the doubling time between 0.1 and 600 minutes. Click on the Generate
Sampling Period Table button to generate a new Sampling Period Table. This
button is disabled if the Auto Data Sampling Mode is not selected.
Generate Sampling Period Table
A new SP Time Table is made pushing the Generate Sampling Period Table
button.
This command can be used only for the Auto Data Sampling Mode.
Sampling Period Table (Auto / Manual)
Allows you to view the Sampling Period Table. In manual mode (when Auto
Data Sampling Mode is not selected), you can set the sampling rate by entering
Time (min) at which the Primaide System Manager program starts to acquire
data and Period (msec).
4-27
4.3.9 1430 DAD Setup
4.3.9 1430 DAD Setup

When you select the 1430 DAD(Diode Array Detector) as a Channel 1 detector,
the Detector Setup screen appears as shown below:
The following parameter entries are available in the Detector Setup screen
Spectra
Slit Width (nm)
The Slit Width used for the data sampling is selected from Fine(1nm) or
Coarse(4nm). The noise becomes small though spectrum resolution decreases
when the Slit Width is large.
Spectral Bandwidth (nm)
The spectrum bandwidth used for the data collection is specified. Leveling
between diode arrays grows when the bandwidth is large, the noise decreases,
and the number of data point to the spectrum decreases, too.
Sampling Period (ms)
You can set the spectrum acquisition interval time. You can set the spectrum
acquisition (target :10 to 20 spectra) to most sharp peaks on chromatogram.
Wavelength
Range (nm)
The range of the wavelength is specified.
Monitoring Wavelength (nm)
The wavelength of chromatogram monitoring by Monitor window is specified.
Absorbance
Auto Zero before Injection
Performs an Auto Zero operation immediately before each injection; deselect if
you do not want Auto Zero before injection.
The default is check on.
4-28
4.3.9
Time
Stop Time (min)
Input acquisition time of chromatogram.
The acquisition time is limited by setting the Sampling Period and the Range.
The relation between the Sampling Period and the maximum acquisition time
for Range:220 to 400(nm) is shown as follows below.
Sampling Period (SP)(ms)
50
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
MAX Stop Time (min)

30.00
61.00
122.00
244.00
488.00
600.00
600.00
Response Time (s)

Sets the desired time period (sec) over which data are averaged. The response is
late in a large value, and the signal is smoothed.
Lamp
Lamp Mode
The lamp mode (Light Source) used when measuring it is selected from D2,
W, and D2&W. The Range is limited by setting the Lamp mode. Range of the
lamp mode is as follows.
D2
:190 to 350 nm
W
:401 to 850 nm
D2&W :190 to 850 nm
Analog Output
When the Analog output option is used, it selects it.
Absorbance Range (AU)
Maximum absorbance (AU) of the Analog output is selected from 0.25, 0.5, 1.0
or 2.0. A signal becomes large as its value becomes large, and the sensitivity is
improved as its value becomes small.
Wavelength 1 (nm)
The wavelength of the signal output from CH1 of the analog output option is set.
It is necessary to set this setting within the Range.
Wavelength 2 (nm)
The wavelength of the signal output from CH2 of the analog output option is set.
It is necessary to set this setting within the Range.
4-29
4.3.10 Time Summary
4.3.10 Time Summary

Displays the Pump (solvent) table and event table graphically. Note that the
Event Table is available when the 1110 Pump is in use.
The Primaide System Manager program graphically displays the solvent
composition and flow rate for each configured Pump, and the events specified in
the event table.
The values corresponding to the current line-cursor position are shown in the
right side box.
Click on the vertical line cursor and drag it to any desired time to show the
corresponding setup values for the Pump and events.
4-30
4.4
4.4 Data Processing Setup Menu

You can access the following capabilities of the Primaide System Manager
program using the Data Processing Setup menu.
4.4.1 Channel 1 or Channel 2

Use the Channel 1 command to review or modify a data-processing method (on
all Data-Processing Control windows) used exclusively for analyzing data
acquired with the channel 1 detector. Use the Channel 2 command to review or
modify the data-processing method (on all Data-Processing Control windows)
used exclusively for analyzing data acquired with the channel 2 detector. If a
single detector is configured on the Method Configuration screen, only the one
command corresponding to the configured detector is enabled (the other is
disabled).
For example, if Channel 1 is selected, Channel 2 is disabled and the Primaide
System Manager program displays data-processing parameters only for the
Channel 1 detector.
4.4.2 Calculation Method

This command reviews or modifies the calculation method in the Calculation
Method screen.
The following options are available:
4-31
Quantitation
Peak Quantitation by
You can measure a peak according to its Area or its Height.
If you select Height, the program measures the peak height as the distance from
baseline to peak maximum.
Calculation Method
Let you select one of the following four available methods (See Section 14.5,
Quantification Methods, for more details of each option)
Area%/(This is available together with other quantitation method. )
Ext-Std (External Standard Method)
Int-Std (Internal Standard)
Norm% (Normalized)
Identification
Peak Identification Window
Determines the tolerance by which the actual retention time of a peak can
deviate from the expected retention time of that component.
If you select %Time, a percentage of the absolute retention time is used for the
identification window.
If you select Absolute Time, the identification window is defined in minutes.
This absolute time length for tolerance is constant regardless of the retention
time.
STD Peaks Identification Rule
Specifies how STD peaks are identified. This section is disabled if Area%/
Height% is selected. You must select either Closest Peak or Highest Peak.
If you select Closest Peak,the peak having a retention time closest to that of the
component specified within the specified window.
If you select Highest Peak,the highest peak in the specified window.
UNK Peaks Identification Rule
Specifies how UNK peaks are identified.
You may select from Closest Peak or Highest Peak.
If you select Closest Peak, the peak having a retention time closest to that of the
component specified within the selected window.
If you select Highest Peak, the highest peak in the specified window.
Spectrum agreement
The UNK peak is identification by comparing the spectrum of each peak in a
specified window with the spectrum of the STD component.
When DAD is registered to the channel, this parameter can be used.
4-32
4.4.2
Data Options
Update RT in Component Table
If the box is checked, the Primaide System Manager will replace the RT for each
component with an average RT determined from all STD injections selected for
data processing.
This allows the program to cope with the gradual drift of retention time. This
option is not available if Area% is selected as the Calculation Method.
Do Blank Subtraction
Check the box for blank subtraction and choose a blank data file by selecting
Blank from the same series. The blank from the same series is defined as the
most recent blank data file in the same data series that is to be used in
subtraction.
Other blank data is blank data from other data series within the same
application.
To select other blank data, click on the Select button to display the Blank Data
dialog box. Highlight the source and injection data of the blank of your choice
and click OK.
Calibration
This section is disabled if Area% is selected in Quantification. It offers the
following two choices:
Order of Curve Fit
Specifies the order (1, 2, 3) of a polynomial function that is fitted to the
standard data points. Select from the following:
Linear-f (Response)
Line-f (Conc)
Quadratic
Cubic
4-33
Force through Zero

Specifies whether calibration curves are forced through the origin.
If you select YES, the calibration curve is forced through the origin.
If you select NO, the calibration data points dictate where the calibration curve
intersects with the Y axis. Refer to the following table when setting the
Calibration parameters.
Fitting Condition
Linear
Linear + Force Zero
Quadratic
Quadratic + Force Zero
Cubic
Cubic + Force Zero
Standards Required
2
1
3
2
4
3
Minimum Number of Calibration Levels Required 1

A read-only field.
It is determined based on the Order of Curve Fit and the selection of Force
through Zero.
Concentration Weight
Select a desired weighing factor for weighted least-square analysis.
The default is 1.0 which is unweighted least-square analysis. (See Section 14.5):
Do Library Search:
The spectrum search library is automatically performed for the identified peak
spectrum.
The spectrum name with the highest correlation coefficient is
performed the report output on search results, or 3 spectra name is performed

to order by their correlation coefficients on search results.
The set dialog for the following search library is displayed.
Click Setup button.

The automatic
search range can be limited by setting the search parameters.

Select the check box to enable a Library Search. Click on Setup button to set up
Library Search options. See Setup Library Search dialog.
4-34
4.4.2
Application
The library spectrum with the input application name is searched.
Keywords
The spectrum with the input keywords is searched.
You can input multiple
keywords with a comma as a separator between words.
You can input a
maximum of 35 characters.
Allowance %
The allowance (%) of the peak RT is used for searching the detection peak.
WL range
The spectrum with the input wavelength range is searched.
Report results
The search results outputted to report is selected.
When only spectra with
highest correlation coefficient is outputted, select best 1.
When 3 spectra is
outputted to order by their correlation coefficients, select best 3.

The search results are outputted to report by inputting the search library table
items of the sample injection section of the report layout editor.
When search
library table is included in report, the following table is outputted.

NO
Chromato
RT
Purity
Estimated
temp.
Correlation
Spectrum
Spectrum
RT
RIX
You can set by the report peak section of the report output screen which peak of
each chromatogram is displayed.
When the peak is not found, the table to the
chromatogram is not outputted to the report.

each chromatogram is displayed.
4-35
A maximum of 100 peaks for
4.4.3 Component Table

Sets up, reviews, or modifies the Component Table for data processing.
For calculation methods other than Area%/Height%, you must set up the
Component Table by entering the characteristics of components that might be
present in the samples. The Primaide program uses the information in this
table to identify peaks that correspond to each component and to perform
quantification and any specified functions for each component.
NOTE:
A simple Component Table appears when Area% or Height% is

selected on the Calculation Method dialog. You only need to set it up if
you want to perform SST or data diagnosis on one or more peaks.
The following table entries are available:

RT (min)
Enter the expected retention time in minutes for the corresponding component.
4-36
4.4.3
Window(%)
The heading is determined by the selection of %Time or absolute Time as Peak
Identification Window on the Calculation Method screen. Enter a tolerance for
the retention time.
If the Peak Identification window is %Time, specify the tolerance in
percentage of the retention time.
If the Peak Identification window is Absolute Time, enter the absolute
tolerance value in minutes.
The input value is automatically converted into a percentage time (%Time) or
an Absolute Time if you change the Peak Identification window from the
Calculation Method screen.
Name
Lets you enter the name of the component. The name can be up to 30 characters
in length. Once the name is entered, it is automatically copied to the
Concentration Table and the Coefficient Table. The Name column is not present
in the simple Component Table for Area%/Height method.
Func1, Func2, Func3
Specifies functions that are used for peak identification and quantitation.
When you click on a table cell, a drop-down menu showing the functions
appears. The functions available for this field include the following:
Internal standard (ISTD)
The ISTD function is used to designate one component as the internal standard
component. This is necessary only if the Int-Std calculation method is in use.
Relative retention time reference (RRT)
You can use the RRT function to designate one or ore components as the RRT
reference peaks. The Primaide System Manager program uses the observed RT
and expected RT of an RRT component to determine Relative Retention Time
for each component.
Corrected retention time reference (CRT)
The CRT function is used to correct variations in the retention time that depend
on various HPLC conditions. A maximum of 20 reference peaks can be
designated by selecting CRT in Func1, Func2, or Func3 fields in the Component
Table.
In this case, mark Update RT in Component Table on the Calculation Method
screen.
4-37
Expected concentration peak (E-CONC)

Designates one or more components as the Concentration Peak component(s).
When you select only E-CONC for a component, you need to enter the Expected
concentration and the tolerance% for the component in the last two columns
which otherwise are read-only.
System Suitability Test (SST)
Designates one or more components peaks as SST peaks. The Primaide System
Manager program uses the peaks so designated to generate System Suitability
Test results (which are then reported in a Confidence Report).
Reference component (REF) and USE-REF
Reference component (REF) and the components to be quantified with the
calibration coefficients of the reference components (USE-REF).
The REF and USE-REF functions allow you to quantify components (only for
Ext-Std and Int-Std calculation methods) that are listed on the Component
Table and are present in unknown injections, but are not included in the
standard injections. The REF is also used to quantify peaks that are not listed
in the Component Table. The REF function designates a component as the
reference component. The USE-REF function marks components in the table
that are not calibrated. The calibration coefficients of the reference component
are used to calculate the concentration of any component in the Component
Table that is marked with the USE-REF function. Using the USE-REF function
is meaningless unless one component is designated as the reference component
with REF.
Also, it is not valid to mark one component as the REF as well as USE-REF
component or to mark the Internal Standard (ISTD) component as the REF or
USE-REF component.
GROUP-1 to GROUP-20
Groups components. (See Section 14.8, Grouping Individual Components, for
detailed information on grouping components.)
NOTE:
In the simple Component Table for the Area% method, only the SST
and E-CONC functions are available under Func1 and Func2.
4-38
4.4.3
MAIN/DEGRADE
Degradation from a main component is quantified by relative area% in the
Method. (See Quantitation for Degradation. ) Specify which components to use
as MAIN and which to use as DEGRADE.
Only one component can be defined as MAIN, but many can be defined as
DEGRADE. If two components are defined as MAIN, a warning is issued. A
separate table is created to report the degradation products. A Degradation
Table report item in the Report Layout Editor (in the Injection section) can be
selected to display the table.
Spectrum
When Picture-in-Picture function (Spectra-in-Chrom) is used, it specifies it for
the spectrum peak that superimpose targets.
Factor (Mol-Weight)
This column is not present in the simple Component Table for Area% method.
It specifies the molecular weight of the component or a component-specific
multiplier.
The values you enter here are used as component-specific multipliers when
CONC2 values are calculated.
Multiplier
Specifies the multiplier for calculating Conc2 and Conc3 concentrations when
the Use Component Multiplier on the Report Format screen is checked.
If it isn't checked, the multiplier is not used in the calculation.
E-Conc
Specifies the expected concentration of the component.
This field is read-only unless E-Conc is selected on the same row.
Tolerance (%)
Lets you enter the tolerance as a percentage.
This field is read-only unless E-Conc is selected on the same row.
NOTE: You can add or delete rows in the Component Table using commands in
the Edit menu. When this happens, the corresponding rows in both the
Concentration Table and the Coefficient Table are automatically
changed accordingly.
4-39
4.4.4 Concentration Table
4.4.4 Concentration Table

Select this command or icon to review or set up the Concentration Table.
The Concentration Table is used to enter the concentration values for each
standard component in each standard sample.
These values are used in calibration. The number of rows in the Concentration
Table depends on the number of components specified in the Component Table.
Therefore, this command is not available if the Component Table has no entries.
The Concentration Table is not available when Area% is selected in the
Calculation Method.
To use the Primaide System Manager dilution program, follow these

instructions.
There are 20 Dilution Factors (DF) available with Primaide System Manager.
One DF is the undiluted Std (DF=1.0). It is specified by clicking on the label.
Only one label can be selected. Its value is set to 1.0 and is not editable. The
corresponding column in the table is highlighted in color. The other DF fields
can be edited. A blank entry in any DF field indicates not used. The
Concentration Table is always set to its maximum size with 20 standards. The
default entry for each cell in the table is blank.
Apply Dilution Factors
Calculates the concentrations of all components. The dilution calculation uses
the concentrations in the DF=1.0 column to calculate concentrations for all
other Stds where the dilution factors are specified.
No calculation is performed for those columns having blank dilution factor
fields.
4-40
4.4.4
Concentration Units
Select input concentration units. The selections are the same as the first and
second concentrations on the Report Format screen. The default selection is
other which means that the concentrations have no units. Note that no warning
is displayed when you change from other to a unit (or from a unit to Other).
However, a message is displayed when you change from one unit to another. You
may choose not to convert concentration values by selecting No.
If you choose to convert concentration values to the new unit (by selecting Yes),
the concentration values may be lost if required conversion parameters are not
defined.
Name
Specify the component name (30 characters, maximum).
The Primaide System Manager program automatically copies the name from
the Component Table or Coefficient Table if you have entered the name in either
table.
Std1-20
Specify concentrations of the corresponding components in STDn sample.
You can set up or modify the concentration manually by typing a value into each
cell.
The Concentration Table is always set to its maximum size with 20 standards.
The default entry for each cell in the table is blank.
4-41
4.4.5 Coefficient Table
4.4.5 Coefficient Table

Reviews or modifies the coefficients of the calibration curve for each component.
These coefficients are used to quantify a corresponding unknown component.
The number of rows in the Coefficient Table is the same as the number of
components entered in the Component Table.
Therefore, this command is not available if the Component Table has no entries.
In addition, the Coefficient Table is not available when Area%/Height% is
selected in the Calculation Method.
The Coefficient Table uses these entries:

Name
Lets you enter the name of the component being used (up to 30 characters).
The name can be entered here or on the Component Table or the Concentration
Table. The Primaide System Manager program automatically copies the names
for you if they have been entered in the Component Table or the Concentration
Table.
A0-A3
The least-square coefficients are displayed here. The number of coefficients
displayed is dependent on the order of Curve Fit on the Calculation Method
screen.
A calibration curve is a polynomial of the form.
(x)A0A1xA2x2A3x3
(x: Aria or Height)
When a calibration is carried out using STD injections during data processing,
the results of the calibration (coefficients) are written automatically to the
Coefficient Table of the current Method. These coefficients may be edited.
When the calculation is performed with UNK samples, these coefficients are
used.
4-42
4.4.5
Units
Units of coefficients are displayed.
They are read only.
If the calculations are done using data from the Method, the units are the same
as those in the Concentration Table.
R-sqr
The coefficient of determination displayed in the R-sqr field indicates how well
the calibration curve fits the data points. If R2 = 1 then the calibration curve fits
the data points perfectly. This field is non-editable. The R-sqr values are
automatically written to the Coefficient Table of the current Method when a
calibration is carried out using STD injections. Note that if you edit a coefficient
in a row, the R-sqr value in this row will be set to blank.
4-43
4.4.6 Integration Time Table
4.4.6 Integration Time Table

Use this command to review or set up the Integration Time Table. This table
specifies how the baseline for chromatogram is determined and how the peaks
are detected.
The first three rows of the table are always set automatically with defaults that
permit a basic baseline and integration calculation.
They cannot be deleted.
The Integration Time Table consists of the following entries:
Time (min)
Specifies (in minutes) when an integration event will occur.
Function
The peak integration function that you select determines how baselines will be
constructed.
Noise, Smoothing, Sensitivity, and N-Method are default entries that cannot be
deleted and only the Value/Status can be modified. (See Section 14.10,
Integration and Baseline Correction for the further information on
peak-integration functions.)
4-44
4.4.6
<Function List>
Items
Function
Peak sensitivity
Base line N
method
Group
No wave
processing
Peak detection sensitivity

Specify peak number N drawn
base line
Processing isomer etc. as a peak
Exclusion from calculation result
such as solvent shock and
impurities
Fixes the baseline at a horizontal
level in the forward direction
Fixes the baseline at a horizontal
level in the backward direction.
Forced vertical division.
Forced processing of peak tailing.
Converts a negative peak to a
positive peak for peak
calculation.
Noise value of base line
Converts an acquired sampling
period to a desired SP
Smoothes a chromatogram
Horizon forward
Horizon backward
Vertical division
Tailing
Negative peak
Noise
Bunching
Smoothing
Setting
Value
1 to 255
0 to 100
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
1 to 8000
OFF,
20 to 200 ma
OFF,5 to 25
Pt
Noise
When the peak detection and the baseline are pulled, it is used.
Data processing is performed from noise result tested automatically before
continuous analysis for on-line report.
This result is automatically registered in data file as "data
Bunching
Converts a sampling period (SP) of acquired data to a desired SP before
execution of waveform processing for chromatogram.
Select a sampling period for converting from the waveform processing Time
Table.
NOTE:
Recalculation does not change the original data.

The chromatogram is transformed via bunching process.
Use of this function is recommended when most suitable SP is discussed or

special processing is required.
4-45
4.4.7 DAD Data Processing
Smoothing
Smoothing processing of Savitzky-Golay type is performed before performing
wave processing of chromatogram.
Smoothing point is selected on injection table. The influence is not given to
former data because of the recalculation.
NOTE:
When a larger smoothing data point value is selected for a smaller

number of peak data points, waveform will be distorted. Select
smoothing data points within 1/3 to 1/4 of the number of peak data
points.
NOTE:
Access to the Value and Status cells depends on your function

selection. The Primaide System Manager program automatically frees
the proper cell. For example, if the selected function is Sensitivity, the
Value cell is freed for editing and the Status cell is made read-only.
Value
For the Sensitivity, Noise, and N-Method functions, enter a value in this field.
Status
For Smoothing, select Off or a Savitzky & Golay filter from the drop-down list;
for other functions, you can select On or Off.
4-46
4.4.7

Only when 1430 is selected in the analysis device composition window, the DAD
data processing window can be used.
The parameter of the DAD data processing is set.
The DAD data processing window is inputs as follows.

Peak Purity check
When this box is ON(
), the peak purity check is done. Please set this function
as follows.
Purity Threshold
The numerical value from 0.5 to 1.0 is input. The peak where the calculation
purity value is larger than the purity threshold level value is "Purity".
Peak Height Percent for Side Spectra
The position (number of percent of height of the peak) in which the spectrum of
the purity threshold is taken is specified.
Peak Top Spectrum Integration
When this box is ON(
), the integration of the peak spectrum is done. Please
set this function as follows.

Integration Range: Above XX % Peak Height
The spectrum range (the percent number of the peak height) used for
Integration is specified. The spectrum Integration that smoothes and processes
spectrum data within the range is made.
Chromatograms to Create
Please specify the type of Chromatogram extracted from the DAD data.
None
When new Chromatogram is not extracted, it selects it.
4-47
Fixed Wavelengths
The wavelength of Chromatogram extracted from the DAD data is input.
Chromatogram up to 4 wavelength can be extracted at the same time.
Integrated Chromatogram
Wavelength in the smoothing range is input.
Best Chromatogram
The extraction of Best wavelength chromatogram is specified.
If Best wavelength chromatogram is specified, editing the best wavelength table
becomes possible.
4-48
4.4.8
4.4.8 Chromatogram Display Format

Use this command to open the Chromatogram Display Format screen.
You can specify how the chromatogram will be displayed on the Data
Acquisition and Data Display windows as well as in a report.
The following dialog box entries are possible:
Vertical Axis Scale
You can make these entries.
Intensity Range
Enter the absorbance range for the Chromatogram display.
When the Autoscale box is checked, the Autoscale Time Range is enabled and
the absorbance range is disabled.
Enter time values from 0 to 600.00 minutes.
Then, the Vertical Axis Scale of the chromatogram is automatically adjusted so
that the highest peak in the specified time range is fully displayed.
Use Alternate Scale
Select Alternate Scale Unit to use different scale units and enter the
corresponding Unit Conversion Factor. The default for scale units is AU. The
corresponding default for conversion factor is 2.0 AU/V.
For example, when you want to set absorbance range at 1.0 and scale display in
AU using the 1410 UV detector, enter "AU" for unit, and "1.00000" for
conversion coefficient at 1 V. Refer to the table below.
4-49
4.4.8 Chromatogram Display Format
Detector
Scale
1410 UV detector
1V = 0.25 /0.5 / 1.0 / 2.0AU

(This is variable by setting of
absorbance range.)
USB AID
1V=1V
1430 DAD
1 V = 2 AU
Auto Zero
Specifies that the chromatogram be shifted vertically so that the beginning of
the chromatogram coincides with the zero position on the vertical scale.
Horizontal Axis Scale (Time)
Full Scale
When full scale is not specified, you can arbitrarily specify the time range of
chromatogram display. Especially, please select it when you want to make only a
target peak displayed.
Enter a time range for the Chromatogram display. If the Full Scale box is
checked, the ability to enter a time range is disabled.
Peak Rejection Level
This is a level for rejecting peaks to be output in a report. Input a judgment
standard (threshold) for the peaks to be output.
For calculation method "Area," input unit is mV*s, and it is mV for "Height. "
Overlay
Peak Labels
When you select this option, this function labels the peaks in a chromatogram
using Time, Name, Number, Area, Height, or Non-display. (Maximum 2 labels.)
Baselines
Determines whether to display the baseline with the chromatogram.
If selected, the overlaid baseline is displayed in a different color on the screen.
Peak Start-End Markers
Specifies markers be displayed to indicate the starting point and ending point of
a peak.
Integration Time Table
Specifies either Integration Time Table for overlay display.
Note that the noise function will not be displayed in the Integration Table
overlay.
Sampling Period Table
Specifies either Sampling Period Table for overlay display.
4-50
4.4.8
Gradient Curves
Allows you to overlay the gradient curves of solvent composition for each solvent
used in data acquisition.
Picture-in-Picture
To display Chrom-in-Chrom, select Chrom-in-Chrom in the drop-down list and
enter the Intensity Range (-4000 to 4000 mV, -8.0 to 8.0 AU) and Time Range
(-300 to 900 min) in the edit boxes.
Note that the selection of Spectra-in-Chrom is disabled with the following
conditions:
Channel 1/2
Calculation Method is Area%
To display Spectra-in-Chrom, first open the Component Table and select
SPECTRUM in one of the FUNC columns for desired component(s).
Then, open select Spectr-in-Chrom in the drop-down list.
If you did not select SPECTRUM in the FUNC column of the Component Table
a warning message is displayed.
Report Chromatogram Overlays
Activated when chromatograms are available on channels 1 and 2. Allows you to
label either channel 1 or channel 2 on the overlay.
Multi-Injection Chrom Offsets
You can set offsets differently in multi-injection chromatogram graphs in
reports for All Injections, All Std Injections, or All Unk Injections.
The offsets only apply to the channel currently set up for chromatogram display
format.
4-51
4.4.9 DAD Data Display
4.4.9 DAD Data Display

Only when 1430 is selected in the analysis device composition window, the DAD
Display Format window can be used.
The following items are input.

Display Format
The parameters for the chromatogram display (report output) / the contour map
view (report output) are set in the monitor display and the data reprocessing
display (report output) under data acquisition.
Absorbance Scale
Specifies a value of absorbance scale from a fixed set to draw the Contour and
3-D displays and the chromatograms on the Data Display window. The default
value is Auto. The range of selections is either from 2.0 to 0.005 or from 0.2 to
0.0005 depending on the Absorbance Mode selected in DAD Setup (Normal or
Low).
Offset
The value specified is used to set the zero position on the AU scale for drawing
Contour and 3-D displays. The default value is 0.0%.
Time Range
The Time range is set by the display and the report output of the data
reprocess.
Wavelength Range
Specifies the wavelength range used to draw the Contour and 3-D displays
3-D Mesh Display Options
Please set Resolution, Display, and Orientation when you make 3D Mesh by the
Display and the Report output of Data reprocess.
Spectrum Display
Spectrum display (Report output) parameter of a peak top is specified.
4-52
4.4.9
Absorbance
When the spectrum is displayed by using an actual absorbance, it specifies it.
Normalized
It specifies it when displaying it on the scale to which the highest absorbance is
converted into 1.0 and the spectrum is standardized.
Auto Mark Peak WL
The spectrum which detected peak wavelength is outputted.
Select to automatically label wavelength on peak tops detected on the spectrum
plot.
Auto BG Subtraction
The spectrum which carried out background subtraction processing is outputted.
A background spectrum is a spectrum (processed from start point spectrum and
end point spectrum) of the main baseline (except reading and a tailing) of a
peak.
Report Spectra
The spectrum in which the detected peak carries out a report output is
specified.
Peak Top and Sides
The peak top spectrum and the spectrum of peak both sides are outputted.
Peak Top Only
The report output only of the peak top spectrum is carried out.
4-53
4.4.10 Confidence Report
4.4.10 Confidence Report

Use this command to set report parameters for System Suitability Tests,
Module Performance Tests, and Data Diagnosis in the Confidence Report
screen.
The content of a Confidence Report is determined by checking the boxes in the

Content group.
To perform a System Suitability Test or a Data Diagnosis, you must set up the
corresponding section in the Confidence Report and also the Component Table.
If either one is not set up, the calculation is not performed. The following
options are available in this dialog box.
System Stability Test (SST)
Module Performance Test
Data Diagnosis
Set these parameters for each option.
System Suitability Test (SST)
Check to perform an SST (see Section 14.14, System Suitability Test (SST), for
detailed information on each SST parameter).
Calculate using
Select Full Width (USP) to have SST parameters calculated using peak width at
the baseline. Select Half Width (EUP/JP15, JP) to have SST parameters
calculated using peak width a half peak height.
RT of Non-Retained Peak (min)
Enter the retention time for the non-retained peak.
4-54
4.4.10
Criteria for Warning

The following criteria are available.
Asymmetry (As), No. of Theoretical, Plates (N),
Resolution (R), and Signal to Noise (S/N) Ratio.
Module Performance Test
Select this box to perform the Module Performance Test.
Print Pressure/Temperature Profile
Select this box to have pressure profiles of Pumps used and temperature profile
plotted in the report.
Criteria for Warning
Sets up the threshold parameters for checking Injections to the following:
Injection to Column
Maximum number that will be injected to the column.
Pressure at Start Time
Upper limit to pressure at the beginning of every injection.
Lamp Energy at Start Time
(D2/W) lamp energy there's hold at the time the detector is turned on.
Wavelength Accuracy
The wavelength accuracy threshold at the time when the detector is turned on.
Data Diagnosis
Select this box to perform Data Diagnosis (see Section 14.15, Data Diagnosis,
for detailed information on each Data Diagnosis parameter).
Diagnosis Peak
RT(min)
To use the specified retention time of the diagnosis peak.
Window(%)
To specify the window for the peak identification.
Area
For the expected peak area or height.
Tolerance(%)
For the variation allowed to perform peak diagnosis on the peaks in the STD
samples.
E-Conc. Peaks
Check to perform data diagnosis using E-Conc Components.
4-55
4.4.11 Report Format

Displays the Report Format dialog box.
You can use it to specify the following variables.

Reported Peaks
Use this parameter to specify which peaks are reported.
Select All Peaks to report information regarding all peaks that were detected
but not rejected.
Select Identified Components to report only those peaks that were identified
corresponding to components in the Component Table.
Select All Components when all components in the Component Table are to be
reported.
If you select All Peaks, you have an option to enter Name for Quantified
Unknown peaks.
Report Layout
Specify the created report.
The created report is saved as the report file.
When it is not specified, it is not created.
When Edit at Primary or Edit at Secondary is click, it accesses the report layout
editor.
Primary
The report at each injection is made at each sample injection.
Edit at each injection button. It accesses the report layout editor for the report
at each injection when clicking.
4-56
4.4.11
Secondary
The report at each series is made at each continuous analysis. It accesses the
report layout editor for the report at each series when clicking.
Report Destination
Print Primary
Place checkmark in box to select the Primary report destination.
Print Secondary
Place checkmark in box to select the Secondary report destination.
Export Report (DDE)
Check Acquisition to generate a special or customized on-line report. Select an
on-line macro program (e. g. , ONLINE. XLS for Microsoft Excel) from the
drop-down list. (See Appendix.) The macro is executed when data acquisition is
started. Check Reprocess to generate a report when a recalculation is
performed.
If no macro is selected, nothing will happen.
NOTE:
T program with Primaide System Manager software can be

transferred the report with STANDARD layout to Microsoft Excel.
The DDE program is as follows.
Acquisition : ONLINE.xls
Whenever the report for one injection of the sample is made, the report is
transferred.
Reprocess : REPROC.xls
When the reprocess of data within the range of specification ends, the report is
transferred.
Coefficient
The calibration coefficient output to the report when specifying Linear-f
(Response) or Line-f (Conc) is specified as 1st order calibration.
Response (A)
The coefficient (A0. A1) for calculating the concentration is output.
Slope (K)
The coefficient (K0. K1) for calculating response (area, height ) is output.
Vial Summary
Mean calculates a simple average (of the retention time and the concentration)
for each component. Weighted Average calculates a weighted average where the
most current measurement has a greater effect (or weight) on the average than
an earlier injection. This field is disabled when area%/ height% method is
selected on Calibration Method screen.
4-57
Statistics
Check to enable the setup for generating Statistic Report.
Note that Primaide System Manager cannot generate Statistic Report if the
Calculation method is Area% or Height%. You may generate Statistic Report for
Retention Time (RT), for First Concentration (Conc1), or for both. Check the
corresponding check boxes.
Repetitive Injs
Check to include a vial statistic report calculated for repetitive injections for
each vial.
All Unk/QC Vials
Check to include the statistic report for all Unk/QC injections for all vials.
First Concentration
Select a unit from the Conc Unit list to be used for the first concentration in the
report (Other Name and Scale Factor fields and Divided by Sample Amount are
disabled unless other is selected). If Other is selected, a name (up to 7
characters) and scale factor can be entered in the Other Name and Scale Factor
fields and Divide by Sample Amount is enabled.
When Norm% is chosen as the calculation method, the units are limited to
Other, %, ppm, or ppb, and Divide by Sample Amount is disabled.
See Quantitation Methods for detailed calculations on Conc1
Second Concentration
Select a unit from the Conc Unit list to be used for the second concentration in
the report (Other Name and Scale Factor fields are disabled unless Other is
selected).
If other is selected, a name (up to 7 characters) and scale factor can be entered
in the Other Name and Scale Factor fields.
When Norm% is chosen as the calculation method, the units are limited to
Other, %, ppm, or ppb.
The Use Component Multiplier, when checked, multiplies the Conc2 value by
the value in the Multiplier column in the Component Table.
See Quantitation Methods for detailed calculations on Conc2.
4-58
4.4.11
Column Header
When [each injection] or [each series] is selected for create the report, you can
select the eight or less calculation result output.
The result is output in the setting order. The following items can be used.
PK-NUM : The order of detected peak (integer)
RT : Retention time of peak (decimal fraction limited down to 2nd place)
Relative RT : Relative retention time value
Corrective RT : Corrective retention time value
Area : Area value of peak (integer)
Components name : Identified constituent name of peak.
Blank for a peak which was not identified.
CONC 1 : Calculation result of concentration (1)
CONC 2 : Calculation result of concentration (2)
BC : Baseline cord (see "14.10.15 Baseline Code " for details)
Group : Group number set with component table
Calibration slope : Calibration slope of peak
Area/height % : Area % = (Area/Total area value) 100
Height % = (Height/Total height value) 100
Purity: Peak purity
ID coefficient: Spectrum peak ID coefficient
4-59
5.
5. SAMPLE TABLE
The sample table window is a window to set the parameter concerning the
sample injection sequence when data is collected.
5.1 Sample Table setup

The function of the command of the menu and the relating icon is as follows.
Vail map: The arrangement of Vail set in the sample rack is shown.
5-1
5.1.1 File Menu
5.1.1 File Menu

The File menu on the Main screen of the Primaide System Manager program
contains the following commands.
New ...
Ctrl+N

Open ... Ctrl+O
Close
Close All
Save Sample Ctrl+S
Save the active document.
Save Sample As...
Save the active document with a new name.
Save Method
Save Method As...
Print...
Ctrl+P

Print Preview
Display full pages.
Print Setup...
Exit
5-2
5.1.2
5.1.2 Edit Menu

Cut
Ctrl+X

Copy
Ctrl+C

Paste
Ctrl+V

Delete
Ctrl+Del
Erase the selection.

Insert Row
Inserts a new row immediately before the highlighted row in the Sample Table.
Edit Colors...
NOTE:
If a newer version of Primaide System Manager is install driver

previously installed version, screen and printer colors will reflect
default settings. To return to the previous settings, the colors must
be reset using the Edit Colors command.
The Color Selection dialog box appears as shown below.
Select an item and change colors using the score bars. Click on the Preview
button to preview the new color; click on the Save button to save the color.
5-3
5.1.3 SampleSetup Menu and Sample Table Tool Bar
5.1.3 SampleSetup Menu and Sample Table Tool Bar

The Tool Bar on the Sample Table window provides quick access of commands
available from the SampleSetup menus. Refer to the following table for a brief
explanation of each command and the corresponding icon.
Sample Setup/ Setup Information
Setup Information Screen (Section 5.3.1)
Sample Setup/ Edit Table
Edit Table Screen
(Section 5.3.2)
5.1.4 Window Menu

Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
5.1.5 Help Menu

Index
List Help topics.
Using Help
About Primaide...
5-4
5.2
5.2 Using Sample Table

A Sample Table contains information on what samples are to be acquired and
how injections are to be performed. You can open more than one Sample Table.
The following sections describe basic procedures for using Sample Tables:
Opening an Existing Sample Table (Section 5.2.1)
Creating a Single-Method Sample Table (Section 5.2.2)
Creating a Multi-Method Sample Table (Section 5.2.3)
Editing a Sample Table During Data Acquisition (Section 5.2.4)
Saving a Sample Table (Section 5.2.5)
5.2.1 Opening an Existing Sample Table

To open a Sample Table, follow these steps:
(1) Either choose Open from the File menu or click on the Set Up Sample Table
icon on the Main Tool Bar. The Open File dialog box appears
(2) Ensure that Sample Tables is selected in the File Type box and that the
correct application is highlighted in the Application list box.
NOTE:
At least one default application is listed in the Application list box.
(3) In the Sample Name box, highlight the name of a Sample Table.
(4) Choose OK.
The selected Sample Table appears in the display area of the Main window.
5.2.2 Creating a Single-Method Sample Table

To create a new single-method Sample Table, follow this procedure:
(1) From the File menu, choose New. The New dialog box appears.
5-5
5.2.2 Creating a Single-Method Sample Table
(2) Select (highlight) Sample Table and choose OK.

The Setup Information dialog box appears.
(3) Refer to Section 5.3, Sample Table Window and enter parameters into fields
in the Template Parameters box.
Check that the Cycles of STD/ UNK field value is 1. Then, choose Append to
Table and Map.
This completes the setup for a simple Sample Table.
You can view the Sample Table by selecting Edit Table.
5-6
5.2.3
(4) If you click on Append to Table and Map a second time

(without changing any template parameters), the same parameters are
added to the Rack Map and Sample Table.
NOTE:
The process in step 4 is equivalent to doubling number of Cycles of

STD/UNK (if the Perform Calibration checkbox is checked).
Use this technique to set up a more complicated single-Method Sample Table.

For example, you can set up a three-cycle STD/UNK sequence using the same
Method with different numbers of STDs and UNKs.
You can modify the Number of Calibration Levels and the Number of UNK per
Cycle accordingly and click on the Append to Table and Map button three times.
5.2.3 Creating a Multi-Method Sample Table

To create a multi-Method Sample Table (after you have created a single-Method
Sample Table), perform the following steps for each additional Method:
(1) In the Template Parameters box on the Setup Information template, select a
name from the Method Name drop-down list box.
NOTE:
If a new Method has been created, the new name does not appear in
the Method Name drop-down list on the Sample Table or the Setup
Information template until you toggle between the screens by clicking
on the respective icons on the tool bar.
(2) Reset the Setup Information template with appropriate parameters.

(3) Choose Append to Table and Map to append both Rack Map and the Sample
Table.
NOTE:
A warning appears if the append function exceeds the limits of the

rack.
5-7
5.2.4 Editing a Sample Table During Data Acquisition

When the program starts acquisition using a Sample Table, the Setup
Information template is disabled.
Therefore, the Sample Table cannot be appended using the template.
You can still edit the Edit Table screen directly, however, although you can only
edit those rows that have not yet been used by acquisition.
When the Data Acquisition window starts with an open Sample Table, the first
row of the table becomes read-only (i. e. , the row is gray). When acquisition is in
a mode other than Acquiring a Series (such as Idle Monitor, Noise Test, or Start
a Run), only the first row of the series is gray.
You can edit all the other rows.
For example, you can insert a "Quick Sample" into any row other than the row
that is adjacent to the row currently running.
Once Acquisition starts to run a series, the rows are frozen (i. e. , the rows
become gray), one row at a time, as the injection sequence proceeds.
You can edit the non-gray rows by typing in the correct values.
NOTE:
In order to make the current modifications effective, you must save

your changes by either choosing Save Sample (or Save Sample As)
from File menu or by switching to the Setup Information screen.
Parameter values are restored to the previously unedited values under the
following circumstances:
- The edited value is invalid and you did not correct and save the correction
before acquisition reaches that row.
- A row that becomes read-only by the acquisition function before you save your
change.
To resolve these problems, choose Pause on the Acquisition window to prevent
the program from acquiring data from a row that is being edited.
5-8
5.2.5
5.2.5 Saving a Sample Table

Use the following steps to save a Sample Table:
(1) With a Sample Table active on display, choose Save Sample (or Save Sample
As to give a new name to the file) from the File menu. The Save (or Save As)
dialog box appears.
(2) Select the application and type in a sample name and a comment as
required.
(3) Choose OK
5-9
5.3 Sample Table Window
5.3 Sample Table Window

5.3.1 Setup Information Screen
Use the Setup Information screen as a template for an easy and fast Sample
Table generation.
If you prefer to set up the table manually, see Section 5.3.2, Edit Table Screen.
The Setup Information screen appears as shown below.
Name Options
Sample Table Name
You can enter a name containing up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Once you finish entering the name, it appears in the Title Bar.
Rack Name
Displays the name of the currently selected rack. To change to a different rack,
click on the Rack Parameters button and open the Rack Parameters Setup
dialog box.
Template Parameters
Method Name
Select a Method from the drop-down box. The default entry is the name of the
Method that is currently open.
If no Method is open, the default name is name of the Method most recently
modified.
Column Equilibrium Time (min)
Enter a desired equilibrium time in minutes. The default is 0.
Maximum Noise
Enter the maximum noise values allowed for the channel(s) being used. The
program automatically disables the channel that the current Method does not
use. The default value for both channels is 8,000.
5-10
5.3.1
Maximum Drift
Enter the maximum drift values allowed for the channel(s) being used.
The program automatically disables the channel that the current Method does
not use. The default value for both channels is 30,000.
Set A Blank
If this box is checked, a blank vial (B) is generated for the series.
Vial B automatically uses the First Vial Number. Other vials are offset by 1. In
the generated Sample Table, the blank sample is the first row of the series with
a name of BLANK.
Note that only one Blank vial is allowed for each Method.
Injections per Bk
This field becomes available only when you select Set a Blank. Up to 99
injections are allowable.
Perform Calibration
Check this box if you wish to perform a calibration.
Fixed Positions for STD Vials
The check box is available only when you select Perform Calibration.
When this option is checked, all standard injections are performed using the
same set of standard vials.
For example, if two sequences of injections are both using the same standard
solutions and different unknown solutions, the autosampler will be forced to
take injections from the same standard vials for both sequences. On the Rack
Map, no new vials are allocated for the standards of the second sequence.
If the box is unchecked, a different set of STD vials is generated for each cycle of
standards.
Number of Calibration Levels
This field is available only when you select Perform Calibration.
Enter the number of the standard vials used for calibration. You can specify up
to 20 standard vials for a particular calibration sequence.
Injections per STD Vial
It specifies the number of sample injections that are taken from each standard
vial.
You can specify up to 99 injections.
5-11
5.3.1 Setup Information Screen
Unknowns per Cycle

This field is available only when you select the Perform Calibration check box.
It specifies the number of unknown vials being analyzed in a STD/UNK
sequence. You can specify up to 200 unknown vials if the autosampler's rack
size is sufficiently large.
Cycles of STD/UNK
It specifies the number of times that the Primaide System Manager program
performs the STD/UNK sequence. This enables rapid generation of many lines
in the Sample Table. You can specify up to 200 cycles, if the autosampler's rack
size is large enough.
STD Name
You can enter a core name for the standard sample.
The default name is STANDARD.
When generating a Sample Table, the Primaide System Manager program uses
this core name with each sample of a STD(n) type and then appends a number
(001-999) to the core name.
UNK Name
You can enter the core name for the unknown samples.
The default name is UNKNOWN. When generating a Sample Table, the
Primaide System Manager program uses this core name with each sample of
the UNKn type and then appends a number (001-999) to the core name.
Injections per UNK
Specifies the number of sample injections that will be taken from each unknown
vial.
You can specify up to 99 injections.
Vol(L)
Specifies the volume of solution that is injected from each vial.
Note that if the Loop injection method is selected in the 1210 autosampler setup,
the injection volume must be the same as that of the loop installed on the
autosampler.
5-12
5.3.1
First Vial Number

Enter a number that indicates the rack location for the first vial.
Note that if the entered number corresponds to an already occupied location of
the rack, the Primaide System Manager program overwrites that vial and the
other vials thereafter. Initially, the default is 3. The default value is
automatically updated according to the number of times that the Append to
Table and Map button is selected. If you click on the Clear Table and Map
button, the value is reset to 1.
Number of Vials
This field is available only when you select the Perform Calibration check box.
It specifies the total number of vials used for a series of injections by the
autosampler. You can specify up to 200 vials if the size of the rack is sufficient.
Function Buttons
Rack Parameters
Select this button to display the Rack Parameters Setup dialog box where
actual rack parameters are shown.
Choose a rack from the selection offered in the Rack Name box and click on OK.
You can select a rack from the names listed in the list box.
When a new name is selected, the rack map is automatically redrawn to reflect
the new size of the rack. All rack parameters are set up from the Primaide
Administration program and cannot be edited directly. (See the Primaide
System Manager Installation Manual for detailed information on how to use the
Primaide Administration program. )
5-13
5.3.2 Edit Table Screen
Clear Table and Map

When you select this button, both the Sample Table and the Rack Map are
cleared upon your confirmation in the popup dialog.
If you confirm, the First Vial Number is reset to 1. If you deleted the Sample
Table from the Table view, the First Vial Number is reset to 1. This button is
disabled if the Rack Map and Sample Table contain no entries to delete.
Append to Table and Map
This function appends both the Sample Table and the Rack Map, according to
the template parameters and the selected Method.
The action is taken after OK is selected in the confirmation dialog.
The Rack Map is updated and the Sample Table is appended with newly
generated injections. Note that the function does not regenerate the whole
table.
It only adds new injections to the Sample Table and adds new vials to the Rack
Map.
When the map and table are appended, the program updates the First Vial
Number accordingly.

Select Edit Table from the File menu to view, edit, or manually create a Sample
Table in the Edit Table screen.
5-14
5.3.2
In general, however, it is faster and more convenient to set up a Sample Table

using the Setup Information screen where the parameters are set up using the
screen template.
Hint: If you click on the Set Up Sample Table icon in the Tool Bar, you can
create, delete, or modify the Sample Table using the mouse and the Edit menu.
NOTE:
Any changes you make in the Sample Table are updated to the Rack
Map when you switch to the Template screen. The sample table can be
set up to 400 steps or less.
Explanations of the items in the Sample Table follow:

Vial No.
Specifies the vial location on the rack.
Vol (L)
Specifies the volume to be injected.
NOTE:
When Vol = 0 is specified, data acquisition starts without a sample

injection.
Inj per Vial

Specifies the number of injections to be taken from a vial.
Type
Sample type. Select one from the following types.
UNK
Unknown sample.
An object of quantitative calculation.
Blank
Blank sample
5-15
EQU
Monitoring analysis (an analysis without sample injection) will be carried out.
The data of this analysis will not be recorded nor saved.
QC
A sample for controlling measurement accuracy among unknown samples.
A statistical processing of measurement accuracy is allowed by Microsoft Excel
processing of a QC sample using the attached summary macro.
STDn (n = 1 to 20)
Standard sample.
According to the measured values of this sample, a calibration curve is
generated.
Sample Name
You can type in a name that is up to 30 alphanumeric characters long.
Sample Amount
You can enter this number manually and use it as a general-purpose divisor
(scale factor).
It is most commonly used to calculate weight percent. The default value is 1.0.
(Refer to Section 14.5)
Int Std Amount
This number, which is entered manually, is commonly used to indicate the
amount of the internal-standard added to a sample.
The default value is 1.0. It is used only when the INT-STD method
(internal-standard method) is used in the Method. (Refer to Section 14.5. )
Method Name
You can select a Method from the drop-down list.
You only need to select a Method name on the first line of the series.
Col Equil Time (min)
Specify a time for column equilibration for the series. You only need to enter the
number at the first line of the series.
Max Ch1 Noise
Specify the maximum noise value allowed for noise test for Channel 1. When
maximum value of 8,000 (default) is set up for Noise column, Baseline Stability
is bypassed during a Series run.
Max Ch1 Drift
Specify the maximum drift value allowed for drift test for Channel 1. When
maximum value of 30,000 (default) is set up for Drift column, Baseline Stability
5-16
5.3.2
Max Ch2 Noise

Specify the maximum noise value allowed for noise test for Channel 2. When
maximum value of 8,000 (default) is set up for Noise column, Baseline Stability
Max Ch2 Drift
Specify the maximum drift value allowed for drift test for Channel 2. When
maximum value of 30,000 (default) is set up for Drift column, Baseline Stability
Sample Description
Accepts a Sample description of up to 30 characters.
NOTE:
The contents of editing on the sample table editing window will also
be brought into the vial map on the table setting condition window.
NOTE:
The contents of editing on the sample table editing window will not be
brought into the vial map on the table setting condition window when
the Primaide System Manager is connected.
5-17
6.
6. ACQUIRING DATA
Data Acquisition Window is a check on the status of the device, and a window to
collect data.
Data Acquisition Window is displayed by clicking Acquire Data icon
Quick Analysis Start icon
or
Any instrument that is not powered on prior to starting the Primaide System
Manager is considered as not connected. The system must be initialized before
data acquisition can be run. Initialization is necessary when the Primaide
System Manager is started or when a new component is added. To initialize the
system, perform the following steps:
(1) From the Primaide System Manager Main Window, click
Hardware Status Dialog appears.

(2) Click on the Initialize button to download the Primaide System Manager to
the HPLC system. After a successful downloading, the button on the Main
Tool Bar becomes enabled
All units used in data acquisition must be powered on and configured from both
the Primaide Administration and the Primaide System Manager program does
not download to the hardware. (Refer to the Primaide System Manager
Installation Manual for the hardware-setup procedures. )
The following sections provide basic procedures that may help you perform data
acquisition from the Primaide System Manager program, including these
procedures:
Initiating the Idle Monitor (Section 6.2.1)
Performing a Manual and Auto Noise Test (Section 6.2.4)
Starting a Run (Section 6.2.2)
Starting a Series (Section 6.2.3)
Sleep/WakeUp (Section 6.1.2)
Performing On-Line Data Processing (Section 6.3)
6-1
6.1 Data Acquisition Window
6.1 Data Acquisition Window

The function of the command of the menu and the relating icon is as follows.
Status display
6-2
6.1.1
6.1.1 File Menu

The File Menu on the Main screen of the Primaide System Manager program
The following items are found in the File menu of the Window:
New
Ctrl+N

Open...
Ctrl+O

Close
Close All...
Save
Ctrl+S
Save the active document.

Save As...
Save the active document with a new name.
Save Method
Save Method As...
Print...
Ctrl+P

Print Preview
Display full pages.
Print Setup...
Exit
6-3
6.1.2 Acquire Menu
6.1.2 Acquire Menu

The following commands are found in the Acquire menu of the Data Acquisition
window:
Show Status
Displays the Acquisition window along with a status screen. A Select is
displayed on the Show Status menu. If it is selected again from the Acquire
menu, the status screen is removed and the check mark is removed from Show
Status on the menu. The Primaide System Manager program displays the
following information on the Status Screen.
Status of the program (either Idle Monitor, Single
Run, Series Run, Equilibration, Noise Test, or Pause. )
The name of the Method that is currently used by
acquisition.
The series number under which the currently acquired
data will be stored.
Three parameters are shown to indicate the sample that
is currently used by data acquisition: the name, the vial
number, and the injection number.
Temperature information of cooling unit
Pump parameters being displayed include current
pressure, current flow rate, and current composition of the
eluent.
Temperature information of column oven.
Shows the elapsed running time in minutes.
The display is updated at 0.1-minute intervals.
NOTE:The run time display is approximate and can vary
from 0.1 to 0.3 minutes. It is also reset for every
injection during Series Run at injection completion
and data acquisition stop time.
This selection shows the stop time specified in the current
Method for each detector.
The Sampling selection shows the sampling rate as
received from each detector.
When you select WL, the Primaide System Manager
program shows the current monitoring wavelength for
each detector.
6-4
6.1.2
Auto Zero
This command causes the detector to execute an auto-zero operation. It works
for all types of detectors available on the Method Configuration screen except
Other type of detector.
If two-channel detection is used in acquisition, both detectors will execute
auto-zero operation simultaneously. This command is disabled during data
acquisition for a run or for a series. It is available only when the Primaide
System Manager is in Idle Monitor or Equilibration mode.
Set Stop Time
The Set Stop Time command is available during a Run or a Series Run.
This command displays a Set Stop Time dialog box on screen that allows you to
increase or decrease the Set Stop Time of the detectors.
Note that the Primaide System Manager program does not change the Set Stop
Time if either of the following occurs:
The Set Stop Time is increased beyond the maximum possible Stop Time.
The Set Stop Time is less than the Start Time or elapsed analysis time.
The changed Stop Time is effective for the remaining data acquisitions on the
Sample Table.
6-5
6.1.2 Acquire Menu
Wavelength
A wavelength command changes the wavelength of the chromatogram which is
carrying out the present monitor. Monitoring wavelength is re-specified by the
specified dialog box of monitoring wavelength. Only when DAD is used, this
command can be used.
Sleep/Wakeup
This command is available after a Series Run begins.
Sleep/Wakeup displays a dialog box that allows you to set up Sleep/Wakeup
parameters.
In the Sleep section, you can turn off the following items by checking the
corresponding check boxes:
Pumps OFF
Turns off all Pumps.
Lamps OFF
Turns off lamps for the 1410 detectors.
Oven OFF
Turns off the column oven.
The Sleep function is activated if you click on the OK button.
The Primaide System Manager program turns off the system modules you
checked after completion of the current Sample Table.
6-6
6.1.2
NOTE:
When Vial Empty error occurs on the 1210 and Sleep is set up, the
Primaide System Manager performs its Sleep function and skips all
the remaining injections.
If you want to use Wakeup to turn on the system after Sleep is
executed, you need to check the Use Wakeup check box and enter the
date and time of Wakeup in the Wakeup section of the dialog.
When you choose the OK button, Primaide System Manager
activates both the Sleep and Wakeup functions.
When Sleep/Wakeup function is activated, the

changes to
button on the toolbar
You may change the Sleep/Wakeup parameters at any time by selecting the
Sleep/ Wakeup command from the Acquire menu after it is turned on before the
program executes the function.
The Primaide System Manager program updates the parameters when you
choose the OK button.
If you choose the Cancel button in the Sleep/Wakeup dialog box, the Primaide
System Manager program discards a selection or changes you made and closes
the Sleep/Wakeup dialog.
NOTE:
The Cancel button does not activate or deactivate the Sleep/Wakeup

function.
To deactivate the Sleep/Wakeup function, select Clear Wakeup. This command

is enabled only when Sleep/Wakeup function is activated.
6-7
6.1.2 Acquire Menu
Show Error Log

Select Show Error Log of click on the Show Error Log icon to display the Data
Acquisition Error Log.
AS Initial Position Setup

Move AS rack to the Idle position.
Search Library
Spectrum library search is performed about the spectrum of the specified
maintenance time (RT) during execution of one analysis of 3-dimensional data
or continuation analysis.
Please refer to "Section 13.3.4 Search library under Data Acquisition" about use
of library search.
6-8
6.1.3
6.1.3 Data Display Menu

The Data Display menu offers the following command selections.
Data Acquisition Display Options
Select this command (or click on the Display Options icon or double-click in the
display and the view scale of the contour map (signal intensity, time range,
wavelength range) to show the Data Acquisition Display Options dialog box.
Parameters can be set as follows:
Graph to Display
Contour map and Ch 1 chromato
The chromatogram of the monitor wavelength and the contour map in data
acquisition window are displayed.
Contour map and Ch 2 chromato
The chromatogram of Ch 2 detector and the contour map in data acquisition
window are displayed.
6-9
6.1.3 Data Display Menu
Ch1 and Ch2 Chroms

Select to display Channel 1 and 2 Chromatograms.
Note that the Display Format group is enabled.
If Tile mode is selected, both the Channel 1 and 2 Chromatogram Axis Scale
groups are enabled.
If Overlay mode is selected, only the Time Range in the Channel 1
Chromatogram Axis Scale group is enabled.
Ch1 Chromatogram Only
Select to display only the Channel 1 Chromatogram or Monitoring
Chromatogram.
Note that the Channel 1 Axis Scale group is enabled and the Display Format,
Channel 2 Chromatogram Axis Scale groups are disabled.
Ch2 Chromatogram Only
Select to display only the Channel 2 Chromatogram.
Note that the Channel 2 Axis Scale group is enabled and the Display Format,
Channel 1 Chromatogram Axis Scale groups are disabled.
Chromatogram Options
Gradient Curves
Overlays solvent-gradient curves.
You then need to select the solvent curves that you want to plot on the graph.
Check A, B, C, and D.
Marker-In Signals
Select to overlay the marker-in signals from a fraction collector.
NOTE:
Marker-in signals are acquired every 6 seconds (0.1 minutes).

Therefore, if two signals are acquired from a fraction collector within
the same 6-second period, they are counted only as one signal. Also, if
a signal comes in, for example, at 10.09 minutes, it is recorded at
10.00 minutes.
Display Format
Overlay
Select to overlay the data from two channels in a single view.
Tile
Select to display data from two channels in separate views.
Channel 1 Chromatogram Axis Scale
Intensity Range
Enter the intensity range for the channel 1 chromatogram display.
6-10
6.1.3
Time Range
Specify the display for the channel 1 chromatogram display.
Channel 1/2 Chromatogram Axis Scale
Intensity Range
Enter the intensity range for the channel 2 chromatogram display.
Time Range
Specify the display for the channel 2 chromatogram display.
Contour scale
Select the full scale to display the contour map.
Zero offset %
Select the zero level position by the percentage of the full scale to display the
contour map.
Wavelength range
Specify the wavelength range to display the contour map.
Time range
Specify the time range to display the contour map.
Restore
Click to reset the time scales of both channels to display from 0.0 to the
corresponding Stop Time (min).
OK
Click to apply the current parameters to the Data Acquisition display and to
close the dialog box.
Cancel
Click to discard the modifications and close the dialog.
6-11
6.2 Running Data Acquisition
6.2 Running Data Acquisition

To open the Data Acquisition screen (Control and Monitor), perform the
following:
(1) From the Primaide System Manager Main Window, click on.
NOTE:
The Primaide System Manager cannot open a Data Acquisition

window unless a Sample Table is available.
(2) The Primaide System Manager asks you to select a Sample Table from the
Sample Table list in the Open Sample Table for Data Acquisition dialog that
appears.
(3) Double-click on the name of the Sample Table that you want to use, or
highlight it and click OK. After opening the Sample Table, the Primaide
System Manager opens the acquisition window and starts Idle Monitor
automatically if no error is encountered.
NOTE:
A validation is performed when you open the Data Acquisition

window. The column name specified in the Method, is compared with
names listed for the HPLC system (by the System Administrator in
the Primaide Administration pro-gram). If no match is found, an
error message is displayed. If a match is found, the Primaide System
Manager starts the Idle Monitor.
Refer to the detailed descriptions of the Monitor command buttons.

To open the Data Acquisition screen (Monitor Only), perform the following:
(1) From the Primaide System Manager Main Window, click on.
(2) The Primaide System Manager opens the acquisition window.
6-12
6.2.1
NOTE:
The functions available on the acquisition screen are limited. Idle

Monitor is not running and control buttons are not available, error
messages shown on the client controller are not shown on the Monitor
screen. System Status reflects the status of the acquisition status
display on the client controller. If no controller is active, Idle is
displayed on System Status.
The following menu items are not available on the Monitor screen:
Acquire Data/Auto Zero
Acquire Data/Stop Time
Acquire Data/Sleep/Wakeup
Acquire Data/Show Error Log
6.2.1 Initiating the Idle Monitor

The Primaide System Manager program starts Idle Monitor automatically
when one of the following occurs:
Data Acquisition window is started from the Main window.
Cancel Test button is activated during a Manual Noise Test (or a Manual Noise
Test is completed).
Cancel Run is activated during a Run (or a Run is completed).
Cancel Acquisition is activated during equilibrium, an Auto Noise Test, or
Acquiring a Series.
After completing the acquisition of a Sample Table, you can choose to return to
Idle Monitor by clicking the Monitor button.
In order to run Idle Monitor properly, the Primaide System Manager program
completes the following validation in sequence before running Idle Monitor.
(1) The Primaide System Manager program validates the first row of the
Sample Table. This validation includes matching the hardware
configuration of the current Method with the current system hardware,
checking data acquisition parameters, and validating each entry in this row
of the Sample Table.
If the Primaide System Manager program detects errors, it displays an
error message for each error, one at a time, and the Data Acquisition
window does not open.
6-13
6.2.1 Initiating the Idle Monitor
(2) If the first row in the Sample Table is validated in step 1, the Primaide
System Manager program checks to be sure that all the required
instruments except the column oven are in Ready mode.
Idle Monitor does not start unless all the hardware required for the Idle
Monitor are in Ready mode.
If not, Primaide System Manager displays messages (e. g. , Waiting for 1110
Pump. ), and the Start Run, Start Series, Noise Test buttons appear in the
Acquisition window without Idle Monitor running.
(3) Only when both steps 1 and 2 are accomplished without an error, does the
Primaide System Manager program start Idle Monitor.
The Idle Monitor view varies depending on whether the Idle Monitor
Method uses one or two detectors.
When two detectors are used, two views are created by the Primaide System
Manager program, one for each channel.
NOTE: The absorbance scale of the contour map is changed by PageUp
and Pagedouwn keys in the contour map display.
6-14
6.2.2
6.2.2 Starting a Run

The Start Run function is available only when the Primaide System Manager
program is in Idle Monitor mode.
If you want to perform only one injection, click the Start Run button.
The Primaide System Manager program runs a single-injection acquisition
using any specified row of the Sample Table.
Before the Primaide System Manager program starts the injection, it validates
the first row in the Sample Table using a procedure similar to that used for
starting Idle Monitor (See Section 6.2.1, Initiating the Idle Monitor). Also, the
column oven must be in Ready mode before Start Run can be started.
The display automatically returns to the Idle Monitor mode after the injection is
completed.
The raw data are saved into an Injection Table.
Once the Primaide System Manager program starts the injection and data
acquisition, the Cancel Run button becomes available.
If you click on Cancel Run during a run, the Primaide System Manager program
saves the incomplete data and returns the display to the Idle Monitor status.
6-15
6.2.3 Starting Series
6.2.3 Starting Series

Start Run
Start Series
Noise Test
Cancel Acquisition
Bypass Wait
Cancel Acquisition
Bypass Test
Cancel Acquisition
Pause
Cancel Pause
Cancel Acquisition
Repeat Series
Repeat Injection
Next Injection
Cancel Wakeup
Monitor
Start Run
Start Series
Noise Test
All steps in sample table is performed for starting series.

The following Primaide System Manager functional buttons in the Data
Acquisition window control the mode and process of data acquisition.
Start Run/Cancel Run
Starts to run a single injection acquisition using the first row of the Sample
Table that contains a non-zero injection volume. After acquisition starts, the
Cancel Run button appears on the window.
You may cancel the run by pressing it.
When you cancel a run, the Primaide System Manager program saves the
incomplete data and returns to Idle Monitor mode.
6-16
6.2.3
Noise Test/Cancel Test

You may start a manual noise test by pressing Noise Test.
The test will last 1 minute. The noise and drift values obtained from the test are
displayed in a pop-up dialog after the test is completed.
The Noise Test function is only available when the Data Acquisition window is
in Idle Monitor mode or in Equilibration mode.
You may cancel the test by pressing the Cancel Test button which becomes
avail-able after the noise test starts.
If the test is canceled, the Primaide System Manager program returns to the
mode prior to the test.
(See Section 6.2.4, Performing a Manual and Auto Noise Test. )
Start Series
The Primaide System Manager program starts to acquire data for all the
samples listed in the Sample Table when you press this button. The actual
injections begin after the system is equilibrated and the noise and drift values
from the auto noise test are satisfactory. After completing the Sample Table,
Primaide System Manager returns to Idle Monitor mode.
Bypass Wait. /Bypass Test
These two functions are available only when the Primaide System Manager
program proceeds to Equilibration mode during series runs. The Bypass Wait.
function stops system equilibration and starts a noise test automatically.
The Bypass Test function cancels the auto noise test and triggers the Primaide
System Manager program to begin actual injections.
(See section 6.2.3, Starting Series. )
Pause
This function is only available when the Primaide System Manager program is
in Acquire Series mode.
Select Pause to cause the Primaide System Manager program to pause after the
current injection.
The program pauses after the completion of the current injection and waits
until you select one of the four functions available in Pause mode:
Repeat Series
Causes the Primaide System Manager program to restart injections from the
first injection of the current series but does not overwrite the pre-existing series
data.
Repeat Injection.
Resumes the injection series starting with the injection just completed.
The existing data for the previous injection are also stored.
6-17
6.2.3 Start Series
Next Injection.
Resumes the series with the next injection on the Sample Table, as if no pause
has taken place.
Cancel Acquisition
Cancels the current system action and triggers the Primaide System Manager
to return to Idle Monitor mode using the first method in the current sample
table.
Cancel Pause
If you select Cancel Pause before the completion of the current injection, the
Primaide System Manager returns to Acquire Series mode and the Pause
button reappears.
Cancel Acq.
Cancels the current system action and triggers the Primaide System Manager
to return to Idle Monitor mode using the first method in the current sample
table.
This function is available when the Primaide System Manager program is in
one of the following modes:
Equilibrium
Auto Noise Test
Acquiring Series
Pause Series
Monitor
This function is available after completion of all samples in a Sample Table.
It causes the Primaide System Manager program to return to Idle Monitor
mode using the first row of the Sample Table.
If the WakeUp function has been enabled, the Monitor button is not available
after completion of the Sample Table unless you press the Cancel WakeUp
button.
Cancel WakeUp
This function is available only when you are using the WakeUp function.
The button appears after Sleep is executed at the end of the Sample Table, and
it is disabled automatically when your selected WakeUp time arrives.
The function causes the Primaide System Manager program to cancel the
WakeUp function and to enable the Monitor button. (See Section 6.1.2, Acquire
Menu)
6-18
6.2.4
NOTE:
When module error occurs in status of unopening data acquisition

monitor screen, open module status icon of HPLC and click error
release button.
6-19
6.2.4 Performing a Manual and Auto Noise Test
6.2.4 Performing a Manual and Auto Noise Test

You can request a manual noise test if Acquisition is in the Idle Monitor mode.
To perform a manual noise test.
Click on the Noise Test button.
Before the Primaide System Manager starts the noise test, it validates the first
row in the Sample Table using a procedure similar to that used for Start Idle
Monitor. In addition, the Primaide System Manager requires that the column
oven must be in the Ready mode before the noise test can be executed.
The test takes approximately 1 minute.
The results of the test are displayed in a pop-up dialog after the test is
completed.
Cancel the noise test by clicking on the Cancel Test button.
NOTE:
You can start a manual noise test during equilibration. If the

equilibration time remaining at the time the test starts is less than 1
minute, the Primaide System Manager leaves the equilibration after
the noise test is completed.
To perform an auto noise test.

The Primaide System Manager always starts a one-minute Auto Noise Test
prior to the actual injection in acquiring Series.
The test can be canceled by clicking the Bypass Test button.
The Primaide System Manager automatically bypasses the Auto Noise Test if
the noise and drift values on the Sample Table for the configured detectors are
the maximum possible.
The noise value is overwritten if a new test is performed and completed.
Therefore, only the noise value obtained from the last completed noise test
(manual or auto) is stored with the raw data acquired in the series.
If none of the noise tests in the series is completed, a value of 8000 is stored
with the raw data for noise.
6-20
6.2.4
NOTE:
When 1410 UV detector is used, the unit of noise value is V and the
unit of drift value is V/min. When the analysis is stopped within a
minute, the result within the range before stop is displayed.
6-21

When the program starts acquisition using a Sample Table, the Setup
Information template is disabled.
Therefore, the Sample Table cannot be appended using the template.
You can still edit the Edit Table screen directly, however, although you can only
edit those rows that have not yet been used by acquisition.
When the Data Acquisition window starts with an open Sample Table, the first
row of the table becomes read-only (i. e. , the row is gray).
When acquisition is in a mode other than Acquiring a Series (such as Idle
Monitor, Noise Test, or Start a Run), only the first row of the series is gray.
You can edit all the other rows.
For example, you can insert a "Quick Sample" into any row other than the row
that is adjacent to the row currently running.
Once Acquisition starts to run a series, the rows are frozen (i. e. , the rows
become gray), one row at a time, as the injection sequence proceeds. You can edit
the non-gray rows by typing in the correct values.
NOTE:
In order to make the current modifications effective, you must save

your changes by either choosing Save Sample (or Save Sample As)
from File menu or by switching to the Setup Information screen.
Parameter values are restored to the previously unedited values under the
following circumstances:
The edited value is invalid and you did not correct and save the correction
before acquisition reaches that row.
A row that becomes read-only by the acquisition function before you save your
change.
To resolve these problems, choose Pause on the Acquisition window to prevent
the program from acquiring data from a row that is being edited.
6-22
6.2.6
6.2.6 Data Acquisition from arbitrary line of Sample Table

For starting analysis data acquisition from arbitrary line of sample table,
Specify the starting line with sample table edit window.
(1) Select sample table, and monitor data acquisition is started.
(2)
Click set up sample table icon with data acquisition window to specify
starting line of analysis data acquisition
(3)
The data collection window is minimized, and the sample table under
execution is displayed. Specify starting line with sample table edit window
(reversing display)
NOTE:
When analysis file name is not set in the specified line, data
acquisition by the set analysis file before the specified line is started.
When there are column equilibrium time and noise test in the line set
the analysis file, Analysis is performed automatically.
(4) Return to data acquisition window and click starting series button (run
button). Analysis starting dialog box from the specified line is displayed.
(5)
Click Start from Selected Row button from the specified line. Click Start
from first Row button from the first line for data acquisition from first line.
6-23
6.2.7 Data Reprocess of Data Series of incomplete Starting series
6.2.7 Data Reprocess of Data Series of incomplete Starting series

When incomplete data series is reprocessed for starting series, the all acquired
data is copied in new data series. Data reprocess is performed in new data
series
(1) Click Data reprocess icon with data acquisition. Open file dialog box is
displayed. Click the data series of under analyzing continuously. Check
system status of data acquisition window to check data series name under
analyzing continuously.
(2) When OK button is clicked , all acquired data is copied in new data series
and injection table is displayed. See chapter 7 for injection table.
(3) When injection table is closed, you can save or delete new data series. All
files related to processing of data series of incomplete starting series is
deleted for delete process.
6-24
6.3
6.3 Performing On-Line Data Processing

In order for the Primaide System Manager program to perform on-line data
processing, you must set data-processing parameters in the Method along with
data-acquisition parameters.
Parameters required for on-line processing vary depending on the type of data
being analyzed. (See Section 4.6, Data Processing Setup Menu. )
Data processing is performed automatically immediately after each injection is
completed.
The program may perform the following functions, depending on the setup of
the Method:
Printing of a Report
Statistical Calculation
Calibration
Blank Subtraction
DAD Data Processing
Data Processing for Two Detectors
6.3.1 Printing of a Report

Depending on the setup in Report Format in the Method, you may generate and
print an Injection Report after each completed injection.
You can also generate a Vial Report after all injections from the vial are
completed.
6.3.2 Statistical Calculation

The Primaide System Manager program calculates statistics on repetitive
injections immediately after all the repetitive injections are completed for the
vial.
Statistics on all UNK vials are calculated at the end of the series.
6-25
6.3.3 Calibration
6.3.3 Calibration
The program performs calibration using STD samples, if requested in the
Methods, as soon as the next injection becomes UNK.
The calibration result is automatically copied to the Coefficient Table of the
current Method.
These coefficients are then used in UNK quantifications for the UNK injections
acquired right after the STDs.
During the preparation of calibration curves with the STD data, the program
also calculates the mean of the observed retention time for each component and
automatically replaces the retention time that is defined in the Component
Table. This feature makes it possible for the program to cope with
retention-time drifts gradually.
If the next injection changes to STD type (from UNK type), the program treats
the data as the first standard of a new STD/UNK cycle and performs a new
calibration using this injection and other STD injections acquired right after
this injection and before the UNK injections.
The new calibration results are then copied to the Coefficient Table of the
current Method replacing the old ones.
The UNK quantification will use the newly updated calibration curves.
6.3.4 Blank Subtraction

If you request Blank Subtraction by selecting the Blank from the Same Series
option, the Primaide System Manager program performs blank subtraction for
each injection only when the blank injection is the first one in the series.
When more than one blank injection is available, the program follows the rules
for blank subtraction. (See Section 14.7, Blank Subtraction. ) If the first
injection is not blank, the Primaide System Manager program proceeds without
performing blank subtraction for the whole series.
6-26
6.3.5

For DAD data processing in on-line, based on the DAD data-processing
parameter of a method, a chromatogram is extracted as follows.
When not performing chromatogram extraction from DAD data, an easy report
(no fixed quantity) is created.
When blank compensation and chromatogram extraction are specified
simultaneously, blank compensation with DAD data (3-dimensional data) is
performed, and a chromatogram is extracted from compensation data.
When the plural fixed wavelength chromatogram to extract are specified, fixed
quantity calculation processing uses the first extraction chromatogram. In
on-line processing, if "DAD data elimination after a report output" is specified
as the method, DAD data will be eliminated after chromatogram extraction.
It searches for an automatic library about the component for which the function
is specified with the component table when the library search is specified, and
the report is output.
6.3.6 Data Processing for Two Detectors

When two detectors are used for data acquisition, the Primaide System
Manager program interleaves the data processing between the two channels.
A combined report is generated and printed.
The Primaide System Manager program generates only one report file for the
entire series that includes results generated for all injections.
If on-line printing fails for any reason, the Primaide System Manager program
continues the data acquisition and processing.
You may review the data-processing results by viewing the generated report file
after the completion of the series. (See Section 10.5.1, Generating a Report, for
more information. )
6-27
6.4 Quick Analysis Start
6.4 Quick Analysis Start

When quick analysis starting icon
of main tool bar is clicked, quick
analysis starting dialog is displayed.
6.4.1 Setting Parameter

The same sample table as the analysis file is automatically made by selecting
the used analysis file and rack name and data acquisition is performed.
Analysis File Name :

Selecting the used analysis file
Rack Name :
Selecting the used rack parameters
Create Calibration Curve :
The calibration by using standard sample data is made in the status of opened
check box.
When check box is not opened, concentration by the calibration of the analysis
file.
The Number of Calibration Curve Level :
Input vial number of standard sample used for making the calibration.
The Number of UNK :
Input vial number of unknown sample.
6-28
6.4.1
Injection Volume (L)) :

Input injection amount.
Sample table is made automatically by setting the above parameters and
clicking OK button ,and data acquisition window is displayed.
Other parameters of sample table is made by the following conditions.
Equilibrium time : 0 min
Injection number : 1 time
Blank : No
Identification noise : 8000
Identification drift : 30000
NOTE:
When quick analysis starting is performed, sample table of the same

to the specified analysis file name is made automatically. But, when
the sample table of the same name exists, it is overwrote. Therefore,
when the sample table of the same name is saved, save it by the other
name by using the copy function with the open file dialog.
6-29
7.
7. FUCTION AND OPERATION OF DATA-PROCESSING

CONTROL WINDOW
Data-processing control window contains the acquired data selection and the
control specification.
Data series acquired from continuous analysis is displayed.
7.1 Configuration of Data-Processing Control Window

The configuration of data-processing control window are shown below.
Flowing box
7-1
7.1.1 File Menu
7.1.1 File Menu

The File menu on the Main screen of the Primaide System Manager program
New
Ctrl+N

Open...
Ctrl+O

Close
Close All...
Save Method
Save Method As...
Print...
Ctrl+P

Print Preview
Display full pages.
Print Setup...
Exit
7.1.2 Edit Menu

The following items are found in the Edit menu of the Window:
Copy
Ctrl+C

Cut
Ctrl+X

Paste
Ctrl+V
7-2
7.1.3
7.1.3 Option Menu

The following items are found in the Option menu of the Injection Table:
Calibration Curve...
Use this command to display the Calibration Curves window with the most
recent calibration curves calculated for the series.
If no calibration data are available, the message No calibration available to
display is displayed and the Calibration Curve window is not opened. (See
Section 7.3.4, Using Calibration Curves, for more information. )
Convert AIA...
Select this command to convert all injection data on the Injection Table to AIA
format.
Use Bracketing
Select this command when you want to use bracketing with the Recalculate
function on the Injection Table.
During the Recalculation process, the Primaide System Manager displays a
Recalculate message dialog with the term [Using Bracketing] shown on the
right side. To recalculate by bracketing, you must select a set of injections on the
Injection Table with Std injections directly above and below the Unk injection.
If the set does not start and end with Std injections, the Primaide System
Manager displays an error message and does not perform the recalculation. The
report contains the injections in the following order:
Injections for standards in current cycle.
Injections for standards in next cycle.
Calibration information.
Injections for unknowns in current cycle.
This is repeated for as many cycles as are selected.
Select All
This command is available only when the Injection Table is displayed. It selects
all injections in the open Injection Table with focus.
7-3
7.1.4 Window Menu
7.1.4 Window Menu

The current window is displayed in window menu. The specified window is
displayed on the foremost side.
Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
7.1.5 Help Menu

Index
List Help topics.
Using Help
About Primaide...
7-4
7.2
7.2 Operation of Data-Processing Control Window

7.2.1 Overview
The Data-Processing Control window consists of two portions. The upper part is
the Data Display window and may contain chromatogram data (Data Display
window), multiple-injection chromatogram data (Multi-Chromatogram Display
window), or calibration curves (Calibration Curve window), depending on the
display options you select when opening injection data for display (See Section
7.3.4, Using Calibration Curves, for more information. ) The lower part is
labeled in its Title Bar as one of the following:
Injection Table [Channel 1 or 2]
Component Table [Channel 1 or 2]
Integration Time Table [Channel 1 or 2]
Once you open injection data for display from the Injection Table, you can
switch to other tables by selecting their corresponding commands or icons.
Data obtained from an injection series are stored in a corresponding Injection Table.
More than one type of data may be contained in the table. For example, if two
detectors (Ch1 and Ch2) are used in data acquisition, two data files are obtained
and stored in the corresponding Injection Table.
Various functions and features are available in each window or table. Features
available in the Injection Table are described in Section 7.2, Operation of
Data-Processing Control Window ; for other views, see section 8.3.4, Option
Menu, Section 7.3, Calibration Curve Window.
7.2.2 Injection Table

When you start the Data-Processing Control window by selecting a data file
(injection table) from the Open File dialog box, the Injection Table containing a
series of injections appears.
According to the existing data in an Injection Table, the available data types are
displayed as check boxes in a floating tool box.
The check boxes are dynamically updated when you, for example, extract chrom
or delete data.
The first available data type is checked by default.
The floating toolbox disappears when the Injection Table window is not in focus
or is minimized.
7-5
7.2.3 Function Buttons

The following commands are available from the Injection Table:
Display
The Display button is available when one or more injections are selected.
Click on the button to display the selected data.
Depending on the data types checked, data corresponding to each injection and
each channel are displayed in individual windows.
If blank subtraction is selected in the current Method and valid blank data are
found, Primaide System Manager will display blank subtracted data.
See Section 7.3.2, Data Display Window, for display options.
Multi-Display
Click on this button to display the selected data in the Multi-Chrom Display
window.
Up to four chromatograms can be displayed in this window.
If blank subtraction is selected in the current Method, the Primaide System
Manager displays blank subtracted chromatograms for the injections where
valid blank data are found and displays unsubtracted chromatograms for the
rest.
Recalculate
Click on this button to reprocess the selected injection data. When the
Recalculate message box appears, you can cancel the function by clicking on the
Cancel button.
This button is available when one or more injections are selected.
However, it becomes invalid when specification of a floating tool box is the
following (gray display).
Only DAD data is specified.
Both DAD data and Extracted Chromatogram are specified.
Plural Extracted Chromatogram are specified.
Nothing is specified.
Chromatogram extraction
The Chromatogram of the type (Fixed Wavelengths, Best Chromatogram,
Integrated Chromatogram) specified by the analysis method is extracted from
DAD data. It becomes invalid when the data re-processing window is open (gray
display).
Calibration
Displays the Calibration Curves window. (See Section 7.3 Calibration Curve
window, and Section 7.3.4 Using Calibration Curves, for more information. )
7-6
7.2.3
Modify Report
Click on the Modify Report button to open the Modify Report screen for you to
preview and modify the report. (See Chapter 9 MODEFY REPORT. )
Edit
This function brings up the entire Injection Table in a table screen. You can edit
Type, Sample Name, Sample Amount and Int-Std Amount in the table.
When you save and leave the edit mode, the Injection Table is updated.
Note that this field is available only when Edit Injection Table is selected in
GLP Options when running the Primaide Administration program.
Delete Injs
This function brings up the following dialog:
Yes
Click on Yes to delete the displayed injection and then display the next injection
under the caption Delete Injection Data.
Yes To All
Click on Yes To All to delete all selected injections without further confirmation
and then close the dialog.
No
Click on No to display the next injection but not delete the previously displayed
injection.
If the displayed injection is the last injection, the dialog is closed without
deleting the injection.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the dialog without deleting the current injection or
remaining injections.
Copy Injs
This function brings up the Copy Injections dialog:
All data types in injection data are copied.
To copy to the existing data series,
it is possible only when adapted for the following restrictions.

(1) The system name is in agreement.
(2) The model of the detector and control parameters are in agreement
(3) The data acquisition parameters are in agreement.
7-7
Ch 1 data / Ch 2 data: All data acquisition parameters except acquisition time

are in agreement.
All the data collection parameters except "collection time" and " monitoring
wavelength" be in agreement.
An extraction chromatogram cannot be copied. Please re-extract after the copy
of DAD data.
Destination Applications:
The list box shows all applications
Existing Series
Click on Existing Series, a list box appears to show the matched series for the
application selected in the Destination Applications list box.
New Series
Click on New Series, a display box appears to show the next series number.
The Existing Series list box is removed from view.
OK
Click on OK to accept selections and close dialog.
If data types are not matched, the following message appears.
Data specification Floating tool box is displayed in a data re-processing table

window.
All the data types belonging to data series are shown in a Floating Tool Box. A
data type is interlocked with data re-processing, and is updated automatically.
The data re-processed data is specified.
7-8
7.2.3
3D data
Contour Map
The Best Wavelength chromatogram extracted from 3D data.

(It displays, only when Best Wavelength chromatogram is extracted.)
The extracted Integrated Chromatogram from 3D data.
(It displays, only when Integrated chromatogram is extracted.)
The extracted Fixed Wavelengths Chromatogram from 3D data.
(It displays, only when Fixed wavelengths chromatogram is extracted.)
7-9
7.3 Calibration Curve Window
7.3 Calibration Curve Window

7.3.1 Overview
You can open the Calibration Curve window by selecting the Calibration button
in the Injection Table.
Calibration curves are calculated only when (1) the Calibration Method selected
in the Calculation Method is not Area% or Height% and (2) STD types of
injections are selected in the Injection Table for display.
The number of calibration levels used in calculation is set to the number of STD
injections you select from the Injection Table.
See Section 7.3.4, Using Calibration Curves, for more details.
Sequence value of correlation coefficient
Selection list
Coefficient of calibration curve
7-10
7.3.2
7.3.2 Options Menu

The following commands are available from the Options menu in the
Calibration Curve window:
Display Options
Sets or modifies the calibration curve display.
You can select this command by double-clicking on the graph.
When you select this command, the Primaide System Manager program
displays the Calibration Display Options dialog which allows you to modify the
calibration and display parameters.
You may make changes to the following options:

Calibration
Order of Curve Fit
Select a calibration curve fit and check or uncheck Force through Zero to
determine whether the calibration curve will be based on data points only (and
may not pass through the origin of the graph) or will be forced to pass through
the origin of the calibration X-Y plot.
Linear-f (Response) Fit
- Applies a Linear-f (Response) fit to all components.
The fitting result is displayed automatically.
Linear-f (Conc) Fit
- Applies a Linear-f (Conc) fit all components.
Quadratic Fit
Applies a quadratic fit to all components.
Cubic Fit
Applies a cubic fit for all components.
7-11
7.3.2 Options Menu
Force Through Zero Fit

Initiates a calibration curve fit that forces the curve to go through zero for all
components. The fitting result is displayed automatically.
A check mark is displayed in front of the command.
Select this command again to refit the data with a fit that is not forced through
zero.
Concentration Weight
Select weighing factor.
1.0
Select this command to perform the unweighted least square fitting on the
currently display calibration data.
After the fitting, a check mark is then displayed in front of the command
indicating that the currently display calibration curve is obtained without
weighing.
Conc
Select this command to perform the weighted least square fitting on the
currently display calibration data using Concentration as the weighting factor.
After the fit-ting, a check mark is then displayed in front of the command
indicating that the currently display calibration curve is obtained using Conc
weighing.
1/Conc
currently display calibration data using 1/Concentration as the weighting
factor.
indicating that the currently display calibration curve is obtained using 1/Conc
weighing.
1/(Conc* Conc)
currently display calibration data using 1/(Concentration x Concentration) as
the weighting factor.
indicating that the currently display calibration curve is obtained using
1/(Conc**2) weighing.
Coefficient (For calculation of Response (A) / Slope (K))
The coefficients of first order-calibration1 are specified.
7-12
7.3.3
Display Format
Select from the following options:
Area Range
Enter the display range for the vertical axis.
Concentration Range
Enter the display range for the horizontal axis.
OK
Click to apply the current parameters to the curve fit and calibration-curve
display.
Cancel
Click to close the dialog without making changes to the display parameters.
Update Method
Click to update the changes to the current method.
Restore
Click to restore the original calibration parameters back from the current
method.
NOTE:
You can no longer restore the original parameters after you have
clicked on the Update Method button.
Update Coefficients
Saves the coefficients associated with the currently displayed calibration curve
to the Coefficient Table of the current method. Note that only one row that
corresponds to the display component is updated in Coefficient Table.
7.3.3 View Menu

The following selection is available in the View menu:
Show Component Table
Displays the Component Table of the current method.
The Component Table is displayed below the Calibration Curve vie.
7-13
7.3.4 Using Calibration Curves

Calibration curves are calculated only when (1) the Calibration Method selected
in the Calculation Method is not Area%/Height% and (2) STD types of injections
are selected in the Injection Table for display.
The number of calibration levels used in calculation is set to the number of STD
injections you selected from the Injection Table.
After clicking on the Recalculate button, the results of the calculation are
written to the Coefficient Table of the open Method.
If you wish to remove a particular STD point from the calibration curve, you
need to reselect STD injections that you want to use and click on the
Recalculate button again.
A new set of calibration curves are generated, and the new coefficients replace
the old coefficients in the Coefficient Table. (Section 7.3, Calibration Curve
Window, for further information. )
If you have checked both Ch1 Chrom (or one of extracted chromatograms) and
Ch2 Chrom in the Injection Table, both sets of chromatogram data are analyzed
using the Data Processing Setup of Channel 1 and Channel 2 in the current
Method when you click on the Recalculate button.
The calibration result for each channel is stored in the corresponding
Coefficient Table.
You can display the calibration curves obtained for both Channel 1 and Channel
2 data. (Section 7.3, Calibration Curve Window, for further information. )
If you have selected INT-STD in the Calculation Method, you must first verify
that the internal-standard component is set in the Component Table; otherwise,
the Primaide System Manager program does not calculate calibration curves for
you, indicating so with an error message.
1) Viewing and Editing Calibration Curves
To open the Calibration Curve view, click on the Calibration button from the
Injection Table.
The Primaide System Manager program displays the calibration curves
resulting from the most recent calculation performed for the data series.
The Calibration Curve view is displayed with a Component Table on the right
side.
The Component Table lists the retention time and name for each component. If
no calibration data is available for the data series, the calibration curve display
area is empty for all components you try to display.
7-14
7.3.4
2) Displaying a Calibration Curve of a Specific Component

To display the calibration curve of a specific component, click on the desired
component from the Component Table; the corresponding calibration curve is
displayed.
If the calibration curve is not available because the component was not detected
from the selected STD injection data, an error message is displayed.
To identify STD injection data on the calibration curve.
Position cursor symbol over a data point.
When the cursor symbol changes, check that the corresponding STD injection
data is highlighted in the Injection Table.
To remove STD injection data from the calibration curve. Position cursor symbol
over the data point to identify the STD injection data.
When the cursor symbol changes, check the Injection Table to identify the STD
injection data.
Click the left mouse button to remove the data point.
Modifying the Calibration Curve by Editing the Component Table
If the calibration curve is not available due to undetected peaks resulting from
an improper retention time or window value set in the Component Table, you
can adjust these parameters and the Primaide System Manager program
recalculates calibration curves using the new parameters.
To modify the Component Table and recalculate the calibration curves, use the
following procedure.
Click on the Component Table icon, or select Component Table from the View
menu.
The Primaide System Manager program displays the Component Table of the
current Method at the bottom of the window for you to edit.
After editing, click on the Update Method button, the Primaide System
Manager recalculates the calibration curves using the modified Component
Table and updates the display.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you obtain your desired calibration curves.
7-15
3) Modifying the Calibration by Changing the Concentration Setup

The Primaide System Manager program uses the concentration values in the
Concentration Table of the current Method to carry out calibration calculation.
Therefore, the concentrations directly affect the calibration results.
You may modify the concentrations if the setup in the current Method is not
proper. To modify the Concentration Table and recalculate the calibration
curves, use the following procedure.
Click on the Set Up Method icon on the Main Tool Bar.
Click on the Concentration Table icon on the Method tool bar.
Modify the concentrations and click on the Update Method icon to recalculate
the calibration curves using modified parameters. Click on the Process Data
icon on the Main Tool bar or double-click on the minimized icon to view the new
calibration curves.
4) Change of calibration Parameters
The calibration is calculated based on the exiting calibration parameter. (order
of calibration, presence in passing through zero) When the exiting method
parameters are improper, recalculate after changing according to the following
procedure.
(1) Open the calculation method window in the current method.
(2) Click the parameters renewal icon after changing the calibration
parameters
(3) When the calibration display is specified, new calibration is calculated and
is displayed.
7-16
7.3.4
5) Generating a Report
A report is generated automatically when data processing is performed either
by Recalculation or by Online Processing.
The format of the report, and some of the processing, is determined by a master
layout that is selected and set up by the user.
This is accomplished using the Report Layout Editor which is accessible from
the Report Format screen of the Method.
The options available to be set up in the master layout are determined by the
configuration of the Method. Two layout options are available for each report:
Primary and Secondary.
They can be viewed by checking the Primary and Secondary options on the
Report Format screen.
If a printer is selected, the report is printed as data-processing proceeds.
Print Primary prints the primary layout as each injection is acquired and Print
Secondary prints the secondary layout after all of the injections are acquired.
The report can also be modified from the Injection Table.
You can export the Primaide System Manager report file vial DDE to a
Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel file and save it with a user-defined name.
The DDE graph options must be set in the Primaide Administration program.
A statistics table can be generated at the end of the Report for all repetitive
injections and for all unknown vials.
Statistics for repetitive injections are reported for each vial. Only the statistics
for all selected unknown vials are generated at the end if requested. If you
select Printer, the report is printed as data processing proceeds.
7-17
7.4 Modify Report screen
7.4 Modify Report screen
The following menus are available on the menu bar of the Modify Report screen.
7.4.1 File Menu

From the File menu, the following commands are available:
Print
Use the Print command from the File menu of the Modify Report screen (or click
on the Print button on the Toolbar), the Print dialog appears.
To send the report to the printer, enter appropriate destination and printing
data and click on OK.
7-18
7.4.2
Close
Use the Close command from the File menu of the Modify Report screen to close
the screen and return to the Injection Table.
7.4.2 Options Menu

From the Options menu, the following commands are available:
Go To
When you select Go To Page (or click on Toolbar icon), the Go To dialog appears.
Enter page number and click on OK.

Fit page horizontally
When you select Fit page horizontally (or click on Toolbar icon), the preview
page is resized to fit horizontally in the screen area.
Fit page vertically
When you select Fit page vertically (or click on Toolbar icon), the full preview
page is resized to fit vertically in the screen area.
Fit page as paper size
When you select Fit page as paper size (or click on Toolbar icon button), the full
preview page is resized to fit the printer page size.
Modify method
When you select Modify method from the Options menu on the Modify Report
screen (or click the right mouse button and select Modify Method from the
popup menu that appears), the Modify Report screen closes and the Primaide
System Manager opens the current Method.
Modify method layout
When you select Modify layout from the Options menu of the Modify Report
screen (or click the right mouse button and select Modify layout from the popup
menu that appears), the Modify Report screen closes and the Primaide System
Manager opens the current Report Layout Editor screen.
7-19
7.4.3 Help Menu
7.4.3 Help Menu

Index
List Help topics.
Using Help
About Primaide...
7-20
7.5
7.5 Injection Table

7.5.1 Injection Table
When recalculate button is clicked, Data recalculation is performed according to
Data-Processing parameters of the specified method.
The contents of processing is as follows
(1) Peak is detected by integration Time Table, and the baseline is decided.
(2) Peak height and peak area is calculated according to method setting.
(3) The components listed in component table are identified.
(4) Function specified for components (relative retention time (RRT),
Correction retention time (CRT) and system suitability test (SST)) are be
performed.
(5) Data diagnosis is be performed, and confidence report is created.
(6) Calculation is created according to calculation method of the current
method.
(7) The components concentration of the unknown sample are calculated.
(8) Statistical calculation. The report according to report output items of
method and report layout template.
When Ch1 and Ch2 are selected, the above processing is performed in each
channel and the report is created.
Internal standard method, external standard method and correction percentage
are specified method.
When STD type sample is only specified by Data-Processing Time Table,
calculation creation of calculation and UNK sample is performed at the same
time.
When internal standard method is specified, internal standard compounds must
be specified in component table.
For the report file in recalculation processing, data series name injection table
is created data series as report name.
Report name of report file in open file dialog box must be changed to leave the
result reprocessed the same data for the different calculation parameters.
When it recalculates as the same file exists, the report file is saved.
When the calibration figure is output to the report, the calibration is plotted for
all components in component table.
The calibration figure of components that are not identified is not output.
When statistical calculation is specified, the result of statistical calculation in
each sample is created, and the result of all UNK samples is created last time.
7-21
7.5.2 Recalculating
7.5.2 Recalculating
The recalculation is as follows
(1) Click recalculation data in injection table by mouse pointer and specify the
data. When some data are specified, click the data sequentially while
pushing ctrl key.
When the continuous area is specified, click the most significant data and
the low rank data while pushing ctrl key.
When the data affiliate is recalculated, calibration is created again and

calculation is performed.
When UNK data is only recalculated, The exiting calibration on method is
used and calculation is performed.
(2) In recalculation reprocessing, The progress report is displayed.
When the cancel button is clicked, the recalculation reprocessing stops and
all contents are annulled.
(3) Report of which report name is data series name is output after
recalculating.
(4) Recalculation is again performed after the report name in open file dialog
box is changed the name other than "modified" to leave the result
recalculated the same data for the different calculation parameters.
7-22
8.
8. DATA-PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW

-CHROMATOGRAMControl of chromatogram (two-dimensional data ) is performed in
Data-processing control window.
You can perform data control for quantification calculation to chromatogram.
Fixed quantity calculation processing cannot be performed by 3D data. Fixed
quantity calculation is performed in the chromatogram extracted from 3D data.
Please refer to " Section 12, Data re-processing window -3D data- about
processing of 3D data.
8-1
8.1 Configuration of Data-Processing control Window
8.1 Configuration of Data-Processing control Window

The menus on the data-processing control window are shown below.
Table display area
Time Cursor
8-2
8.1.1
8.1.1 File Menu

New
Ctrl+N

Open...
Ctrl+O

Close
Close All
Save Method
Save Method As...
Print...
Ctrl+P

Print Preview
Display full pages.
Print Setup...
Exit
8-3
8.1.2 Edit Menu
8.1.2 Edit Menu

The edit menu contains the following commands.
Undo
This command to reverse the last action, which is only available to the
Chromatogram Display Window, is used to undo a baseline cut or delete.
Cut
Ctrl+X

Copy
Ctrl+C

Paste
Ctrl+V

Edit Colors
Opens the Color Selection dialog box to allow you to change screen colors.
Items associated with the current window are listed in the upper left box.
NOTE:
If a newer version of Primaide System Manager is installed over

default settings. To return to the previous settings, the colors must be
reset using the Edit Colors command.
8-4
8.1.3
8.1.3 Data control Menu

Purity Check
The Purity Check of a peak is performed to the chromatogram extracted from
3D data.
Reprocess
This command is available only in the Chromatogram view.
Use this command to perform data analysis for the currently-displayed
chromatogram using the current method.
The results are reflected on screen immediately.
The analysis includes the following:
Peak Detection
Baseline Determination
Peak Integration
Add Peak...
If you want to add a peak to a region of a chromatogram, move the vertical
cursor on the display to the selected region and select the Add Peak command
from the Process Data Menu. The Add Peak dialog opens.
Remove Peak...
The peak specified with the time cursor is deleted. Peak Starting point/Peak
Ending point is deleted at the same time.
Save Manual Integration/Delete Manual Integration
Use this command to save the results of the manual integration baseline and
the deconvolution in the current chromatogram.
The result of the deconvolution and manual integration baseline saved is used
to recalculate the chromatogram.
This command cannot be used in the chromatogram temporarily extracted from
DAD data.
8-5
8.1.3 Data control Menu
Export Retention Time (Export RT)

Use this command to export the retention time of the current cursor position to
the Integration Time Table or Component Table of the current method.
This command is available only when the Integration Time Table or Component
Table is displayed at the bottom of the window.
When you select this command, the Primaide System Manager program adds
the retention time to the highlighted cell in the Integration Time Table or
Component Table and rearranges all the rows according to their retention
times.
The resulting table has the retention times in ascending order with the cursor
automatically positioned at the unused row next to the last used row.
To replace an existing retention time with the export, follow these steps:
(1) Highlight the retention time you wish to replace in the table.
(2) Select the Export Retention Time command. The old retention time is
overwritten by the new one.
Export As ASCII...
This command is only available in the Chromatogram, Purity Spectra, or
Spectrum views.
Use the command to create an ASCII chromatogram file.
A Save As dialog appears for you to name the file and select the data path.
The default extension is . ctx for a chromatogram file and . stx for purity spectra
or spectrum.
The extension of the transfer file becomes "ctx". The delimiter of Chromato-data
of ASCII form file (hold time and signal value) is "Semicolon. "
8-6
8.1.4
8.1.4 Options Menu

Auto Scale
Select this command to automatically adjust the vertical scale (Intensity axis) of
the graphical display so that the chromatogram data in the selected time range
are fully displayed. Note that this command does not change the horizontal
scale of the display. If you want to display the full chromatogram data (auto
scaling both axes), click the right mouse button on the graph.
Scaling to the data point of 0 offset change and the minus is not done.
Next Peak
Ctrl+Right Arrow
Go to the next peak.

Previous Peak Ctrl+Left Arrow
Go to the previous peak.
Peak Information
Peak informational floating box is displayed on the Chromatogram display
screen. Information on the peak at the cursor position of time is displayed.
Please select this command again to delete peak informational floating box.
Show the data acquisition parameter information.

Identification Window
Display the identification window in the chromatogram.
8-7
8.1.4 Options Menu
Display Options...
Show graph display options.
The Chromatogram display option box in the data collection window is

displayed. In the display option, it is revocable the display scale of
Chromatogram (signal strength and time range).
8-8
8.1.5
8.1.5 View Menu

Acquisition Information
The Acquisition Information view provides information on the Method and
acquisition of the currently displayed injection.
Data collection information is "Device parameter", "Sample injection
parameter", "Automatic noise test result in continuous analysis", and "Error
information generated while analyzing it" when data of Chromatogram is
collected.
To open this view, either select the Acquisition Information command from the
View menu, or click on the Acquisition Information icon on the tool bar.
Chromatogram Display Format

Use this command to open the Chromatogram Display Format Screen.
Injection Table
Injection table is displayed in table display area.
Component Table
The component table copied from the activated method is displayed in table
display area.
Integration Time Table
The Integration Time Table copied from the activated method is displayed in
table display area.
8-9
8.1.6 Window Menu
8.1.6 Window Menu

The activated window name is displayed.
When more injections is specified, chromatogram window to each data is
cascaded. Chromatogram displayed on the foremost side is specified.
Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
8.1.7 Manual Baseline Icons

Delete Baseline
Delete the specified baseline.
New Baseline
Insert new baseline.
New baseline can not be cascaded on exiting baseline.
New Division Line
Insert new division line.
Division line cannot be inserted in the position without the baseline.
8-10
8.2
8.2 Setting up/Modifying Data Processing Parameters

8.2.1 Setting Up a Component Table with a Chromatogram
You can set up the Component Table in the current Method for data processing
using a chromatogram that is to be processed or one that is similar to it.
You can set up the retention time of each component in the Component Table by
exporting the peak retention time selected on the Chromatogram view or by
exporting the entire peak table which is the peak-detection result for the
displayed chromatogram.
Moreover, a peak purity check can be performed
(only in case of DAD data).

To export a peak retention time, use these steps:
(1) If the Component Table is not open, click on the Component Table icon, or
select Show Component Table from the View menu to open the Component
Table of the current Method.
An example of a Component Table is shown below.
(2) Return to the Chromatogram window and select the peak retention time
you want to export.
You can use the Next Peak and Previous Peak icons (or the equivalent
commands in the Options menu) to scan through peaks.
(3) Once you locate your desired peak, select Export Retention Time from the
Process Data menu.
The selected retention time is then copied to the Component Table.
NOTE:
The Primaide System Manager program automatically sorts the

Component Table so that the retention times appear in ascending
order. The Component Table is a local copy and does not update the
Method until you click the Update Method icon next to the Component
Table.
8-11
8.2.2 Setting Up Integration Time Table Using the Displayed Chromatogram
8.2.2 Setting Up Integration Time Table Using the Displayed Chromatogram

You can set up the Integration Time Table in the current Method for Data
Processing using a chromatogram that is to be processed or one that is similar
to it. Visualization of the chromatogram permits an easy setup of baselines for
particular peaks and regions. You can export the desired retention time from
the chromatogram display directly to the Integration Time Table.
To export a retention time to the Integration Time Table:
(1) Click on the Integration Time icon or select Show Integration Table from the
View menu to open Integration Time Table of the current Method.
This step is not necessary if the Integration Time Table is already open.
An example of the Integration Time Table follows:
(2) Return to the Chromatogram window and move the cursor to the retention
time you want to export. Select Export Retention Time from the Process
Data menu. The selected retention time is copied to the Integration Time
Table.
NOTE:
The Primaide System Manager program automatically sorts the

Integration Time Table so that the retention times appear in
ascending order.
The Integration Time Table is a local copy and does not update the Method until
you click the Update Method icon next to the Integration Time Table.
8-12
8.2.3
8.2.3 Other Data Control Parameters

Sets up and modifies data control parameters except component table and
Integration Time Table from method window.
(1) Display the method window specified method from window menu on the
foremost side.
(2) Set up and modify data control parameters from method window.
Click method update icon
Change contents are transmitted to data control window, and chromatogram is

reprocessed and redisplayed.
8-13
8.2.4 Manually Correcting Baselines
8.2.4 Manually Correcting Baselines

By default, the Primaide System Manager program overlays the baselines
(determined using the Integration Time Table of the current Method) and
peak-start/end marks when displaying chromatogram data.
If the baseline does not appear on display, you can view it by selecting Baselines
in the Display Options dialog box (accessible via the Options menu).
Hint: For a better view of the start point and end point of a baseline, you can
zoom to the region first before editing the baseline.
To select a baseline, use these steps:
(1) Point the mouse arrow to the baseline you want to process.
(2) Click the mouse on it. The color of the selected baseline changes to green.
To modify an existing baseline, use these steps:
(1) Select the baseline.
(2) Horizontally to a desired retention time to set a new peak start time (or end
time).
To delete a baseline, use these steps:
(1) Select a baseline.
(2) Either [a]click on the Cut button, [b] select the Cut command from the Edit
menu, or [c] press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Hint: If you delete a baseline accidentally, you can recover it by immediately
selecting the Undo command from the Edit menu.
To create a new baseline, use these steps:
(1) Click on the Insert New Baseline icon and note that the moving cursor
changes to an arrow with a square.
(2) Position the mouse pointer at the desired peak start position.
(3) Click and drag the mouse pointer horizontally to the desired peak-end
position.
A new baseline is created after you release the mouse button.
The new baseline is always selected (green color).
This allows you to further modify the peak's start and end points.
8-14
8.2.4
NOTE:
Your attempts to create a new baseline will be rejected if a baseline

already exists for the peak that has no subpeaks (overlapping peaks),
or if the new baseline extends into the neighboring baseline region.
Also, if the new baseline cuts through a groove between peaks (too
high), a warning message will appear.
To separate overlapping peaks using vertical cursor line, follow this procedure:
(1) Click on the Insert New Vertical Baseline icon and note that the moving
cursor changes to a vertical dashed line.
(2) Position the cursor to the desired retention time and click. A vertical mark
is added so that the peaks are forcibly divided during integration.
NOTE:
The vertical line is rejected if it is not placed between overlapped

peaks that share the same baseline, or if it is placed on a baseline that
belongs to a single peak. (See Section 14.10, Integration and Baseline
Correction.) To save the manually modified baselines, select the Save
MC Baseline command from the Process Data menu.
Quantification by the manually modified baselines

(1) Save the insert baseline.
Select [Save Manual Integration] from the Process Data menu.
(2) Click recalculation button.
To clear the manually modified baselines and restore the original baselines,
select the Clear MC Baseline command from the Process Data menu
8-15
8.3 Using Multi-Display Mode
8.3 Using Multi-Display Mode

This display mode allows you to compare chromatogram data visually. You may
display up to 20 chromatograms or extracted chromatograms in the
Multi-Chromatogram window.
The Primaide System Manager program only allows one Multi-Chromatogram
window on screen at a time.
You may display and compare chromatograms from different Injection Tables as
long as the data were acquired using the same type of detectors. You can also
display in the Tile mode or in the Overlay mode.
NOTE:
In the overlay mode, more than 20 chromatograms are not displayed.
8.3.1 Multi-Display window

The multi-display window contains the following commands.
8-16
8.3.2
8.3.2 File Menu

New
Ctrl+N

Open...
Ctrl+O

Close
Close All...
Save
Ctrl+S
The display contents can be saved as windows metafiles(. wmf) for the
cascade display screen.
How to save
(1)
Click menu bar - [file] - [Save].
(2)
The display contents can be saved as windows metafiles by specifying

folder name or file name.
Save As...
You can save the cascade display as window meta file (wmf).
When folder name and file name is specified, you can save these as a wmf.
Save Method
Save Method As...
Print...
Ctrl+P
The cascade display screen can be printed as report form to printer.

Print Preview
Display full pages.
Print Setup...
8-17
8.3.3 Edit Menu
Exit
8.3.3 Edit Menu

Cut
Ctrl+X

Copy
Ctrl+C

Paste
Ctrl+V

Edit Colors...
NOTE:
If a newer version of Primaide System Manager is installed over

default settings. To return to the previous settings, the colors must be
reset using the Edit Colors command.
8-18
8.3.4
8.3.4 Option Menu

The commands available from Options menu in the Multi-Chromatogram
Display window are as follows
Auto Scale
Select this command to automatically adjust the vertical scale (Intensity axis) of
the graphical display so that the chromatogram data in the selected time range
are fully displayed. Note that this command does not change the horizontal
scale of the display. If you want to display the full chromatogram data (auto
scaling both axes), click the right mouse button on the graph.
Show Normalized Overlay
The Normalized Overlay mode is the default mode when you first enter the
Multi-Chromatogram window.
You can also enter this mode from either the Scaled Overlay mode or the Tiled
Chromatograms mode by selecting Options menu/Show Normalized Overlay (or
clicking Icon). In the Normalized Overlay mode, up to 20 multiple
chromatograms can be overlaid on the screen and each chromatogram is shown
in a different color. When more than 10 chromatograms are displayed, the same
10-color scheme is repeated for chromatograms 11 through 20. Only one
chromatogram is activated at a time. A pointer along the right side of the screen
indicates the activated chromatogram. The pointer is always the same color as
the activated chromatogram. A drop-down list of injection information is shown
along the top of the screen directly above the overlaid chromatograms. The list
only shows information for four chromatograms, when more than four
chromatograms are overlaid, the information for the remaining chromatograms
is accessible by scroll bar. Highlight a selection from the list to activate a given
chromatogram.
8-19
8.3.4 Option Menu
You can switch activation from one chromatogram to another by highlighting a

different item in the drop-down list or by clicking a different button from the set
of buttons displayed on the side bar along the right side of the screen.
Show Full Scale Overlay (Scaled Overlay)
The vertical axis is scaled in the Scaled Overlay mode of the
Multi-Chromatogram Display window.
This mode can be entered from either the Normalized Overlay Options
menu/Show Full Scale Overlay (or clicking Icon).
Show Overlay without Scaling
The vertical and horizontal axis is scaled in the Tile mode of the Multi-Chrom
Display window.
(Displayed chromatograms are overlaid.) The vertical scale is not overlaid.
8-20
8.3.4
Peak Retention Time Label

Select Options menu/Peak Retention Time Label command (or click Icon) to add
the peak retention time to selected chromatogram in Overlay mode on
Multi-Chrom display window.
Peak Number Label

Select Options menu/Peak Number Label command (or click Icon) to add peak
numbers to the active chromatogram in Overlay mode on Multi-Chrom display
window. Select Options menu/Remove Peak Labels command (or click Icon) to
remove the labels.
8-21
8.3.4 Option Menu
Remove Peak Labels

Select Options menu/Remove Peak Labels command (or click Icon) to remove
the labels.
Label Chromatograms
Select Options menu/Label Chromatograms command (or click Icon) to toggle
labels on chromatograms on or off.
8-22
8.3.4
Show Tiled Chroms

In the Tiled Chromatograms mode, up to four chromatograms can be displayed
individually in a series of rows (four maximum) on the Multi-Chromatogram
Display window.
If the Multi-Chromatogram Display window includes more than four

chromatograms, the remaining chromatograms are accessible either by clicking
a button from the set of buttons along the bottom of the screen or by clicking a
button from the set of buttons on the side bar at the right side of the screen.
A carat on the right side axis indicates which chromatogram is activated. The
buttons along the bottom of the screen are First, Previous, Next, and Last.
Click on the First or Last buttons to display the first set or the last set of four
chromatograms, respectively.
Click on Previous and Next to increment the four-chromatogram display, either
backward or forward, by one chromatogram. The set of buttons on the side bar
corresponding to the displayed chromatograms are colored green on the screen.
Clicking on a black button will shift the set of displayed chromatograms,
correspondingly.
8-23
8.3.4 Option Menu
Align
This command is available only when the Multi-Chromatogram Display is in
the Tiled Chromatograms mode.
Select this command to align all cursors to the center of the window.
To do so, the Primaide System Manager shifts each chromatogram horizontally
so that the retention time at the cursor appears at the center of the view.
->
Show All Axis
This command is available only when the Multi-Chromatogram Display window
is in the Tiled Chromatograms mode.
When you select Options menu/Show All Axes command (or click Icon), the
X-axis is shown for each Chromatogram viewed in the display.
A check mark appears in front of the command.
To remove X-axes so that the tiled views all share a single X-axis, select this
command again (or toggle Icon).
8-24
8.3.4
Display Options...
This command sets or modifies the Multiple Chromatogram Display Options.
You can select this command by double-clicking the mouse with the mouse
arrow on the graph.
displays the Multiple Chromatogram Display Options dialog box.
This dialog box contains the following setup parameters:

Display Format
Normalized Overlay
Check to display all chromatograms with maximum possible height.
Set Off-set value to separate each chromatogram.
Full Scaled Overlay
Check to display all chromatograms based on scale of highest chromatogram.
Set Offset value to separate each chromatogram.
Overlay Without Scaling
Check to display overlays on all chromatograms based on the scales of the
chromatograms in the Tile view.
Tile
Check to display all chromatograms in Tiled view.
Check Display All X-axes to show the X-axis for each Chromatogram view in
Tile view; otherwise, all the tiled views share a single X-axis.
Auto Zero
Check to offset the chromatogram automatically so that the graph starts from
zero intensity.
Delete
Removes chromatograms from the display.
First highlight them in the list and click on this button.
Reset
Click to restore the deleted chromatogram
8-25
8.3.5 Window Menu
8.3.5 Window Menu

Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
8.3.6 Help Menu

Index
List Help topics.
Using Help
About Primaide...
8-26
8.4
8.4 Manipulating Display Features

8.4.1 Manipulating Display Features
1) Zooming a Graph by Typing in Values
To set zoom values manually, use this procedure:
(1) Open the Display Options dialog box by performing one of the following:
From the Options menu, select Display Options.
Place the mouse pointer on the background of the graph and
double-click the left mouse button.
Click on the Display Options icon in the tool bar.
(2) In the Display Options dialog box, type in a numerical range for each
axis that you wish to zoom (or unzoom) and choose OK.
2) Zooming a Graph with the Mouse
To zoom a graph using the mouse, follow this process:
(1) Position the mouse pointer at either the upper-left or lower-right corner
of the desired zoom area in the graph.
(2) Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer until you reach
the lower right-hand corner (or upper left-hand corner) of the zoom area.
(3)
Release the left mouse button. The zoomed area of the graph is
displayed.
3) Zooming an Axis with the Mouse

Use the following steps to zoom either the X- or Y-axis using the mouse:
(1) Position the mouse pointer on either the x- or y-axis at the start point of
the desired axis zoom area.
(2) Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer along the axis
until you reach the end point of the desired zoom area.
(3) Release the left mouse button. The zoomed axis area is then displayed.
4) Resetting a Zoomed Graph
Use one of the following procedures to reset a zoomed graph:
To return the graph to its original size, click the right mouse button
anywhere within the graph area.
To reset the X- or Y-axis to its original scale, click the right mouse button
any-where along the X- or Y-axis.
8-27
8.4.2 Panning Graphs
8.4.2 Panning Graphs

To pan (move) up, down, left, or right across a graphic display, do as follows:
(1) Position the mouse pointer over the triangle displayed on the X- or
Y-axis.
(2) Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer until you reach
the desired position.
(3) Release the left mouse button.
NOTE:
The mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a hand symbol when it is

over the triangle.
8.4.3 Changing the Upper Y-Axis Value

To change the upper y-axis value (on some graphs), choose one of these
measures:
- Press the Pg Up or Pg Dn key to increase or decrease the Y-axis upper value
by approximately 10%.
-
Select Display Options from the Options menu. The Display Options
dialog box then appears. Change the Y-axis value and click OK.
NOTE:
On the Contour view, the Pg Up and Pg Dn keys change the contour's

absorbance scale value.
8-28
8.4.4
8.4.4 Moving the Line Cursor

Most graphs have a line cursor. Some graphs have both vertical and horizontal
line cursors.
Line cursors can be moved using either the mouse or the arrow keys on the
keyboard.
1) Moving the Line Cursor Using the Mouse
You can move the line cursor using the mouse as follows:
(1) Position the mouse pointer near the cursor until the pointer changes
from the arrow to the Move cursor.
(2) Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer with the cursor.
(3) When the cursor is positioned properly, release the left mouse button
NOTE:
On graphs having both vertical and horizontal line cursors, you can
position the mouse where the horizontal and vertical line cursors cross
and then move both the cursors at the same time.
2) Moving the Line Cursor using the Keyboard

You can move the line cursor by using the keyboard as follows:
(1) Check that the X- or Y-values associated with the moving cursor
position are displayed on the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
(2) Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor.
NOTE:
In the Purity Spectra view, pressing the arrow keys changes the
retention times in the list box.
If you hold down the Shift key and move the mouse, values for the
mouse-pointer position are displayed, but the line cursor does not
move.
8-29
8.5 Include Statistics Report for QC or Unk Vials
8.5 Include Statistics Report for QC or Unk Vials

(1) In the Statistics section of the Report Format screen, mark the check boxes
(RT and/or Conc1) for the All Unk/QC Vials option.
(2) Click Edit Primary (or Edit Secondary) button in the Report Layout section.
The Report Layout Editor screen opens.
(3) Click Post Unk Cycle button.
(4) In the Filter drop-down list box, select Statistics. Observe the report items
available in the Report Items display box.
(5) Select appropriate items and format the statistics report. Refer to Basic
Steps in Setting Up a Layout. An example layout follows:
(6) Click the Close button located near the top of the Report Layout Editor
screen.
(7) On the tool bar in the Method window, click
(8) On the Main tool bar, click
and open the series that is to be
processed.
(9) Select (highlight) the desired Unk or QC injections from the Injection Table.
The following example shows the selection of QC injections.
8-30
8.5
(10) Click the Recalculate button at the bottom of the Injection Table. Note that
the statistical results for the three QC vials in the example are printed in
the report.
8-31
9.
9. MODIFY REPORT
While in the Process Data mode, you can preview the report and optionally
change it by either modifying the data processing/data display parameters, the
Method, or the report layout.
To preview the report:
(1) Click on the Modify Report button from the Injection Table; the Layout
Selection dialog appears.
NOTE:
The Layout Selection dialog only appears if both the Primary or

Secondary layout views are selected in the Method. If only one layout
view is selected, the dialog does not appear.
(2) Use this dialog to choose the Primary or Secondary layout of the report.
When you click on OK, the Modify Report screen opens with a preview of
the report.
9-1
9.1 Print Preview Window
9.1 Print Preview Window

When you click on the Report button on the Main Tool Bar, the Report Preview
window appears.
Control box
Windows 7 Print Preview Window

This window allows you to preview the Primaide System Manager program
report file.
You can use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to scroll through pages
and the mouse to enlarge or reduce the display.
9-2
9.2
9.2 Opening the Report Preview Window

For opening the report preview window;
(1) Click the Report Preview icon. The Open File dialog box appears. (For
functions and operations of this dialog box, see Section 2.3.1, Open. )
(2) Make sure "Report" is chosen in the File Type box and a proper application
is specified in the Application list box.
(3) In the Data Series/Report Name box, single out a report file and click the
[OK] button.
9.3 Functional Buttons

The following seven functional buttons (and associated functions) are available
on the top of the Report Preview window:
Print
Click on this button to initiate the Print dialog where you can specify the page
range, number of copies, print quality, and printer setup.
Next Page
Allows you to view the next page of the current report file.
This button is disabled if the current page is the last page.
Previous Page
Allows you to view the previous page of the current report file. This button is
disabled if the current page is the first page.
/
Two Page(One Page)
Allows you to view the report in two-page display or one-page format.

This button toggles between Two Page and One Page, depending on the current
format. The default display is in one-page format.
9-3
9.3 Functional Buttons
Zoom In
Click on this button to enlarge the report display.
There are two enlargement levels for the zoom function:
Click the button once to enlarge the display to 150% of the original.
Click the button a second time to enlarge the display to 200% of the original.
This button is disabled when the current display is 200% enlarged.
You can also access this function by clicking the mouse with the mouse arrow
positioned on top of the report.
NOTE:
In an enlarged display, use the scroll bar to view the lower sections of
the page.
Zoom Out
Click on this button to reduce the display to the original size.

This button is disabled if the current display is not enlarged.
Close
Click on this button to close the Report Preview window.
9-4
10.
10. REPORT LAYOUT EDITOR

Report Layout Editor is an interface for creating Primaide System Manager
report of an original layout. Report Layout Template is created and modified in
the Report Layout Editor. We can access Report Layout Editor from Method
Window/Report Format
10.1 Outline for Creating Report

There are "Master Layout Template" and "Method Layout Template" in Report
Layout Editor for creating report.
Master Layout Template
Becomes basic of Report Layout Template.
Possible to save template as file Method Layout Template.
Possible to save in Methods as Methods parameters.
Report Layout Template
Master Layout Template (Save as file)

Method Layout Template(Save as Methods parameters)
"Report Format Items" by Method and "Master Layout Template Items" by

Layout Editor can be set independently.
Items corresponding in "Report Format Items" and "Master Layout Template
Items become "Master Layout Template Items", and they is created/printed as
an actual report.
Report Format Items

Method Layout
Template Items
Master Layout
Template Items
To prevent the items set with Method from coming off from Method Layout
Template, set for Master Layout Template to contain Method Items.
The unnecessary items in Master Layout Template(items that dose not exist in
Method Format Items) are deleted automatically, and Method Layout Template
is created.
Master Layout
Template
Report Format
Items
Method Layout
Template
Delete Items
10-1
10.1 Outline for Creating Report
When Method Format Items are added after creating Method Layout Template,
you should recreate Method Layout Template including the added items by
Master Layout Template.
10-2
10.2
10.2 Report Layout Editor

10.2.1 Report Layout Editor Window
The Report Layout Editor window contains the following commands.
Method layout
Master layout
Report items selection list
Layout edit area
Report area selection Button

Channel box:
Display/specification of channel
corresponding to items
(common items: blank)
10-3
10.2.2 Template Display Area
10.2.2 Template Display Area

Flame: items area
Separator: The section area of report items
10.2.3 Separator
The separator displays the section area of report items.
When the items are horizontally arranged, these are evenly arranged and the
separator is automatically created.
Date is sideways moved.
When you click items on the upper left and on the lower right while pushing
shift key, you can select all items in the separator.
When you click an item in the uppermost part separator and in the most lower
separator while pushing shift key, you can select all items in the separator.
10-4
10.2.4
10.2.4 Flame
When the report item of template display area is specified, the following flame
is shown.
Horizontal ruler
Flame: The specified items area is displayed.
Vertical ruler
Characters number:
The character is
displayed by X, and is displayed the

number of maximum characters.
10-5
10.3 Menu Bar/Toolbar
10.3 Menu Bar/Toolbar

The menu bar and a toolbar are located across the top of the Report Layout
Editor screen.
10.3.1 File Menu

Load Master Layout...
Opens the Load Master Layout dialog. This dialog lists the report layout
templates that are available that you can select for report generation.
Modify Master Layout...
Opens the Modify Master Layout dialog. This dialog lists master layout
templates that you can select for modification. You can also create a new master
template or delete an existing master template. NOTE: The master layout
template named Standard can be modified but cannot be deleted.
Save
Only available from the Modify Master Layout mode. Use to save modifications
to the current layout.
Save As...
Only available from the Modify Master Layout mode. Use to open the Save As
dialog so that you can specify a title for a new layout template.
Page Setup...
When you click on Page Setup, the Page Setup dialog appears. You can use the
dialog to change the page orientation and margins for the entire layout
document.
Close
Closes the Report Layout editor and returns to the Report Format screen.
Modifications to the layout template are saved in main memory but not in
permanent memory. If the Method is saved, the modifications are saved
permanently.
Exit
Allows you to exit the Report Layout editor. If the layout has been modified, a
message appears that offers you the opportunity to save the changes with the
Method.
10-6
10.3.2
10.3.2 Edit Menu

Undo
Ctrl+Z
Removes the last change to a selected report item frame and restores the frame
to its previous Status.
Cut Ctrl+X
Removes (deletes) a selected report item frame from the template display area
and copies it to the Windows clipboard.
Copy
Ctrl+C
Copies a selected report item frame to the Windows clipboard.

Paste
Ctrl+V
Used in conjunction with either the Cut or Copy command, the Paste command
imports the previously cut or copied report item frame to a designated spot in
the template display area.
Delete
Del
Deletes the selected report item frame from the template.

Select All
Selects (highlights) all report item frames in the tem-plate viewing area.
Align Left
Aligns the selected report item frame along the left margin of the report layout
display area.
Center Horizontal
Centers the selected frame along its horizontal axis within the viewing area. If
the framed item is within a column, the item is centered on its horizontal axis
within the column.
Make Same Width
Remains inactive (gray) until two or more frames are selected (highlighted)
using the Shift key. Makes all frames selected the same width as the first frame
selected.
10-7
10.3.3 Option Menu
Make Same Height

using the Shift key. Makes all frames selected the same height as the first frame
selected.
Make Same Size
using the Shift key. Makes all frames selected the same size as the first frame
selected.
10.3.3 Option Menu

The Option Menu contains the following commands.
Modify Dependencies...
Displays the Modify Dependencies dialog. This dialog is used to add or delete
dependencies to the selected frame.
Show Dependencies
Indicates items with dependencies. This is accomplished by changing the color
of the dependent frame to blue.
Font...
Opens the Font dialog. The dialog is used to change the font and type size
within a selected frame.
10.3.4 Window Menu

Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
10-8
10.3.5
10.3.5 Help Menu

Index
Using Help
About Primaide...
10-9
10.4 Selection Buttons
10.4 Selection Buttons

10.4.1 Selection Buttons
Each button on the View Selection panel is activated to view a different part of
the layout template. For example, clicking on the Injection button opens the
injection view of the template in the display area. Only one view can be opened
at a time.
The arrangement of each button on the panel is based on the sequence of its
view in the report with respect to the injection view.
Pre-Report
It is a report output when the analysis begins.
Pre-Cycle
It is a report output whenever the STD/UNK Cycle starts.
Pre-Vial
It is a report output whenever injected Vial changes.
Injection
It is a report output when the output of Analysis result of sample injection.
Post Vial
It is a report output when a consecutive injection from Vial ends.
Post STD Cycle
It is a report output when the analysis cycle of the STD sample ends.
Post UNK Cycle
It is a report output when the analysis cycle of the UNK sample ends.
Post Report
It is a report output when a series ends.
Page Header
The item printed on the upper part of the report output form is set. The content
set to the header is printed on the full page of the report.
Page Footer
The item printed under the report output form is set. The content set to Footer
is printed on the full page of the report.
10-10
10.4.1
The following example shows the sequence in the report with injections from
eight vials.
Each report corresponding to the area selection button is output as follows.
STANDARD001
STANDARD002
UNKNOWN003
UNKNOWN004
STANDARD001
STANDARD002
UNKNOWN005
UNKNOWN006
10-11
10.4.2 Report Items List
10.4.2 Report Items List

Report Items List The scroll box near the bottom of the View Selection panel
lists report items that are available for placement in the report. The specific
items available on the list are determined by the by the view selected, and the
filter.
For example, if the Method configuration does not specify a UV detector, the list
will not show a report item for UV Contour. The filters on the drop-down list are
used to simplify the list by reducing the number of report items that are shown.
That is, when you select a filter, only the items pertinent for that filter are
shown on the list. For example, if you click on the Injection button and select All
from the Filter list, all the report items pertinent to the Injection view are
shown in the scroll box; if you click on the Report filter, only the items
pertaining to that filter are shown.
The Sort box enable you to select the sorting order: Ascending, Descending, or
None.
10-12
10.4.3
10.4.3 Framed Report Items

Report items can be selected from the scroll box and added to the layout view in
the display area. This is accomplished by using the mouse to select (highlight)
an item from the list, drag it over to a desired insertion point in the viewing
area, and drop it. When you drop it (release the mouse button), a popup menu
appears.
The choice of options on the menu varies and is dependent on where the cursor
position is relative to other items already in the layout. Clicking on a menu
option (other than Cancel) causes a framed report item to appear in the layout
view at the designated cursor position (clicking on Cancel discontinues the
process).
The types of framed report items that can be added to the layout view are
identified as follows:
Text
For textual headings and annotations. The content of the text can be edited.
Text Prompt/Value
For text and data values read from the report. The prompt text can be edited.
The data value can be aligned either left, right, or center in the text frame.
Graphics
For chromatograms, contours, spectra, and calibration.
The page order for spectra and calibration can be set for one, two, or three
pages.
Tables
For tabular data. The vertical length of each table is determined by the amount
of data in the table. When you click on a framed item in the layout area, the
outline changes from thin dashed lines to heavier lines with Windows-type grab
handles. You can click on the grab handles to size the frame in the layout area.
Also note, when you click on a framed item, that horizontal and vertical position
lines extend out from the top and left sides of the frame. The ends of these
position lines have arrowheads in the top and left margins. Position lines are
useful for adjusting the horizontal and vertical alignment of each frame.
10-13

10.5.1 Generating a Report
A report is generated automatically when data processing is performed either
by Recalculation or by Online Processing. The format of the report, and some of
the processing, is determined by a master layout that is selected and set up by
the user. This is accomplished using the Report Layout Editor which is
accessible from the Report Format screen of the Method. The options available
to be set up in the master layout are determined by the configuration of the
Method.
Two layout options are available for each report: Primary and Secondary.
They can be viewed by checking the Primary and Secondary options on the
Report Format screen. If a printer is selected, the report is printed as data
processing proceeds; Print Primary prints the primary layout as each injection
is acquired and Print Secondary prints the secondary layout after all of the
injections are acquired. The report can also be modified from the Injection
Table.
You can export the Primaide System Manager report file vial DDE to a
Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel file and save it with a user-defined name. The
DDE graph options must be set in the Primaide Administration program. A
statistics table can be generated at the end of the Report for all repetitive
injections and for all unknown vials.
Statistics for repetitive injections are reported for each vial. Only the statistics
for all selected unknown vials are generated at the end if requested.
If you select Printer, the report is printed as data processing proceeds
10-14
10.5.2
10.5.2 Mismatched Layout Items Dialog

If a mismatch exists between items on the layout and those set in the Method
when you click on the Edit Primary or Edit Secondary button on the Report
Format screen of the Method (or click on the Modify Report button in the
Injection Table while processing data), the Mismatched Layout Items dialog
appears to provide a list of the mismatched items.
Sort
Check the respective box to arrange the list in Ascending or Descending order.
OK
Click on the OK button to open the layout with the mismatched items removed.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the dialog without making any changes to the layout.
10-15
10.6 Method Layout Template
10.6 Method Layout Template

The method layout template is edited in the report layout editor, the used
template when an actual report is output is created.
10.6.1 Creating a New Master Layout

To create a new master layout.
You can create a new master layout by modifying an existing master layout and
then saving the modified layout with a new name using the Save As command
in the File menu. Or, you can perform the following:
(1) Select Modify Master Layout from the File menu; the Modify Master Layout
dialog appears.
(2) On the Modify Master Layout dialog, click on New. Note that the layout
display area is cleared.
(3) Insert and arrange report items in the display area.
Refer to Editing Guidelines for basic steps used to insert and arrange report
items in the layout.
(4) When the new master layout is complete, select Save As...from the File
menu. The Save Master Layout dialog appears.
(5) Enter the title for the new master layout in the Layout title box (no file
extension is needed) and click on OK.
10.6.2 Load Master Layout Dialog

When you select Load Master Layout from the File menu, the Load Master
Layout dialog appears.
OK
To select a layout, select (highlight) a name on the Master Layout's list and click
on OK.
Cancel
To close the dialog without making changes, click on Cancel.
10-16
10.6.3
10.6.3 Basic Steps in Formatting a Layout

The following procedures describe the basic steps used to format a layout in the
Report Layout Editor:
Repositioning framed items
Deleting a master layout
Copy
Cut/Paste of Layout Item
Adding report items to layout
Changing Report Item Name
Font Dialog
Report Item Position
Separator
Calibration Curve Dialog, Spectrum dialog
Return
Insert of Comment
Frame Size (Expansion, Reduction, Union of Frame Size)
Page Break Dialog
Page Setup Dialog
1) Repositioning Framed Items
(1) Click on a framed item in the template layout area.
Note that the framed outline changes from a thin outline to a heavier
outline with Windows-type grab handles.
10-17
(2) While holding down the left mouse button, drag the selected frame to a
new insertion point. Release the mouse button. A popup menu appears.
If no other item is inserted on the same line, the popup menu offers the
choices: Move Here and Cancel. Click on Move Here to insert the item.
NOTE:
If an item is inserted on the same line as a previously inserted

item, the popup menu offers the following choices: Above,
Below, Right, Left, or Cancel.
(3) As an alternative, framed items in the template layout area can be

repositioned in the display area using the Cut, Copy, and Paste
commands from the Edit menu.
2) Deleting a Master Layout

To delete a master layout:
(1) Select Modify Master Layout from the File menu; the Modify Master
10-18
10.6.3
(2) Select (highlight) the layout to be deleted from the list of layouts on the
Modify Master Layout dialog and click on Delete. A warning message is
displayed to confirm your deletion.
NOTE:
You can delete all master layouts except Standard from the master
layout list.
3) Copy
When the items in report layout template is copied, the copy icon and the
paste icon is used.
(1) Click the copied icon.
The flame in the specified item is displayed.
(2) Click the copy icon.

The specified items is copied on the clipboard.
(3) Click the paste icon and move the mouse pointer to a target position.
(the pointer changes into
.)
(4) Click a target position.

The edit command is displayed.
When the flame in the drag items specifies the position overlapping with the
exiting items flame, the [drag point (top/bottom/left/right)] command based
on the exiting items is displayed.
When the position not overlapping is specified, the [move] command is
displayed.
(5) The copy items are inserted into the selection point from clipboard.
10-19
4) Cut/Paste of Layout Item

When you cut out the items in layout template, and paste these on the an
other position or an other area, you use the cut icon and the paste icon.
(1) Click the cut items.
The flame is displayed on the specified item.
(2) Click the cut icon.

The specified items are copied on the clipboard.
(3) Click the paste icon and move the mouse pointer to a target position.
(the pointer changes into
.)
(4) Click a target position.

The edit command is displayed.
When the flame in the drag items specifies the position overlapping with the
exiting items flame, the [ drag point (top/bottom/left/right)] command based
on the exiting items is displayed.
When the position not overlapping is specified, the [move] command is
displayed.
(5) The copy items are inserted into the selection point from clipboard.
10-20
10.6.3
5) Adding Report Items to Layout

NOTE:
You can select more than one item at a time from the report items list
by holding down either the Shift key (for consecutive items) or the
Ctrl key (for non-consecutive items) while you click on additional
items.
(1) Click on a View Selection button (e. g. , Pre-Report or Pre-Vial).
(2) From the Filter drop-down list, click on desired filter option.
The selected (highlighted) filter is displayed and the report items list
changes to show only the items designated for that filter.
(3) From the report items list, click on an item (e. g. , Title, Date and Time).
The selected item is highlighted.
(4) While holding down the mouse button, drag the selection over to the
desired insertion point in the layout area and release the mouse button.
A popup menu appears.
10-21
If no other item is inserted on the same line, the popup menu offers the
following options:
Move Here and Cancel.
Click on Move Here to insert the item.
NOTE:
If an item is inserted on the same line as a previously inserted item,

the popup menu offers the following choices: Above, Below, Right, Left,
or Cancel.
10-22
10.6.3
6) Changing Report Item Name

The Text dialog appears when you double-click (or press the right mouse
button) on a text frame in the view area. Depending on the item selected,
two tab options are available: Prompt and Value.
Prompt Tab
When the Prompt tab is selected, you can edit the text message in the
display box.
7) Font Dialog
The Font dialog appears when you click on a framed item
and select
Font from the Option menu. From this dialog you can choose the Font, Font
Style, and Size for text in the framed item.
10-23
8) Report Item Position

When you create/print a report, you can move the report item position:
To move the specified items to the arbitrary position.
To move some items of the same group to the position arranged in the
horizontal ruler.
To move the specified items to center of section.
For move the specified items to the arbitrary position
(1) Click the specified items.
The specified items is displayed, and the horizontal ruler and the
vertical ruler are displayed.
Horizontal ruler
Vertical ruler
(2) Move the ruler and move the specified items to the arbitrary position.
10-24
10.6.3
To move some items of the same group to the position arranged in the horizontal
ruler.
(1) Specify some items moving the position in the same group.
Click the moved items (the first item) by the horizontal ruler.
Click the other items while pushing shift key.
(2) Move the horizontal ruler to a target position.
(3) Click the align left icon.

The specified items are arranged all together in the horizontal ruler.
10-25
To move the specified items to center of section.

(1) Specify the items moving the position. (possible to specify some items)
(2) Click the center horizontal icon.

The specified items are arranged all together in center of section.
9) Separator
The separator displays the section area of report items.
The arrangement of the items in the section can be adjusted by moving the
separator between straight line items and adjusting these position.
(1) Click the moved separator.
The shape of the mouse pointer changes, and the clicked separator is
displayed.
(2) Drag the separator to a target position.
(3) The separator moves to a target position, and the items of the separator
area move together.
10-26
10.6.3
10) Calibration Curve Dialog and Spectrum Dialog

A Calibration Curve dialog and spectrum dialog appears when you
double-click (or press the right mouse button) on a selected graphic frame in
the viewing area. Depending on the item selected, the dialog is either a
single graph dialog or a multi-graph dialog.
Page Order
Select the layout for One Across, Two Across, or Three Across. Click on OK
to enter the changes.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the dialog without making changes.
Help
Click on Help to display a description of the dialog.
10-27
11) Return
The Text dialog appears when you double-click (or press the right mouse
button) on a text frame in the view area. Depending on the item selected,
two tab options are available: Prompt and Value.
Value Tab
When the Value tab is selected, you can set the horizontal alignment of the
selected text frame in the layout view.
Alignment
Click appropriate button for Left or Right alignment.
Wrap/Extend Text
Enter check mark in appropriate box to wrap text or extend the end of line.
OK
Click on OK to enter the changes.
Cancel
Help
Click on Help to display a description of the Text dialog.
10-28
10.6.3
12) Insert of Comment

You can add an arbitrary comment to the report template without any
relation to output items set by method.
The comment can change font as well as other items.
To add a comment to the report layout template:
(1) Click the comment in the report item box, and drag on an arbitrary
position of template.
(2) The comment input area is inserted into the drag point.
(3) Double-click the comment input area.

Annotation dialog box is displayed. Input an arbitrary comment and
click OK button.
(4) The comment input to comment dialog box is displayed. The frame size
is additionally adjusted to the characters number.
10-29
13) Frame Size (Expansion, Reduction, Union of Frame Size)

The frame displays the report item area.
The graph (chromatogram, working curve) is expanded/ reduced, and it
might be input.
The frame might be too larger/smaller than actual report item according to
the characters number and the font size.
To adjust the frame size:
(1) Click the targeted items.
Drag the displayed frame to the target size
(2) The report item is displayed with the frame that changes the size.
When the other report item is arranged in the based report item, the frame
size can be united.
10-30
10.6.3
To unit to the frame size of base item:

(1) Click the base frame first. Click the item that matches the frame by the
mouse pointer while pushing shift key. (possible to select some items)
(2) Click the icon that matches the frame. (making same height, making
same size, making same size/height)
14) Page Break Dialog

When you click on a selected page break in the view area, the Page Break
dialog appears.
You can use the dialog to set a hard or soft page break. You can also change
the page orientation between portrait and landscape and set margins.
10-31
Page Setup
Click on Hard Page Break to set a break at the designated place in the
viewing area. Click on Smart Page Break to set the break automatically at
the end of an item that cannot be separated in two or more pieces. By
definition, a Hard Page Break forces the section that follows the break to
start on the next page.
A Smart Page break however, is more selective. It will not break if the
section that follows it can also fit on the same page. That is, if two sections
with page breaks are separated by a Smart Break, the Smart Break
function first determines whether the following section (up to its page
break) can also fit on the same page.
If it can fit on the same page, the page break will not occur. Conversely, if
the following section cannot fit on the same page, the page break will occur.
Refer to examples 1 and 2 below:
Example 1:
The Smart Page Break occurs because the following section does not fit on
the page.
Start Page
Smart Page Break (Breaks because the following section does not fit on
the page.
End Page
Example 2:
The Smart Page Break does not occur because the following section fits on
the page.
Start Page
Smart Page Break (Does not break because the following section fits on
the page.
Second Page Break (Functions as Hard Page Break and moves following
section to the next page. )
End Page
Orientation
Click on Portrait or Landscape to set page orientation. Margins(inch) Enter
values for Left, Right, Top, and Bottom page margins.
OK
Click on OK to enter the choices selected on the dialog.
Cancel
Click on Cancel close the dialog without saving the changes.
10-32
10.6.3
Help
Click on Help to enable the Help function.
15) Page Setup Dialog
When you click on Page Setup from the File menu, the Page Setup dialog
appears. .
You can use the dialog to change the page orientation margins for the entire
layout document.
Orientation
Click on Portrait or Landscape to set page orientation.
Margins (inch)
Enter values for Left, Right, Top, and Bottom page margins.
10-33
10.7.2 Modify Dependencies Dialog
10.7 Dependency Function of Report Items

10.7.1 Modifying Dependencies
The Report Layout Editor uses the Dependency function to set up and identify
report items that are "dependent on" other items being in the report.
For example, if report item A is set to be dependent on item B, then item A only
appears in the printed report if item B is included in the report.
The Dependency function is based on data from the report file and not on items
in the Report Layout Editor.
Therefore, a "Dependent On" item can be deleted from the layout after
dependency is set and the "Dependent" item will still print in the report.
(1) Click on item in the Report Items list and drag it to the layout view (e. g. ,
Chrom Type in the Injection view).
(2) Double-click the frame item (e. g. , Chrom Type). The frame outline changes
to heavy lines.
(3) Select Modify Dependencies from the Option menu or click on Toolbar icon.
(See Menu Bar/Toolbar. ) The Modify Dependencies dialog appears. Note
that the report item (e. g. , Chrom Type) is listed in the Dependents box.
(4) Highlight dependency item in the All Items box (e. g. , Chromatogram) and
click on Add. The selected name appears in the Dependent On box.
Highlight the name in the Dependent On box and note that the number 1
appears in the Channel selection box.
(5) Repeat step 4 to add a second dependent item (e. g. , Chromatogram) and
note that when you highlight the second item in the Dependent On list that
the number 2 appears in the Channel selection box.
(6) Repeat step 4 to attempt to add a third item to the Dependent On box. Note
that the add function does not allow the transfer.
10-34
10.7.2

When you click on a framed item and select Modify Dependencies from the
Option menu, the Modify Dependencies dialog appears. From this dialog you
can add or remove items dependent on the selected framed item.
For example, in a master layout template, a "DAD contour map" is associated as
subordination origin of "Spectral bandwidth", and it is now.
When a " DAD contour map " does not exist in an actual calculation result, the
report output of "Spectral bandwidth" is canceled.
Tool Bar Shortcut

Click on
Add
To add a dependency to the item in the Dependents list, highlight the dependent
item in the All Items list and click on Add.
Remove
To remove a dependency from the Dependent On list, highlight the item and
click on Remove.
10-35
Channel
Identifies the appropriate channel.
For example, select an item in the All Items list box and click on Add.
The selected name appears in the Dependent On box.
Highlight the name in the Dependent On box and note that the number 1
appears in the Channel selection box. Add a second dependent item(e. g. ,
Chromatogram) and note that when you highlight the second item in the
Dependent On list that the number 2 appears in the Channel selection box.
OK
Click on OK to enter the changes.
Cancel
Help
Click on Help to display a description of the Text dialog.
10-36
10.8
10.8 Master Layout

10.8.1 Modify Master Layout Dialog
When you select Modify Master Layout from the File menu, the Modify Master
You can perform the following:

Open
To select a layout, select (highlight) a name on the Master Layout's list and click
on Open.
New
To create a new layout, click on New to open a new report layout screen with a
blank display.
Delete
To delete a layout from the Master Layouts list, highlight the layout name and
click on Delete.
The layout is deleted after you confirm the message: Are you sure?
Cancel
To close the dialog without making changes, click on Cancel.
Default
To copy the new layout to the standard layout, click on Default. When the
message: The Standard Layout will be overwritten by new Layout click on Yes.
10-37
10.8.2 Save Master Layout Dialog
10.8.2 Save Master Layout Dialog

When you click on Save As from the File menu, the Save Master Layout dialog
appears.
You can use the dialog to assign a title to a newly created layout and add the
new title to the list of layouts shown in the layout display box.
OK
Click on OK to enter the name of the new layout.
Cancel
Click on Cancel close the dialog without saving the change.
10.9 Master Layout File

The master layout file of the following initialization is registered in the
program.
STANDARD Layout File:
This is a template file including all items of method.
This is used by new method.
This is the best for use as the template when the customized file is created.
G SMALL Layout file
This is the layout file that minimizes the analysis information of STANDARD
layout file.
SMALL Layout File
This is the layout file that minimizes the analysis information of STANDARD
layout file, and that deletes all graphs.
10-38
10.10
10.10 Special Report Items

10.10.1 Multi-Chrom Overlay Report
(1) Click on either the Post Vial, Post STD, Post UNK, or Post Report button in
the View Selection panel.
(2) From the report items list, click on Multi-Inj Overlay. The selected item is
highlighted.
(3)
While holding down the mouse button, drag the Multi-Inj Overlay over to
the desired insertion point in the layout area and release the mouse button.
A popup menu appears. If no other item is inserted on the same line, the
popup menu offers the following options: Move Here and Cancel. Click on
Move Here to insert the item. A rectangle with the title Multi-Inj Overlay
appears in the display area.
NOTE:
If an item is inserted on the same line as a previously inserted item,

the popup menu offers the following choices: Above, Below, Right, Left,
or Cancel.
(4)
Double-click on the rectangle. The Multi-Inj Overlay dialog appears. The

following choices are enabled depending on the vial cycle.
All Injections
Post Vial, Post UNK, Post Report
All STDs
Post STD, Post UNK, Post Report
All UNKs.
Post UNK, Post Report
10.10.2 Resolution Report

The relative area ratio of resolution components to main components is output
by resolution report function.
To output the report:
(1) Calculation method
Excluding area% / height% method
(2) Specify main components and resolution components with table.
(3) Add resolution table item to report layout template.
10-39
11.
11. FUNCTIONS AND OPERATIONS OF MODULE

DETAILED INFORMATION WINDOW
The Module Detailed Information window is usable for checking the detailed
information about modules and controlling them.
11.1 Status Display on Module Detailed Information Window

The status of each module presently connected can be displayed.
The status that may be displayed for each module are listed below.
However, during noise test, single run and series analysis, the system status
will be displayed for the status of each module.
Except under execution of noise test, single run and series analysis, the status
inherent to each module may be displayed as listed below.
11.1.1 Common (system status)

Processing
During parameter sending, processing or calculation.
Waiting for *****
Under wait for the ready status of each model (*****).
For example, this status is indicated while the completion of gradient elution is
awaited.
Waiting for injection
Under wait for sample injection with the autosampler.
Baseline Test
Baseline test is in progress.
Acquire Run
Data is being acquired.
Monitor
Indicated when series analysis is over.
11-1
11.1.2 1110 Pump
11.1.2 1110 Pump

Under liquid delivery stop
The Pump has stopped liquid delivery.
Under purge execution
Purging with the Pump is underway.
Under key Input
Key input status, i. e. , key input is being carried out with the UI pad.
Error
An error has occurred on the 1110 Pump.
Ready
The Pump has been ready for measurement.
Usually, this status is indicated after liquid delivery has started
Busy
Busy status except for the above status.
11.1.3 1210 autosampler

Waiting state for an initial position setup
You are requested to set the sampler at the initial position.
Click the [Initial Position Setup] button.
Under key Input
Error
An error has occurred on the 1210 autosampler.
Ready
The autosampler has been ready for measurement.
Busy
Busy status such as sampler washing except for the above status.
11-2
11.1.4
11.1.4 1310 column oven

Stop Temperature Control
Temperature control is now stopped.
Door Open
The door of oven is open.
Waiting state for ready
The oven is not yet ready (including wait-time section).
Under key Input
Error
An error has occurred on the 1310 column oven.
Ready
The column oven has been ready for measurement.
Busy
11.1.5 1410 UV detector

Under wavelength move
Wavelength is being shifted in spectrum acquisition, etc.
Under Auto Zero
Auto zero is in progress.
Under key Input
Error
An error has occurred on the 1410 UV detector.
Ready
The UV detector has been ready for measurement.
Busy
11.1.6 USB-AID
Error
An error has occurred on the USB-AID.
Ready
The RI detector has been ready for measurement.
Busy
11-3
11.1.7 1430 DAD
11.1.7 1430 DAD

Error
An error has occurred on the 1430 DAD.
Ready
The RI detector has been ready for measurement.
Busy
11-4
11.2
11.2 Control Commands on Module Detailed Information Window

Described here are the functions of the control commands on the Module
Detailed Information window and the availability of the respective commands
in each system status.
Table11-1 lists the buttons/functions for each module and Table11-2 shows the
availability of each function.
Table11-1 Module Detailed Information Control Functions
Module Name
1110 Pump
Button Name/Function
Purge
Manual setting
1210 Autosampler
1310 Column oven

1410 UV detector
Pump A/B pressure zero

correction
Pump A/B maintenance
Wash sampler
Wash plunger
Purge position
Set initial position
View maintenance
Set temperature
Set wavelength
Lamp ON
Lamp OFF
Auto zero
Lamp energy
View maintenance
Description
Conducts purging with a Pump purging flow rate
specified.
Allows manual Pump settings (pressure limiter,
eluent composition, flow rate).
Corrects pressure zero point.
Checks and rests logbook.
Washes the sampler (injection port).
Washes the Pump plunger in combination with the
Pump plunger washing unit (option).
Moves the sampler to the purging position.
Moves the valve, needle, etc. to each initial position.
Checks and resets the logbook.
Sets oven temperature.
Sets a measuring wavelength.
Turns on the D2 lamp.
Turns off the D2 lamp. Before turning off, a
confirmation message appears.
Executes the auto zero function.
Indicates the lamp energy value at 250 nm. The
value will be automatically contained in the detailed
information about the HPLC module for
11-5
11.2 Control Commands on Module Detailed Information Window
Table11-1
Module Name
1430 DAD
Module Detailed Information Control Functions

Button Name/Function
D2 Lamp ON
Description
Turns on the D2 lamp.
D2 Lamp OFF
Turns off the D2 lamp. Before turning off, a

W Lamp ON
Turns on the W lamp.
W Lamp OFF
Turns off the W lamp. Before turning off, a

Slit Setup
A Slit width Fine1 nmCoarse4 nm
setup is performed.
Lamp Mode
Lamp mode (D2&W mode (D2 and W lamp

lighting), D2 mode (D2 lamp lighting), W mode
(W lamp lighting)) setup is performed.
Auto zero
Executes the auto zero function.
Lamp energy
Indicates the lamp energy values at 250 and

600 nm. The values will be automatically
contained in the detailed information about
the HPLC module for Administration
program.
View maintenance
11-6
11.2
Table11-2
Availability of Control Command
Module Name
Control Command
Before opening
monitor window (*1)
Idle/monitoring
status (*2)
1110 Pump
Purge
Manual setting
Pump A/B pressure
zero correction
Pump A/B
maintenance
Wash sampler
Wash plunger
Purge position
Set initial position
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
View maintenance
Set temperature
O
O
X
X
X
X
Set wavelength
Lamp ON
Lamp OFF
Auto zero
Lamp energy
View maintenance
D2 Lamp ON
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
D2 Lamp OFF
W Lamp ON
W Lamp OFF
O
O
X
X
X
X
Slit Setup
Lamp Mode
Auto zero
Lamp energy
View maintenance
1210
autosampler
1310 column
oven
1410 UV
detector
1430 DAD
During a run or
series analysis
(*3)
X
X
X
O: Available
X: Unavailable
(*1) Status before opening the data acquisition monitor window after
initialization
(*2) Monitoring status with the data acquisition monitor window opened after
initialization
(*3) During a run or series analysis with the data acquisition monitor window
opened after initialization
11-7
11.3 Status Display
11.3 Status Display

11.3.1 1110 Pump Status Display
When the 1110 Pump is connected, the Pump tab appears on the Module
Status A/B
Indicates the present status.
When Pumps A and B are specified for low pressure gradient elution, status B
will be displayed at the right of status A.
When Pumps A and B are specified for low pressure gradient elution,
parameters for Pump B will be displayed below those for Pump A.
Pressure
Indicates the current Pump pressure.
For its unit, the one selected in Administration program is used.
Maximum
Indicates the set upper pressure limit value.
11-8
11.3.1
Minimum
Indicates the set lower pressure limit value.
Flow Rate
Indicate the present flow rate of Pump in mL/min.
Eluents %A - %D.
Indicates the ratio of each eluent.
Control
Purge
When clicking this button, the Purge setup window opens.
And when clicking the [Purge On] button, a confirmation message appears.
When you click the [Yes] button, purging starts in the present mixing ratio.
The upper and lower pressure limit values are set as follows; Min. : 0 and Max. :
30 (kgf/cm2). In the purging flow rate box, the currently set value is indicated.
100% FLOW A-D
During the course of purging, flow path can be changed by one-touch button ([A],
[B], [C], [D]). When clicking the [Purge Off] button, purging will stop.
Clicking the [Close] button will be followed by the message shown below.
11-9
11.3.1 1110 Pump Status Display
Manual Setup
Desired liquid delivery conditions can be set manually. When clicking this
button, the Manual Setup window appears.
When you click the [Apply] button after parameter input, the Pump is set under
the input liquid delivery conditions.
When entries are made for %A to %C, %D will be automatically calculated.
Pressure zero point calibration(Pump A)
When clicking this button, the following message appears.
Click the [Yes] button, and the message box will close and the pressure zero
point of Pump A will be corrected.
Pressure zero point calibration(Pump B)
When clicking this button, the following message appears.
Click the [Yes] button, and the message box will close and the pressure zero
point of Pump B will be corrected.
11-10
11.3.1
View Maintenance
When you click this button, the date of beginning use of the Pump seal and the
total flow volume of delivered liquid since the date can be checked as
maintenance information.
And after replacing the Pump seal with a new one, both indications can be reset.
Close
When clicking this button, the View Maintenance dialog closes.
Reset
Clicking the [Reset] button presents the following message.
When you click the [Yes] button, the log of instrument main unit is reset (PC's date
is automatically set for the date of change) and its record is written in the
Administration program log. The total volume of delivered liquid before resetting
is also written. Recording is made irrespective of the GLP option setting in
11-11
11.3.2 1210 Autosampler Status Display

When the 1210 autosampler is connected, the Sampler tab appears on the
Module Detailed Information window.
Status
The present status is indicated here.
Cooling Unit Temp
Present
Indicates the present temperature (C) of cooling unit.
Unless the cooling unit is used, this temperature will not be indicated.
Apply
Indicates the set temperature (C) of cooling unit.
Unless the cooling unit is used, this temperature will not be indicated.
Control
Flush Wash Port
Clicking this button starts washing of the washing port.
11-12
11.3.2
Wash Strokes:
The number of needle washing times can be specified within a range from 0 to
20.
Initially, the set value on the 1210 autosampler main frame is indicated.
Wash Speed
Needle washing speed is settable from 1 (slow) to 5 (fast)(from 1 (slow) to 3 (fast)
with 5.0 mL syringe).
Initially, the set value on the 1210 autosampler main frame is indicated.
NOTE:
Washing speed must be input according to syringe capacity as listed

below.
Syringe capacity (mL)
Washing speed (settable range)
0.1, 0.5
1-5
5.0
1-3
OK
When clicking the [OK] button, the window shown below appears.
If you want to stop sampler washing midway, click the [Stop] button.
Stop
When clicking the [Stop] button, sampler washing stops (ends halfway).
After stop, the following message is reported.
OK
When you click the [OK] button, the Flush Wash Port window reappears.
11-13
Plunger Wash
When the Pump plunger wash unit (option) is connected to the valve port for
washing, the plunger seal of 1110 Pump can be washed with a detergent for
autosampler.
Volume (mL)
The volume of detergent for Pump washing is settable within 0.0 to 5000.0.
OK
The following confirmation message is displayed.
Clicking the [OK] button in this message box starts washing of the Pump
plunger.
If you click the [Cancel] button, washing of the Pump plunger is canceled.
Position
When clicking this button, the autosampler moves to the purging position.
In combination with purging with the 1110 Pump, the flow path up to the
injection valve of autosampler can be washed without opening the drain valve of
the Pump body.
Idle
The mechanical section of sampler can be returned to the initial position by
clicking this button.
11-14
11.3.2
View Maintenance
When you click this button, the date of beginning use of the injection valve seal,
etc. and the number of injection times can be checked as maintenance
information.
And after replacing the injection valve seal, etc. with new ones, the
corresponding information can be reset.
Close
Reset
(An example for injection port seal)
When you click the [Yes] button, the log of instrument main unit is reset (PC's
date is automatically set for the date of change) and its record is written in the
Administration program log. The number of injection times before resetting is
also written. Recording is made irrespective of the GLP option setting in
11-15
11.3.3 1310 Column Oven Status Display
11.3.3 1310 Column Oven Status Display

When the 1310 column oven is connected, the Oven tab appears on the Module
Status
Indicates the present status of column oven.
Oven Temperature (C)
Indicates the present oven temperature.
Setup Temperature (C)
Indicates the set oven temperature.
Room Temperature (C)
Indicates the present room temperature.
Remaining Time of Wait Time (min)
Indicates the remaining wait time before the column oven reaches the ready
status (stable temperature).
Gas Sensor
Indicates the gas sensor level in the column oven.
Alarm Level
Indicates the alarm level in the column oven.
Oven Temperature Setup
When you click the [Apply] button after inputting a desired temperature, the
1310 column oven can be set at that temperature.
11-16
11.3.4
11.3.4 1410 UV Detector Status Display

When the 1410 UV detector is connected, the UV1 or UV2 tab appears on the
Module Detailed Information window.
UV1 appears when this detector is set in channel 1 and UV2 appears when it
set in channel 2.
Status
Indicates the present status of UV detector.
WL (nm)
Indicates the set wavelength.
Data
Indicates the measured data value as a count.
Lamp Status
Indicates the present lamp status.
Lamp Energy (Sample)
Indicates the present lamp energy (on the sample side).
Lamp Energy (Reference)
Indicates the present lamp energy (on the reference side).
Wavelength Setup
Input a wavelength (nm), and then click the [Setup] button.
Wavelength is settable within 190 to 600 nm.
Setup
When clicking this button, the detector is set at the specified wavelength.
11-17
11.3.4 1410 UV Detector Status Display
View Maintenance
When you click this button, the total lit (ON) time of D2/Hg lamp, the number of
ON times and the date of beginning its use (exchange date) can be checked as
maintenance information.
And after replacing the lamp with a new one, the corresponding information can
be reset.
Close
Reset
(An example for D2 lamp)
Administration program log.
The maintenance information before resetting is also written.
Recording is made irrespective of the GLP option setting in Administration
program.
Lamp ON
When clicking this button, the detector lamp will come on.
11-18
11.3.4
Lamp OFF
When clicking this button, the following message is issued to check if you
actually want to turn off the lamp.
Clicking the [Yes] button turns off the lamp and clicking the [No] button cancels
the lamp OFF selection.
Auto Zero
Executes auto zero of the detector. Upon execution of auto zero, signal is set at 0
AU. The [Auto Zero] button is protected so that it is ineffective during a run,
series analysis and noise test.
Lamp Energy
When you click the [Lamp Energy] button, the Lamp Energy Results at Start up
dialog opens to indicate the present lamp energy level (on the reference side).
This result is automatically recorded in the Administration program log.
program.
11-19
11.3.5 USB-AID Status Display
11.3.5 USB-AID Status Display

When the USB-AID is connected, the AID1 or AID2 tab appears on the Module
AID1 appears when this detector is set in channel 1 and AID2 appears when it
is set in channel 2.
Status
Indicates the present status of USB-AID.
Data
Indicates the measured data value as a count
11-20
11.3.6
11.3.6 1430 DAD Status Display

When the 1430 DAD is connected the DAD1 tab appears on the Module Detailed
Information window.
DAD is channel 1 fixation.
Status
Indicates the present status of DAD.
Lamp Status
Indicates the present status of D2 and W lamps.
Slit
The slit set up is displayed.
View Maintenance
When you click this button, the total lit (ON) time of D2/W/Hg lamp, the
number of ON times and the date of beginning its use (exchange date) can be
checked as maintenance information. And after replacing the lamp with a new
one, the corresponding information can be reset.
Close
11-21
11.3.6 1430 DAD Status Display
Reset
(An example for D2 lamp)
Administration program log. The maintenance information before resetting is
also written. Recording is made irrespective of the GLP option setting in
D2 Lamp ON
When clicking this button, the D2 lamp of detector will come on.
D2 Lamp OFF
When clicking this button, the D2 lamp of detector will turn off.
W Lamp ON
When clicking this button, the W lamp of detector will come on.
W Lamp OFF
When clicking this button, the W lamp of detector will turn off.
Control
11-22
11.3.6
Auto Zero
Executes auto zero of the detector.
Upon execution of auto zero, signal is set at 0 AU.
The [Auto Zero] button is protected so that it is ineffective during a run, series
analysis and noise test.
Lamp Energy
When you click the [Lamp Energy] button, the Lamp Energy Results at Start up
dialog opens to indicate the present lamp energy level (on the reference side).
This result is automatically recorded in the Administration program log.
program.
Slit Setup
After slit (Fine(1 nm),Coarse(4 nm)) is selected, [Apply] button is clicked.
When clicking this button, the detector is set at the specified flow cell
temperature.
Apply
If this button is clicked, it is set as a specified Slit.
Lamp Mode
After Lamp mode (D2&W, D, W) is selected, [Apply] button is clicked.
Apply
If this button is clicked, it is set as a specified Lamp mode.
11-23
12.
12. DATA RE-PROCESSING - 3D DATA Three dimension data cannot process Chromatogram by an untouched form
(peak judgment, Area and Height calculation). A data re-processing window (3D
data) is a window for performing extraction of a Chromatogram, and extraction
of a spectrum from 3D data. Moreover, it can access to the spectrum library
which registers the extracted spectrum.
Please refer to Section 8, Data re-processing window - Chromatogram about
processing of the extracted Chromatogram.
12-1
12.1 Composition of a data re-processing window
12.1 Composition of a data re-processing window

The command of a menu and the related function of an icon are as follows.
12-2
12.1.1
12.1.1 File Menu

New
Ctrl+N

Close All
Closes all open functions in al open windows regardless of focus.
If any
window has been modified, the program offers the opportunity to save it.
As an exception, when the state of a data acquisition window "is data
acquisition performing", a data acquisition window and all the windows except
the sample table under execution are closed
Save Method
Ctrl+S

Saves the Method that is active on display in the windows.
The previous
version on the hard disk is overwritten after you respond to all Method
validation message, if any.
Save Method As...
Initiates Method validation and opens the Save AS dialog box so that you can
specify the Title of the Method and the name of the Application.
Print...
Ctrl+P
Prints the current window item as plain text.

Print Preview
Display full pages.
Print Setup...
Lets you pick a printer, paper orientation (Portrait or Landscape), paper
size(letter, legal, A4, B5) and the paper the paper source (tray or manual).
Exit
Exit is inactive while you are acquiring data using Data Acquisition.
12-3
12.1.2 Edit Menu
12.1.2 Edit Menu

Undo
This command to reverse the last action, which is used to undo a baseline cut or
delete.
Edit Colors
A color selection dialog box is opened and the color palette of window on display
is changed. Items associated with the current window are listed in the upper
left box.
If [Edit printer colors] is made check-on, the color palette for a print output can
be changed.
The changed color is reflected in a display by overwriting a color palette.
It displays in the color at the time of a printer output
12-4
12.1.3
12.1.3 Process Data Menu

The following commands are available from the ProcessData menu. The
availability of each command depends on the currently open view mode.
Gray display is cannot use the tool icon and the command.
Purity Check
Contour, Spectrum, and Purity Spectra Views
Select this command to perform a peak purity check on the chromatogram
selected by the horizontal cursor on the Contour map. This command is
avail-able only when the Contour view or Chromatogram view is selected and
the displayed data is of DAD type or Extracted Chrom type.
The Primaide System Manager performs Peak Purity calculation for all peaks
above the Peak Rejection Level (defined in Chromatogram Display Format
screen of the cur-rent Method). The result of the purity check is displayed
graphically on the currently selected view (for DAD data it could be either the
top Chromatogram of the Contour view or Chromatogram view). Purity values
are displayed on the graph near the peaks.
Select this command again to disable the purity display.
NOTE:
For a DAD data display when Purity Display mode is activated, the
horizontal cursor line on the Contour view is disabled and the
vertical cursor line can only be placed on the nearest peak top.
Accordingly, the Unprocessed Chromatogram view and other types of
chromatogram-setting commands and icons are disabled as well.
Export Best Chrom

Use this command to export the extraction parameters used in creating the
displayed Best Chromatogram to the Best Chrom Table of the current method.
This command is available only when the Contour view is selected and the Best
Chrom Table is displayed on the bottom of the window (by clicking on the Best
Chrom Table icon or selecting Show Best Chrom Table from View menu).
When you select this command, the Primaide System Manager replaces the old
parameters in the Best Chrom Table with the new parameters used in creating
the current Best
Chromatogram. (See Restore Best Chrom immediately below).
12-5
12.1.3 Process Data Menu
Restore Best Chrom

Use this command to restore the original Best Chromatogram defined in the
Best Chrom Table of the current method. This command is available only when
the Contour view is selected and the Best Chrom Table is displayed on the
bottom of the window.
When Restore Best Chrom is selected, the Primaide System Manager program
replaces the currently displayed Best Chromatogram with the one created using
the parameters in the Best Chrom Table of the current method. You may use
this command to restore the old Best Chromatogram if you do not like the
modifications you made on display.
Replace Spectra in Extracted File...
The spectrum specified by the time cursor of the contour map is automatically
replaced by the peak top spectrum of the extracted chromatogram.
Or the
specified background spectrum is replaced the background for the peak top
spectrum of the extracted spectrum.
K factor of the background spectrum is
used to replay the spectrum of the extracted chromatogram
Use the radio button options on the dialog to specify which file is to store the
spectrum. Use the Replace BG Spectrum Only option to specify that only
background spectrum be replaced. If a background has been specified, the
option is enabled and initially unchecked. A peak top spectrum must still be
chosen to specify the peak, even if only the background spectrum is to be
replaced.
12-6
12.1.4
12.1.4 Options Menu

Command that can be used by options menu is as follows.
Auto Scale
Use this command to adjust the absorbance scale (the z-scale) of the graphical
display so that the highest peak can be displayed. This function does not change
the zero offset, and negative data points are not scaled.
Scaled Spectra
Select this command to display the spectrum (spectra) using its (their) true
intensities. The data is displayed using the current axis scales without any
adjustments.
Normalized Spectra
Select this command to display a spectrum (spectra) in the normalized scale.
normalizes the spectral data by scaling the maximum intensity of each
spectrum to 1.0.
Frozen Spectra mode
The icon to link:
Freeze Spectrum
It change to Freeze Spectrum mode.

Freeze Spectrum
Select this command to freeze the currently displayed spectrum. You may use
this command to freeze up to four spectra. This command is available only when
the Freeze Spectra display mode is activated.
Clear Frozen Spectra
Select this command to remove all frozen spectra from the display. This
command is available only when the Freeze Spectra display mode is activated.
Fixed WL Chromatogram mode
The icon to link:
Set Fixed
WL Chromatogram
It change to Fixed WL Chromatogram mode.
Set Fixed WL Chromatogram
This command is available only when the Fixed WL chromatogram display
mode is active. Use this command to set the currently displayed chromato-gram
to be a fixed-wavelength chromatogram on the Contour plot and to over-lay it on
the top chromatogram view of the Contour display. You may use this command
to set up to six fixed-wavelength chromatograms.
12-7
12.1.4 Options Menu
Clear Fixed WL Chromatograms

Use this command to remove all fixed-wavelength chromatograms from the
display. This command is available only when the Fixed WL Chromatogram
display mode is active.
Background subtraction
The spectrum for background subtraction is specified.
Display Options
The Display options command invokes the Contour Display Options dialog.
Display by the set value of

Method
Saving the replacement

value in Method
Change value is stored in the analysis file.

Displays the setting value of an analysis file.
The functions available in the Contour Display Options dialog are as follows:
Spectrum Display
Select Absorbance to display the spectrum using its true intensities. The data is
displayed using the current contour axis scales without any adjustments. Select
Normalized to display the spectrum in normalized scale by setting the
maximum intensity to 1.0.
12-8
12.1.4
Spectra Marker
Select None if you want no spectra other than the cursor spectrum to be
displayed in the left spectral view. This is the default setting. Select Frozen
Spectrum to enable the Frozen Spectrum display and activate the Freeze
Spectrum icon. Select Integrated Spectrum to enable Integrated Spectrum
Display mode. Select Background Subtraction to enable the Background
Subtraction mode and activate the Background Subtraction icon.
Chromatogram Marker
Select one of the following:
None: If you want no chromatograms to be displayed other than the cursor

chromatogram.
Fixed Chromatograms: Displays up to four fixed-wavelength chromatograms on

the Contour view along with the cursor chromatogram. The Primaide System
Manager initializes the display using the wavelength(s) selected in the current
method if available.
Integrated Chromatogram: Displays the integrated chromatogram on the

Contour view along with the cursor chromatogram. Primaide System Manager
initializes the display using the wavelength range set in the current method if
available.
Best Chromatogram: Displays the Best Chromatogram on the Contour view

along with the cursor chromatogram. The Primaide System Manager initializes
the display using the Best Chrom Table in the current method if available.
Display Format
All display format parameters are initialized according to the current method.
The following may be changed:
Absorbance Scale: Specifies a value of absorbance scale from a fixed set to draw
the Contour map and the cursor spectrum and the cursor chromatogram. The
range of selections is either from 2.0 to 0.005 or from 0.2 to 0.0005, depending
on the Absorbance mode used in data acquisition. Note that the scale is used in
the 3-D Mesh view as well.
% Zero Offset: The value specified is used to set the zero position on the AU
scale for drawing Contour and 3-D Mesh displays.
Time Range: Specifies the time range used to draw the Contour and 3-D Mesh
displays.
Wavelength Range: Specifies the wavelength range used to draw the Contour
and 3-D Mesh displays.
12-9
12.1.4 Options Menu
OK
Press to apply the changes to the Contour and 3-D Mesh views and close the
dialog.
Update Method
Press to update the modified DAD display parameters and DAD processing
parameters to the current method. Your selection in the Chromatogram Marker
section is updated along with the carbonating wavelength(s) set up on screen.
For example, if Best Chromatogram is selected, the Best Chrom Table of the
current method is updated using the current Best Chromatogram accordingly.
Restore
Press to restore the DAD display parameters and DAD data-processing
parameters using those of the current method. If the current method has been
updated using the current DAD display, you can no longer restore the original
parameters because they have been overwritten by the Update Method
command.
Cancel
Press to discard the changes and close the dialog.
12-10
12.1.5
12.1.5 Library Menu

Library menu can use the following command.( For details, please refer to
Section 13.3 Using Spectrum Library.")
Spectrum Library
Use this command to open the Spectrum Library Maintenance window. This
command is also available from the File menu when the Primaide System
Manager Main window is first opened.
Search Library...
Use this command to perform a library search for matching the spectrum selected
from the Contour map by the horizontal line cursor, or for matching the peak
spectrum selected in the Purity Spectra view (from extracted-chromatogram
data). When you select this command, the Library Search Parameter dialog
appears with the selected spectrum loaded.
Add to Library
Use this command to add the spectrum selected from the Contour map by the
horizontal line cursor, or the peak spectrum selected in the Purity Spectra view
to the Spectrum Library. When this command is selected, the Add Spectrum to
Library dialog box appears with the current spectrum loaded.
Clear Library Spectrum
Use this command to remove the library spectrum resulting from a library
search. This command is enabled only when the library search overlays the
spectrum found on the Spectrum View, the Purity Spectra View, or the side
Spectral display on the Contour View.
12-11
12.1.6 View Menu
12.1.6 View Menu

Acquisition Information
Select this command or click on the Acquisition Information icon to display the
data-acquisition method and related parameters used to acquire the currently
displayed data.
The following information is displayed in this window:
Method Name and Series Number.
Noise Test Result.
Complete Data Acquisition Method including Method Configuration and all
hardware setups used in acquisition such as: Pump/solvent setup, Autosampler
setup, Oven setup, Detector Setup (Channel 1 or 2, or both), and Event Table.
12-12
12.1.6
Contour
Use this command to display the Contour view of the current data display. This
command is only available when the displayed data is of DAD type. Note that
when you select DAD data from an Injection Table for display, the Contour view
is displayed automatically by default.
The next processing can be performed in a Contour map.
Overlapping display of spectrum
Overlapping display of chromatogram
Create and modify the best wavelength chromato
Create and modify the best wavelength chromato table
Create and modify the integrated chromatogram
Modify the integrated wavelength range
Create and modify the smoothing spectrum
Modify the integrated time range
Specify fixed wavelength chromatogram
Specify the background spectrum / display the background subtraction
spectrum
Specify the fixed time spectrum (freeze spectrum)
Perform and display the peak-purity checks
Use the spectrum library
Spectrum
Use this command to select and display a spectrum (spectra) from the Contour
map. This command is available only when the displayed data is of DAD type.
The Spectrum view is an enlarged-window display of the left Spectral view of
the Contour display, thus providing a more clear display for the selected
spectrum (initially specified by a vertical cursor on the DAD contour), especially
for the overlaid frozen spectra
Unprocessed Chromatogram
Use this command to view the chromatograms selected from the Contour map.
The command is available only when the displayed data is of DAD type.
The Unprocessed Chromatogram view is an enlarged window display of the top
Chromatogram view of the Contour display and provides a more clear display
for the selected chromatogram (by a horizontal cursor on the DAD con-tour),
especially for the overlaid chromatograms with fixed wavelength.
12-13
12.1.6 View Menu
3-D Mesh
Use this command to display the DAD data in a three-dimensional view window.
This command is available only when the displayed data is of DAD type.
Chromatogram
The icon to link
Purity Spectra
Use this command to display any one of the following:

Chromatogram data
Extracted chromatogram data
Selected chromatogram from DAD data
When you select chromatogram data or extracted chromatogram data for
display, the Chromatogram view automatically appears as the default. For DAD
data, the displayed chromatogram can be one of the following, depending on the
setting in the corresponding Contour view which is initialized with the current
method.
First chromatogram with fixed wavelength
Integrated chromatogram
Best Chromatogram
Chromatogram at the cursor wavelength (if none of the above is selected in
the current Contour view)
You can manually construct a baseline in this view. You can also perform
peak-purity check and display peak purity in this view. The Peak Purity view is
similar to what you can see from the top Chromatogram view of the Contour
display.
You can also review peak information such as peak height, area, and retention
time.
(For details, please refer to " Section 8 Data re-processing window
Chromatogram ")
12-14
12.1.7
Purity Spectra
Use this command to display a set of spectra extracted from a peak, including
spectra from the top and the left and right sides of the peak. The two side
spectra displayed in the window are the ones used to compute peak purity. This
command is available only when the Chromatogram view is selected and the
displayed data is of DAD type or Extracted Chrom type.
The Purity Spectra window appears with a list box on the right side that lists all
the detected peaks by their retention times. You can use this window to view the
peak spectra for each detected peak by clicking on the retention time from the
list box.
Show Injection Table
Displays the Injection Table from which the displayed data is taken. The
Injection Table appears at the bottom of the Data Display window.
Show Best Chrom Table
Select this command to display the Best Chrom Table of the current Method.
The Primaide System Manager displays the table at the bottom of the Main
window. This command is available only when the displayed data is of DAD type
and the display window is in the Contour view. Click on the Update Method icon
to update all changes of the Best Chrom Table to all other open windows.
12.1.7 Window Menu

The current window name is displayed.
When the multiple input data are
specified, the window corresponding to each input data is displayed overlapping.

You can select the window displayed on foreground.
12-15
12.2 Set and Modify Extracted Parameters of Chromatogram
12.2 Set and Modify Extracted Parameters of Chromatogram

In 3 D reprocessing window, the chromatogram with an arbitrary wavelength is
displayed and is extracted by the graphical processing.
While you check the
chromatogram in chromatogram display range, the extracted parameters are

set, modified, and can be optimized.
And the purity check can be performed
about the extracted chromatogram.
Click <Update Method> button in the
Contour Display Options dialog for sending the extracted parameters to Method.
[Save Method] command or [Save Method As] command in File menu is used for
saving the set value and the modified value in Method.
12.2.1 Display Chromatogram with Arbitrary Wavelength

When a mouse pointer is put on the wavelength cursor of the contour map, it
changes to the gap shape
When it is dragged to the wavelength direction with gap shape, the

chromatogram according to the chromatogram display range is displayed.
Mouse pointer on wavelength cursor
12-16
12.2.2
12.2.2 Selecting/Displaying Chromatograms with Fixed Wavelengths

Use the Set Fixed WL Chromatogram function (or icon) as follows:
(1) Click on the Fixed Chrom icon.
(2) Either click on the Fix Chrom at Cursor Location icon, or select Set Fixed
WL Chromatogram command from the Options menu. The color of the
displayed chromatogram changes and a dash line is displayed on the
Contour map at the cursor location.
(3) Drag the horizontal line cursor on the Contour map to the desired position.
The chromatogram at the selected wavelength appears in the top
chromatogram view, overlapping the chromatogram at the cursor
wavelength.
(4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 to display up to six chromatograms in the top
Chromatogram view.
(5) To modify the chromatograms at fixed wavelengths, drag the horizontal
cursor for each chromatogram to a new wavelength.
You can freeze for display up to six chromatograms with fixed wavelengths and
edit or delete each fixed-wavelength chromatogram independently.
To select and display the chromatograms with fixed wavelengths, choose one of
the following:
Use the colored, triangular controls at the lower-right corner of the Contour
view as follows:
(1) Click on and drag one of the colored, triangular controls to the desired
wavelength.
Fixed wavelength marker

(2) The chromatogram at the selected wavelength is displayed in the color of
the triangle control in the top view overlapping the chromatogram at the
cursor wavelength. Accordingly, a dash line is displayed on the Contour map
at the colored-triangle location.
12-17
12.2.3 Displaying Integrated Chromatogram
(3) Repeat step 1 to display up to four chromatograms in the top

Chromatogram view.
(4) To modify the chromatograms at fixed wavelengths, simply move the
triangular controls to new wavelengths.
12.2.3 Displaying Integrated Chromatogram
Smoothing range marker

The Primaide System Manager program uses the current Method to initialize
all data-processing and data-display parameters required for opening a Data
Display window. If the Integrated Chromatogram is selected as Chromatograms
to Create in the DAD Data Processing screen of the current Method, the
Primaide System Manager program displays the Integrated Chromatogram
automatically when the Contour display opens.
To display the Integrated Chromatogram, use the following steps:
(1) Click on the Integrated Chrom icon, or select Show Integrated Chrom from
the View menu. If the integration wavelength range has been set, the
Primaide System Manager program displays the Integrated Chromatogram
on the top view and the corresponding wavelength range is shown on the
Contour map with a band (area) filled with inverted colors.
The two controls (that look like the letter I) located on the immediate right
side of the Contour view point to the two horizontal edge lines that define
the wavelength range.
(2) If the entry for Chromatograms to Create is None in the current Method,
nothing displays initially when you click on the Integrated Chrom icon
right after you open the Contour display. The control is parked at the
lower-right corner of the Contour view.
12-18
12.2.4
12.2.4 Displaying/Editing the Best Chromatogram

The Best Wavelength Table is set to create the Best Chromatogram.
And the
coordinate (time, wavelength) specified on the contour map can be sent to the
Best Wavelength Table.
Use the following procedure.
(1) Set operation of the Best Wavelength Table
a) Click the Best Wavelength Table icon.
The Table copied from Method
is displayed.
b) While checking the contour map, input the coordinate (time,

wavelength) with the highest dissociation degree in the Best
Wavelength Table.
c)
Click parameter update button.
The Best Chromatogram is
graphically redisplayed.
To display the Best Chromatogram
Choose one of the following:
Click on the Best Chrom icon.
Click on the Display Options icon and check the Best Chromatogram button
on the Display Options dialog box.
If the DAD Best Chromatogram Table in the current Method is empty (not set),
nothing will be displayed. You can construct a Best Chromatogram by either
making it graphically on the Contour display or setting up the Best
Chromatogram Table of the current Method.
The Best Chromatogram is displayed in the top display area along with the
chromatogram associated with the current line cursor position. Simultaneously,
the Best Chromatogram table is graphically displayed on the Contour map
along with the current line cursor.
A vertical step represents a change in wavelength, hence an entry in the actual
Best Chrom Table.
12-19
12.2.4 Displaying/Editing the Best Chromatogram
You can edit the Best Chromatogram graphically by following these steps:
i)
Hold down the left mouse button and drag any vertical sections (lines) of the
Best Chromatogram on the Contour map to modify the time at which a
different wavelength is used.
ii)
Hold down the left mouse button and drag any horizontal sections (lines) of
the Best Chromatogram on the Contour display to modify the wavelength
at which chromatogram data are used.
You can also add a step to the Best Chromatogram by doing the following:
i)
Hold down the Ctrl key (notice that the pointer symbol changes shape).
Then, click at the point where you want to add a new step on the Contour
view
ii) After adding a new step, you may refine the time and wavelength values by
dragging the vertical and horizontal lines, respectively.
iii) When the wavelengths of two adjacent sections become equal (i.e. the same
wavelength is used in both sections), the step between them is removed and
the two sections become one.
iv) The resulting Best Chromatogram is displayed in the top view as the
editing takes place. To save the modification, you can use the Export Best
Chrom command from the Process Data menu to load the edited Best
Chromatogram to the current Method.
NOTE:
You can also modify the Best Chromatogram by editing the Best
Chrom Table.
12-20
12.2.4
(2) Set of the Best Wavelength Table from the contour map
For the Best Chromatogram Table opened from the Data Processing window.
The coordinate (time, wavelength) specified on the contour map can be sent
to the Best Wavelength Table.
a) Click the Best Wavelength Table icon.
Table copied from the current
Method is displayed.
b) Best Chromatogram is added to chromatogram range, and the specified
wavelength line (dotted line) created according to the Best Wavelength
Table in the contour map is displayed.
Specified wavelength line

c)
When the cursor is put on the vertical line and the horizontal line
wavelength cursor (dotted line), a mouse pointer changes gap
shape
. Drag it to time direction and/or wavelength direction
with gap shape.

d) When the new coordinate (time, wavelength) is added, click and drag it,
pushing Ctrl key.
e) After the Best Chromatogram is created in the contour map range,
specify the Data Processing menu / the Best Chromatogram Update
command.
The coordinate (time value, wavelength value) of the Best
Chromatogram on the contour map is sent to the Best Wavelength Table

f)
When the parameter update icon of the Best Wavelength Table is

clicked, the Best Wavelength Table of Method file is updated.
12-21
12.2.5 Other Data Processing Parameter
(3) Displaying/Editing the Best Chrom Table

To open the Best Chrom Table, follow these steps:
a) Either click on the Best Chrom icon or select the Show Best Chrom
Table command from the View menu. The Primaide System Manager
program then displays the Best Chrom Table at the bottom of the Main
window. You can view both the table and graphs.
b) Edit the Best Chrom Table by entering Time and Wavelength values
manually. The Best Chromatogram displayed on the Contour map and
on the top Chromatogram view updates when you select the Restore
Best Chrom from the Process Data menu.
The Best Chrom Table is a local copy and does not update the Method until you
click the Update Method icon shown to the left of the Best Chrom Table.
12.2.5 Other Data Processing Parameter

Set and modify the other Data Processing Parameter from Method window.
(1) When Method in Window menu is specified, Method window is displayed on
foreground.
(2) Set and modify the Data Processing parameter in Method window.
(3) Click Update Method button.
The modified information is sent to the Data
Processing window, and 3 D data is reprocessed and redisplayed.
12-22
13.2.6
12.2.6 Data Reprocessing of Extracted Chromatogram

The calculating processing of the extracted chromatogram is performed on Data
Reprocessing window.
Processing window.
Click the Chromato Data Processing icon to open Data
Peak processing result of chromatogram at the
wavelength cursor position specified on the contour map arbitrarily is

displayed.
And when the kind of the chromatogram (fixed wavelength chromatogram,
integrated chromatogram, best wavelength chromatogram) is selected, the peak
processing result of the specified chromatogram is displayed.
When the multi
fixed wavelength is frozen on the contour map, the chromatogram

corresponding to the first wavelength is only displayed.
Spectrum purity check
function can be used in data reprocessing of the extracted chromatogram from

DAD data.
Refer to 8. Data reprocessing control window chromatogram- for
the data reprocessing of the chromatogram.
12-23
12.3 Set and Modify Extracted Parameter of Spectrum
12.3 Set and Modify Extracted Parameter of Spectrum

In 3 D data reprocessing window, an arbitrary time spectrum can be displayed
and be extracted by the graphical processing.
While the spectrum displayed in
spectrum range is checked, the extracted parameter can be set, modified and
optimized.
Select Update Method button in the contour display option dialog
boxes to send the extracted parameter to Method.
Use Save Method or Save
Method As in File menu to save the set value and the modified value in Method
12.3.1 Spectrum Display of Arbitrary Time

When a mouse pointer is put on the time cursor of the contour map, it changes
to the gap shape
. When it is dragged to the time direction with the gap
shape, the spectrum corresponding to the spectrum range is displayed.
12-24
12.3.2
12.3.2 Overlapping Display of Spectrum

An arbitrary time spectrum can be fixed (frozen), the overlapping display up to
four freeze spectra can be performed.
(1) Operation by Icon
a) Click the freeze spectrum icon, set the freeze spectrum processing mode.
b) Set the spectrum time desired the overlapping of the time cursor on the
contour map, and click the freeze spectrum icon.
c)
Repeat the (a) and (b)
d) When Clear Frozen Spectra icon is clicked, all frozen spectra are
removed.
(2) Operation by Mouse
a) When a mouse pointer is put on the frozen Spectra marker ()
displayed at upper end of wavelength axis in the contour map, it
changes to the grip shape
.
Freezing spectra mark
b) When it is dragged up to an arbitrary time with the grip shape, the

frozen spectra are displayed in spectrum display range.
The frozen
spectra are displayed in the same color as the frozen spectra marker.
().
c)
When the other markers are dragged, new frozen spectra are displayed.
d) When the frozen spectra marker () with overlapping display are

dragged to a margin, the overlapping display is canceled.
12-25
12.3.3 Selecting a Background-Spectrum/Displaying a Background-Subtracted Spectrum
12.3.3 Selecting a Background-Spectrum/Displaying a Background-Subtracted

Spectrum
Background marker
You can set the background spectrum by using the round control with a line
through it, located just above the Y-axis of the Contour graph. You can click and
drag this control to set a background spectrum at the desired retention time.
When you do this, the Primaide System Manager program is in the spectral
Background Subtraction mode (i.e., the Background Subtraction icon is pressed
in automatically) and in the left spectrum view the Primaide System Manager
program displays a set of three spectra for each vertical line cursor position: the
background spectrum, the original spectrum, and the background-subtracted
spectrum. You may move the vertical cursor to any retention time to view the
corresponding set of spectra.
To enable or disable the Background Subtraction mode, click the Fixed Spectra
icon in or out.
If you click the icon in, you enable the mode and recover the latest Background
Sub-traction display. If you click it out, you disable the mode and hide the
current Back-ground Subtraction display. However, the round
background-spectrum control remains on the top border of the Contour map
where it was placed.
You may save the background-subtracted spectrum to Spectra Library (see
Using Spectrum Library, later in this section).
12-26
12.3.4
12.3.4 Specify Integrated Spectrum

The integrated time range of the integrated spectrum is specified.
The time
range corresponding to the contour map (range that the color is reversed) is
displayed on the contour display screen
(1) Operation by Icon
a) Click the integrated spectrum icon, and set the integrated spectra
processing mode.
c)
Modify the integrated range in Display Options command.
(2) Operation by Mouse

a) Put the cursor on the integrated time range marker at the contour
display upper margin, and drag it. (the marker is in the both ends of the
time range)
b) The integrated range (range that the color is reversed) is displayed.
12-27
12.4 Performing/Displaying Peak-Purity Checks
12.4 Performing/Displaying Peak-Purity Checks

You can perform a peak-purity check for the peak in the displayed
chromatogram that corresponds to the current cursor position. You can then
display the results graphically on the top Chromatogram view.
12.4.1 Perform Peak Purity Check

The peak purity is judged by the peak purity check parameter specified by the
current File (Method)
Green-colored peaks have purity values above the threshold;
Orange-colored peaks have purity values under the threshold.
Move the horizontal line cursor to the desired wavelength.
Select the Purity Check command from the Process Data menu.
The Primaide System Manager program performs peak detection first using
the Integration Time Table. It then calculates peak purity for those peaks whose
areas or heights (whichever is selected in the Quantification Method) are
greater than Peak Rejection Level specified in Chromatogram Display Format
of the current Method.
The purity values are then compared with the Purity Threshold value specified
in the current Method.
The results are displayed graphically in either the top Chromatogram view of
the Contour display or the Chromatogram view.
12-28
12.4.2
12.4.2 Check purity Check Spectrum

The spectrum of the peak both ends and the spectrum of the peak top used for
the purity check can be checked.
And the data reprocessing menu command
(export as ASCII) can be used. (refer section 12.5.2 Spectrum Display Window
in details.)
(1) Click the data reprocessing window icon.
(2) Click the purity check spectrum icon.
(3) The purity check spectrum window opens.
purity are displayed in list box.
The peak time (RT) and the
List box
(4) Specify RT of the peak that want to check the spectrum by a mouse pointer,
and double-click it.
The spectrum of the peak both ends and peak top are
displayed as the frozen spectrum.
The frozen position can be checked. by
the frozen spectrum marker of the same color as the spectrum in the
contour map.
Spectrum of peak both ends
Peak top spectrum
Zooming the contour map
12-29
12.4.3 Set and modify Peak Purity Check Processing Parameter
12.4.3 Set and modify Peak Purity Check Processing Parameter

Set and modify the peak purity check processing in Method window.
(1) When Method in Window menu is specified, Method window is displayed on
foreground.
(2) Click DAD data reprocessing icon.
(3) Set and modify the peak purity check parameter.

(4) Click Update Method icon.
The modified information is sent to the data
processing window, and the peak purity check is performed again.
12-30
12.5
12.5 Other Display Window

12.5.1 Chromatogram Display Window
Chromatogram display window is used for expanding the chromatogram
displayed at upper of the contour map display. This Zooming display of the
chromatogram can be performed by this display.
One of the following
chromatogram is displayed together with the wavelength chromatogram of the

wavelength cursor position
Best Wavelength Chromatogram
Integrated Chromatogram
Fixed Wavelength Chromatogram (max. 4)
Click chromatogram icon to select chromatogram display window.
Further
processing (e.g, Wavelength processing, set and modify the identification

parameter) of the chromatogram selected from the contour map is performed in
chromatogram data reprocessing window.
The change of the display scale is performed in chromatogram display options

Save the change value in Method
Display by the set value of Method
Specified wavelength line
12-31
12.5.3 Using 3-D Mesh View
12.5.2 Spectrum Display Window

When the spectrum display window is specified, the spectrum (the frozen
spectrum, the background subtraction spectrum, the spectrum according to
time cursor line) displayed at side of the contour map is displayed.
The data
processing menu command (export as ASCII) can be used.
The following operation can be performed in spectrum window.

Freezing Spectra
Display by the set value of Method
You can freeze for display up to four spectra. Use the procedures that follow to
freeze spectra and manipulate frozen spectra.
To select and display frozen spectra, use one of the following procedures:
Use the colored, triangular controls displayed on the top of the wavelength axis
for the Contour view.
(1) Click and drag the colored triangles to the desired retention time, one at a
time.
(2) Repeat step 1 to display up to four spectra, overlaid in the left Spectra view.
12-32
12.5.2
Use the Freeze Spectra function.

(1) Click the Fixed Spectra icon.
(2) Click on and drag the vertical line cursor on the Contour view to the desired
retention time.
(3) Click the Fix Spectrum at Cursor Location icon, or select the Freeze
Spectrum command from the Options menu.
(4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 to display (freeze) up to four spectra, overlaid in the
left spectral view.
You can perform the following actions on frozen spectra:
Modifying Retention Times
Deleting All Spectra
Enabling/Disabling the Display of Frozen Spectra
Export as ASCII
This command is only available in the Chromatogram, Purity Spectra, or
Spectrum views. Use the command to create an ASCII chromatogram file. A
Save As dialog appears for you to name the file and select the data path.
File export directory
ASCII conversion
file list
File name
The kind of file(*.stx)

The default extension is .ctx for a chromatogram file and .stx for purity spectra
or spectrum.
12-33
To display DAD data in the 3-D Mesh view, either click on the 3-D Mesh View
icon, or select 3-D Mesh from the View menu.
The scales of the X-, Y,- and Z-axes used for the display are identical to those of
the Contour display. You cannot change the display range on this view. You may,
however, select the Auto Scale command from the Options menu to rescale the
Z-axis.
To stop the 3-D drawing
The drawing process for the 3-D display takes more time to complete than the
Con-tour display. You can stop the drawing process by clicking in the graph area.
The Primaide System Manager stops the drawing process and displays an
incomplete 3-D graph.
To change the display range
(1) Go to the Contour view and change the display range by zooming or by
modifying values on the Display Options dialog.
(2) Reselect the 3-D Mesh view.
Change of the display stale is be performed in 3 D view option
12-34
13.5.3

Display by the set value of file
The view angle is changed.

Return to the default by pushing this button.
NOTE:
You can also change the net resolution and the viewing angles of the
3-D display using the Display Options dialog box (accessible via the
Options menu). (See Section 12.1.4, Options Menu, for further
details.)
12-35
12.6 Change Operation of Graph View
12.6 Change Operation of Graph View

12.6.1 Zooming and Un-zooming of Graph
Use the following procedure to zoom and unzoom of the view scale of graph
(contour map, chromatogram, spectrum).
(1) Zooming and Un-zooming the Graph View by Inputting the Value
(a) The display option dialog opens by one of the following procedure.
Select the display option in option menu.
Put a cursor on chromatogram display, and double-click the left mouse
button.
Click the display option in tool bar.
(b) Input the value range of each axis (scale range) in the display option
dialog box, and click OK button.
(2) Zooming the Graph View by a Mouse
Put a cursor at the desired zoom area in graph.
a) Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor until you reach the
lower right-hand corner of the desired zoom area.
b) Release the mouse button.
The zoomed area of the graph is displayed.
(3) Zooming an Axis Scale by a Mouse

a) Put mouse on either X-axis or Y-axis at the start point of the desired
axis zoom area.
b) Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor along the axis until
you reach the end point of the desired zoom area.
c)
Release the mouse button.
The zoomed area of the axis is displayed.
(4) Auto Scale of the Graph View

a) Auto scale of X axis (time axis, wavelength axis) and Y-axis (signal
intensity, wavelength axis)
Put the cursor at the graph view area, and click the left mouse button.
b) Auto scale of Y-axis (only available in the data reprocessing window)
Put the cursor at near the intensity scale of the intensity axis (Y axis),
and click the right mouse button.
c)
Auto scale of Y-axis (only available in the data reprocessing window)

Put the cursor at near the time scale of the intensity axis (Y axis), and
click the right mouse button.
12-36
12.6.2
12.6.2 Moving the Chromatogram

Use the following procedure to move the chromatogram display.
(1) Put the cursor on the green triangle displayed on X axis or Y-axis.
(2) Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor until you reach the desired
moving position.
(3) Release the mouse button.
The moving position of the chromatogram is
displayed
12.6.3 changing Signal Intensity Scale

Use the following procedure to change the signal intensity scale for the
chromatogram, the spectrum, and the contour map.
Click the PageUp or the PageDown keys.
The upper limit of the signal
intensity increase or decrease about 10%.
Select the display option in the
option menu.
The display option dialog appears.
Input the value in the
signal intensity range (scale range), and click Ok button.

In the contour map, the absorbance scale value of the contour is changed by
the PageUp and the PageDown keys.
To change the absorbance scale, use the PgUp and PgDn keys. The change in
the absorbance scale made by each keystroke is determined automatically
using the predefined list in the Display Options dialog box. Pressing Pg Up
increases the values; pressing Pg Dn decreases them.
12.6.4 Moving Wavelength Cursor and Time Cursor

There is time cursor in the chromatogram, the multi-chromatogram, the
spectrum, and the contour map except the 3 D view.
wavelength cursor in the contour map display.
There are time cursor and
These cursors can be moved by
the mouse and the arrow key on the key board.

Move wavelength cursor and time cursor with the mouse by the following
procedure.
(1) Put the cursor on near wavelength cursor or time cursor.
The cursor shape
changes.
(2) Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor until you reach the
desired moving position.
(3) Release the mouse button.
The wavelength cursor and the time cursor
move to the moving position .

When the mouse without click, pressing Shift key, is moved the cursor position
value is displayed on status bar at bottom screen.
12-37
13.
13. Spectrum Library Window

The spectrum library window is for managing the spectrum library where the
spectrum data extracted from 3 D data is saved.
The spectrum library window
can be accessed from the file menu of the main window and the library menu of
the data reprocessing window (3 D).
13.1 Configuration of Spectrum library Window

The menu command and the related icon function are shown below.
Spectrum list
13-1
13.1.1 Process Menu
13.1.1 Process Menu

The following commands are available on the Process menu:
Limit List
Starts the Limit List Parameter dialog, where you can specify parameters as
filtering arguments so that you can view a list with limited items.
Restore List
Restores the complete list (not filtered) of all undeleted spectra in the library.
This command is available only when a limited list is currently displayed.
Delete Spectrum
Removes the displayed spectrum from the list. The deleted spectrum is placed
in the deleted list until you select the Compress Library command.
Show Spectrum Info
Initiates the Library Spectrum Information dialog, where you can view and
partially edit the information associated with the currently displayed spectrum.
Deleted List
Displays a list of deleted spectra on the right side of the dialog. This command is
available only when one or more spectra have been deleted and the Deleted List
is not on display.
Undelete Spectrum
Restores the deleted spectrum on display to the library. This command is
available only when the Deleted List is displayed in the right-side list box.
Compress Library
Deletes all the spectra in the Deleted List. This command is available only when
the Deleted List is displayed.
13-2
13.1.2
13.1.2 Options Menu

The Options menu offers the following command choices.
Auto Scale
Select this command to adjust the vertical scale of the graphical display
automatically so that the highest peak and the zero position are fully displayed.
Scaled Spectra
Displays spectra) using their true intensities. The data is displayed using the
current axis scales without any adjustments.
Normalized Spectra
Select this command to display a spectra in the normalized scale. When this
command is selected, the Primaide System Manager program normalizes the
spectral data by scaling the maximum intensity of each spectrum to 1.0.
Sort by RT
Select this command to sort spectra by retention time.
Sort by Name
Select this command to sort spectra alphabetically by name.
Reverse Order
Select this command to reverse the order of the spectra list as sorted by name or
retention time.
Automatic Peak Markers
Removes all current markers, if any, and displays the automatically detected
markers for the current spectrum. A check mark is displayed in front of the
command. If you select this command again, the Primaide System Manager
removes all the markers on screen and removes the check mark from in front of
the command.
Mark Wavelength
Marks the cursor position with the corresponding wavelength value (nm).
Remove Marker
Removes the wavelength marker that is closest to the current cursor position.
The command is disabled when no marker is displayed on the screen.
13-3
13.1.2 Options Menu
Clear All Markers

Clears all wavelength markers from the display.
13-4
13.2
13.2 Managing Spectrum Library

13.2.1 Modifying Library Spectrum Information
The analytical conditions on acquiring the spectrum data are saved in Spectrum
Information.
You can input many keywords with a comma as a separator between words.
You can input a maximum of 35 characters.
When you want to input A, B, and
C, The spectra with A, B, and C in its name (as key words) can be searched. In
spectrum information, the following 3 D data acquisition condition parameters
for extracting the spectrum can not be modified.
RT (retention time)
W range (wavelength range)
Analytical date
Bandwidth
Abs mode
BG correction (Yes; corrected,
No; not corrected)
The Parameters other than the above can be modified in the library information
box
The following options are available in the Library Spectrum Information dialog:
Name
Displays the component name in the Name text box. You may edit the name (30
characters, maximum).
13-5
13.2.1 Modifying Library Spectrum Information
Keywords
Displays in the Keywords text box any keywords. You may modify the
key-words (up to 35 characters) using the comma as the separator.
Comments
Displays in the Comments text box any comments entered for the spectrum. You
may edit the comment (up to 256 characters).
System
Shows the system name (10 characters, maximum).
Application
Displays in the Application text box the name of the application (30 characters,
maximum). You cannot edit the name.
Method
Displays in the Method field the name of the method used to acquire the
original data. You cannot edit the method name.
RT
Displays in the RT field the retention time used to obtain the component
spectrum. You cannot edit the retention time.
WL Range
Displays in the Wavelength Range field the wavelength range of the spectrum.
You cannot edit the wavelength range.
Injection Time
Displays in the Injection Time field the date and start time of the original data
acquisition. You cannot edit this field.
Bandwidth
Displays the bandwidth used in the original data acquisition. You cannot edit
this field.
Abs Mode
The absorbance scale set in the detector and used during data acquisition is
displayed. You cannot edit this field.
BG Subtracted
Yes indicates that the current spectrum is a background-subtracted spectrum.
No indicates that the current spectrum is not a background-subtracted
spectrum.
NOTE:
Entries in RT, Wavelength Range, Method, Injection Time,

Bandwidth, Abs Scale, and BG Subtracted are automatically copied
from the original DAD data when the spectrum is added to the
library; they are not editable.
13-6
13.2.1
Injection Volume
Value is from the selected spectrum. -RIX Enter value for Retention Time Index.
Abs
Displays the Absorbance value at a specified wavelength. If you enter a new WL,
the absorbance value is updated automatically.
Est. Conc
Enter value for the estimated Concentration and its units.
Spec Integration
Entry is from the Method. The field either specifies No or a percentage (%) of
the peak.
Close
Closes the dialog box.
Click Save button. The modified information is saved in the spectrum library.
13-7
13.2.2 Filtering of Spectrum List
13.2.2 Filtering of Spectrum List

Starts the Limit List Parameter dialog, where you can specify parameters as
filtering arguments so that you can view a list with limited items.
You can set the following filtering parameters in the Limit List Parameter
dialog:
Name
Enter the component name that you want to see in the new list (up to 30
characters). Check the check box to activate this parameter when a new list is
generated.
Application
Enter or modify the application name (up to 30 characters) so that only those
spectra obtained from this application are used to create a new list, and check
the check box to activate this parameter when a new list is generated.
Keywords
Enter or modify keywords that the items in the new list must match with (up to
35 characters). You may enter multiple keywords by separating the entries with
a comma (,). Check the check box to activate this parameter when a new list is
generated.
RT
Enter or modify the retention time and the tolerance percentage for the entries
in the new list. Check the check box to activate this parameter when a new list
is generated.
OK
Press the OK button to create a new list with the parameters you have selected.
Cancel
Press the Cancel button to cancel the dialog.
NOTE:
If you enter values or text without checking the check box or check
the check box without entering values or text, the Primaide System
Manager program ignores these parameters when creating a new
list.
13-8
13.2.3
13.2.3 Delete Spectrum

Use the following procedure to delete the unnecessary spectrum.
(1) Click the unnecessary spectrum in list box.
(2) Specify Delete Spectrum command in data processing menu.
The
spectrum moves to the deleted list

(3) Specify Compress Library command in data processing menu to delete the
spectrum in the deleted list.
All spectra are deleted.
Specify Undelete
Spectrum command in data processing menu to restore the deleted

spectrum in the spectrum library. (after performing Compress Library
command, Undelete spectrum command is not available )
Removes the displayed spectrum from the list. The deleted spectrum is placed
in the deleted list until you select the Compress Library command.
13-9
13.3 Using Spectrum Library
13.3 Using Spectrum Library

You can access the spectrum library from the following window, and you can
search and save the spectrum.
(1) Contour Map Window
You can search and save the spectrum in this window.
(2) Spectrum Display Window

You can search the spectrum and save it to library in this window.
(3) Purity Check Spectrum Window

You can search the spectrum and save it to library in this window.
13-10
13.3
(4) Chromato Data Processing Window

You can perform the reverse search library in this window.
(5) Data Acquisition Window

You can perform the search library in this Window.
13-11
13.3.1 Library Menu
13.3.1 Library Menu

The following command can be used in the library menu.
Spectrum Library
Use this command to open the Spectrum Library Maintenance window. This
command is also available from the File menu when the Primaide System
Manager Main window is first opened.
Search Library
Use this command to perform a search library for matching the spectrum
selected from the Contour map by the horizontal line cursor, or for matching the
peak spectrum selected in the Purity Spectra view (from
extracted-chromatogram data). When you select this command, the Search
library Parameter dialog appears with the selected spectrum loaded.
Add to Library
horizontal line cursor, or the peak spectrum selected in the Purity Spectra view to
the Spectrum Library.
Clear Library Spectrum
Use this command to remove the library spectrum resulting from a search
library. This command is enabled only when the search library overlays the
spectrum found on the Spectrum View, the Purity Spectra View, or the side
Spectral display on the Contour View.
13-12
13.3.1
Reverse Search library

The Reverse Search library command is available from the Chromatogram or
Purity Spectra displays of an Extracted Chromatogram, or from a DAD
processed chromatogram. When you select this command, the Select a Library
Spectrum dialog appears. The dialog displays the retention time (RT) and Name
of each spectrum in the library. A graph of the highlighted spectrum is
displayed.
Select a spectrum from the list and click on OK. The Reverse Search library
Results dialog is displayed. The dialog displays the correlation and peak RT for
up to 10 peaks. The entries in the Name and RT fields are determined by the
selection in the Select a Library Spectrum dialog. Dialog Description
Show Info
Click on this button to open the Library Spectrum Information dialog.
OK
Click on OK to return to the Chromatogram window.
Print
Click on Print to have the Chromatogram search results printed along with the
information from the Library Spectrum.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to reopen the Select a Library Spectrum dialog for you to choose
a different spectrum with which to search the Chromatogram.
13-13
13.3.2 Searching and Saving Spectrum Library

The spectrum searched in and saved to the spectrum library is shown below.
Contour map : Spectrum of the time cursor position
Spectrum Display window : Spectrum currently displayed
Purity Check Spectrum Window : Peak top spectrum of the specified peak
Search Library
Use this command to perform a search library for matching the spectrum
selected from the Contour map by the horizontal line cursor, or for matching the
peak spectrum selected in the Purity Spectra view (from
extracted-chromatogram data). When you select this command, the Search
library Parameter dialog appears with the selected spectrum loaded.
If the displayed wavelength range for the selected spectrum is less than 50 nm,
the Primaide System Manager program automatically expands the range to 50
nm for the selected spectrum displayed on the dialog.
The following parameters are available on the Search Parameter dialog:
Name
Specifies the name of the spectrum to be searched against. Select to include this
parameter as a search argument. Deselect the check box to remove this
parameter from the search argument list.
Application
Specifies the application name to be searched against. Select to include this
parameter as a search argument. Deselect the check box to remove this
parameter from the search argument list.
13-14
13.3.2
Keywords
Specifies the keywords for searching. You can enter multiple keywords with a
comma as a separator between words. You can enter a maximum of 35
characters. Select to include this parameter as a search argument. Deselect the
check box to remove this parameter from the search argument list.
RT
Specifies the retention time of the spectrum and a search window (in percent)
that can be used in searching. Select to include this parameter as a search
argument. Deselect the check box to remove this parameter from the search
argument list.
RIX
Add value for Retention Time Index. The RIX is a floating-point number with
two decimal places.
WL Range
Specifies the wavelength range of the spectrum that is used for searching and
computing the correlation coefficient. The range is set according to the current
display. You can modify the range with the zooming function, using the mouse
on the graph. The change is updated automatically.
Cancel Removes the dialog box without searching.
OK
Initiates a search.
The search uses Name, Application, Keywords, RT and RIX as arguments if you
have entered all of them. The Primaide System Manager program selects those
library spectra that match all the arguments for correlation calculation If Name,
Application, and Keywords are unchecked, the Primaide System Manager
program uses RT as the single argument in searching. Similarly, you may select
or deselect an argument by checking or un-checking the corresponding field.
The search results are automatically displayed in the Search library Results
dialog box.
13-15
Search library Results

The search results are automatically displayed in the Search library Results
dialog box.
List of search result
Spectrum display area

Search spectrum and search result
Overlapping display of spectrum
The Search library Results dialog contains a list of Library spectra found from
searching with their Corr. (correlation coefficient), RT (retention time), and
Name. The spectra are ordered by their correlation coefficients.
The library spectrum having the best correlation is automatically displayed
along with the searched spectrum in the dialog.
You can display other library
spectra on the list by clicking on the corresponding row.

Show Info
Click on the Show Info button or double-click on a row and the Library
Spectrum Information dialog appears.
Print
Click to print the selected result (spectra and the library information).
Cancel
Click to cancel the dialog and return to the Search library Parameters dialog.
13-16
13.3.2
OK
Click to accept the results by overlaying the spectrum found in the cur-rent
display window and closing the dialog.
The overlapping display of the searched spectrum is being performed in original
window.
When the time cursor and the specified peak are changed, the
searched spectrum is not changed.
Specify Delete Spectrum in library menu to
delete the searched spectrum

Add to Library
horizontal line cursor, or the peak spectrum selected in the Purity Spectra view
to the Spectrum Library. When this command is selected, the Add Spectrum to
Library dialog box appears with the current spectrum loaded.
Spectrum display area

Saved spectrum view
Wavelength cursor
If the displayed wavelength range of the selected spectrum is less than 50 nm,
the Primaide System Manager program automatically expands the range to 50
nm for the selected spectrum displayed on the dialog box.
The following items are available in the Add Spectrum to Library dialog box:
Name
Enter the component name (maximum 30 characters) to be saved with the
spectrum.
Keywords
Enter keywords to be saved with the spectrum. The keywords can be up to 35
characters (using commas as keyword separators).
13-17
Comments
Enter a comment, if any, for the spectrum (up to 256 characters are allowed in
this field).
RT (min)
The retention time for the spectrum is automatically copied for the displayed
spectrum. It is always saved with the spectrum to Library.
RIX
Enter value for Retention Time Index.
WL Range (nm)
The wavelength range is automatically copied for the displayed spectrum. It is
always saved to the Library with the spectrum. You can modify the range by
zooming with the mouse.
Absorbance
The Absorbance value at a specified wavelength is automatically updated when
the vertical cursor is moved.
Est.
Concen. Enter value for the estimated Concentration and its units.
OK
Click on button to add the spectrum and all associated information to the
Spectrum Library.
Cancel
Click on button to cancel the dialog.
NOTE:
When the spectrum is saved to the library, the Application Name and
System Name are automatically saved with the spectrum.
13-18
13.3.3
13.3.3 Reverse Search library

The Reverse Search library command is available from the Chromato-gram or
Purity Spectra displays of an Extracted Chromatogram, or from a DAD
processed chromatogram. When you select this command, the Select a Library
Spectrum dialog appears. The dialog displays the retention time (RT) and Name
of each spectrum in the library. A graph of the highlighted spectrum is
displayed.
Select a spectrum from the list and click on OK. The Reverse Search library
Results dialog is displayed. The dialog displays the correlation and peak RT for
up to 10 peaks. The entries in the Name and RT fields are determined by the
selection in the Select a Library Spectrum dialog.
Dialog Description:
Show Info
Click on this button to open the Library Spectrum Information dialog.
OK
Click on OK to return to the Chromatogram window.
Print
Click on Print to have the Chromatogram search results printed along with the
information from the Library Spectrum.
13-19
13.3.3 Reverse Search library
Cancel
Click on Cancel to reopen the Select a Library Spectrum dialog for you to choose
a different spectrum with which to search the Chromatogram.
13-20
13.3.4
13.3.4 Search library under Data Acquisition

You can perform the spectrum search library about the spectrum of RT
(retention time) position specified in 3 D data acquisition window.
(1) Input RT to specify the searched spectrum
(2) Specify Search library command in data acquisition menu.

(3) Specify the search keys in the search library box.
Input the search
parameters, and click OK button.
The search results is displayed.
The spectra are ordered by their correlation
coefficients in Search library Results dialog.
When the spectrum name in
Search library Results dialog is clicked by the mouse pointer, the corresponding
spectrum is displayed.
13-21
13.3.4 Search library under Data Acquisition
13-22
14.
14. HPLC APPLICATION INFORMATION

14.1 Introduction
This section provides useful information on a variety of HPLC applications for
the Primaide System Manager program.
14.2 Example of a Solvent Time Table for Gradient Elution

Following is a solvent Time Table and chart for the low-gradient mode using the
Primaide System Manager and four solvents: A, B, C, and D.
Table 14.1 Solvent Time Table for Gradient Elution
Time
(min. )
0.0
5.0
10.0
20.0
20.1
25.0
30.0
%AA
%AB
%AC
%AD
80
80
60
60
0
0
80
20
20
40
40
0
0
20
0
0
0
0
60
60
0
0
0
0
0
40
40
0
14-1
Pump A Flow
Rate
1.000
1.000
2.000
2.000
2.000
2.000
2.000
14.3 Determining a Sampling Period
14.3 Determining a Sampling Period

The sampling period is the time required to acquire one data point. A short
sampling period is desirable for a narrow peak, and a longer sampling period is
required for a broad peak. For accurate integration, you should acquire more
than 10 data points for each peak. Therefore, if a peak is 1 second wide, the
sampling period should be less than 100 milliseconds.
You can specify the sampling period in either of the following modes:
Automatic Sampling-Period Mode Used for isocratic elution.
Manual Sampling-Period Mode
Generally used for gradient elution.
The sampling period changes according to the parameters specified in the
Sampling Period Table.
14.3.1 Automatic Sampling Period Mode

The following diagram shows how the sampling period automatically is altered
when the Start Period is set to 200 msec. and the Doubling Time is set to 15
min.
Note that when the sampling period doubles, the time span over which the
sampling period remains constant also doubles.
14.3.2 Manual Sampling Period Mode

A Sampling Period table can contain a maximum of 20 steps.
The sampling period table and corresponding diagram shown below indicate
how you can use a timetable to control the sampling period.
14-2
14.4
14.4 Detector WL Table and Best WL Chromatogram

Use the Detector WL (wavelength) table to set up data-detection wavelengths at
given times for a UV detector. By selecting the optimal absorption wavelength
for each component for data acquisition, you can optimize the detection
sensitivity.
To set up the table properly, you must have knowledge of the spectrum as well
as the approximate retention time for each component.
The data are acquired by DAD, and the best WL chromatogram is extracted by
using each wavelength data alternatively about each component.
14.5 Quantification Methods

The Primaide System Manager program uses the quantification methods
described below.
14.5.1 Area% / Height% Method

The Area%/Height% method is the default setting. In this case, we use the area
or height of each peak for calculations. The concentration of component peak i is
directly calculated from its area or height using the formula shown below:
conc i
xi
n
100
xj
j i
where
xi = the area or height of the ith component peak

The summation term represents the total of the areas or heights of all the
components (n) in the chromatogram.
14-3
14.5.2 Calibration Curve
14.5.2 Calibration Curve

The Primaide System Manager program calibrates the analytical system using
information in a Component Table, Injection Table, and Concentration Table.
Linear, quadratic, and cubic/ multilevel calibrations (up to 20 levels) are
available. For example, if you specify a multilevel calibration with a cubic curve
fit, Primaide System Manager performs a least-square-fit analysis. It uses this
analysis to determine the coefficients a0, a1, a2, and a3 so that polynomial best
approximates the data points when calculated by the following formula:
(x)=a0+a1x+a2x2+a3x3
where
x = area or height
NOTE:
When the Curve Thru Zero option is active, coefficient a0 is always

zero.
When a weighing factors other than 1.0 is selected, a weighted least-square

analysis is performed. The coefficients a0, a1, a2, a3 are determined by
minimizing the x2 value defined as follows:
x2

il
w i y a, x i y i
where wi is the weighting factor (which can be set to 1.0, conc, 1/conc, or
1/conc*conc; y(a,xi) is the calculated data point with a={a0, a1, a2, a3}; and yi is
the actual data point. the weighted least-square method allows you to attach
the most importance to the data that are measured with the greatest precision.
For example, if the low concentration STD pints have higher precision than the
high concentration ones, wi=1/conc or /conc*conc should be used in the fitting.
Similarly, if wi=conc is selected, the goodness of the fit will heavily depend on
the STD points with higher concentrations.
14-4
14.5.3
14.5.3 External Standard Method

1) Conc1
If Divide by Sample Amount is not checked on Report Format screen,
conc1[i ] f i ( x)ConvF1[i ]
i = Indexes the ith component
x = The area or height of the ith component peak.
fi(x) = The base concentration of the ith component determined by calibration
with external standards.
ConvF1[i] = A conversion factor that is determined automatically based on the

concentration unit selected for Conc1 in the Report Format. If Other is selected
as the unit,
ConvF1[i] = Scaling Factor 1.

If Divide by Sample Amount is checked on the Report Format screen (only
possible when Other is selected),
conc1[i] f i ( x )
ScalingFactor1
SampleAmt
SampleAmt A general-purpose division most commonly used to calculate weight

percentage. It is defined in the Injection Table when concentration data from
the Method is selected (in the Method).
2) Conc2
If Use Component Multiplier is checked and Conc2 unit is not set to Other,
Conc2[i ] f i ( x ) Multiplier[i ]ConvF 2[i ]

If Use Component Multiplier is checked and Conc2 unit is set to Other,
ConvF2[i] = This is a conversion factor similar toConvF1[i]

above that converts the concentration unit of base concentration to that of
Conc2 in the Report Format.
Multiplier[i] = Value defined in a new Multiplier column in Method Component

Table for ith component.

with external standards
If Use Component Multiplier is not checked and Conc unit is not set to Other,
Conc2[i ] f i ( x ) ConvF 2[i ]

If Use Component Multiplier is not checked and Conc unit is set to Other,
14-5
14.5.3 External Standard Method
3) Using SampleAmt to Calculate the Weight Percentage for Copnc1

Example:
To quantify compound A in a tablet (unknown sample) weighting 1.0 g, the
tablet is dissolved to make the unknown solution and various amounts of A (mg)
are measured to make the external standard solutions. Equal amounts of the
solvent are used in solution preparations for all standards and the unknown.
The calibration curve of compound A uses mg as the unit of concentration (fA(x)).
Assuming the injection volume is the same for all standards and the unknown,
the weight percentage of component A in the tablet can be obtained directly if
you enter 1000 (mg) for SampleAmt in the Sample Table.
where SampleAmt is the weight of the tablet used in the preparation. Note it is
important to verify that the units are consistent. If (fA(x)) has a concentration
unit of mg/mL, the same unit must be used for SampleAmt. For this example,
the conversion would be 1000 mg/V(ml) where V is the volume of the solvent
used in preparing the unknown sample. In fact, the unit of mg/mL would have
to be used if different amounts of solvent where used in the preparation of
standards and unknowns.
NOTE:
The above example is possible only when Conc1 unit (in the Method)
is set to Other.
4) Using SampleAmt as a General-Purpose Division for Calculating Copnc1

Example:
To quantify compound A in an unknown solution by the
external Method, the
calibration curve was made by using 10 mL injections for all standard solutions;
however, a 5 mL injection was made by for the unknown solution. Given that
the concentration unit for (fA(x)) is satisfactory (eg. , ppm), the concentration of
A in the unknown solution can then be calculated by using SampleAmt=0.5
(entered in the Sample Table) .
Where SampleAmt is used as a volume correction factor.

NOTE:
The above example is possible when Conc1 unit (in the Method) is set
to Other.
14-6
14.5.4
14.5.4 Normalized-% Method

The result of this calculation method is a concentration ratio.
Since the concentration output for this method is always no unit (it is a
percentage), the concentration selection list is reduced to Part units only.
The Divide by Sample Amount selection in the Method's Report Format is
disabled if Norm% method is selected.
1) Conc1

with external standards. The calibration is done by using concentration
data in Concentration Table of Method based on your selection.
ConvF1[I] = This is similar to the ConvF1[I] in the external standard method

except that it is restricted to %, ppm, ppb, and Other units. If Other
is selected as the unit,
ConvF1[I] = ScalingFactor 1 in Report Format of the Method. This is applied to

all unknown samples in a series. Summation term = The total
concentration of all the components in the chromatogram.
2) Conc2
If Use Component Multiplier is checked,
ConvF2[I] = A conversion factor similar to ConvF1[I]. If Other is selected as the

unit, ConvF2= Scaling Factor2 in the Report Format of the Method.
This is applied to all unknown samples in a series.
Multiplier[i] = Value defined in a new Multiplier column in Method Component

Table for ith component.
If Use Component Multiplier is not checked,
14-7
14.5.5 Internal Standard Method
14.5.5 Internal Standard Method

1) Conc1
If Divide Sample Amount is not checked on Report Format screen,
(x/xistd) = Ratio of the area (or height) of the ith component peak to that of the
internal standard peak.
fi(x/xistd) = Base concentration of the ith component per unit of internal standard,
determined from the corresponding calibration curve. Istd_Amt =
Concentration of internal standard component specified in Injection
Table.
ConvF1[i] = A conversion factor that is determined automatically based on the

concentration unit selected for Conc1 in the Report Format. If Other
is selected as the unit,
ConvF1[i] = Scaling Factor 1.

If Divide by Sample Amount is checked on Report Format screen (only possible
when Other is selected).
SampleAmt = A general-purpose divisor most commonly used to calculate

weight percentage. It is defined in the Injection Table when
concentration data from the Method is selected (in the Method).
2) Conc2
If Use Component Multiplier is checked and Conc unit is not set to Other,
If Use Component Multiplier is checked and Conc unit is set to Other,
ConvF2[i] = This is a conversion factor similar to ConvF1[i] above that converts

the concentration unit of base concentration to that of Conc2 in the
Report Format. Multiplier[i] = Value defined in a new Multiplier
column in Method Component Table for ith component.
Istd_Amt = Concentration of internal standard component specified in Injection

Table .
14-8
14.5.5
If Use Component Multiplier is not checked and Conc unit is not Other,
If Use Component Multiplier is not checked and Conc unit is Other,
14-9
14.6 Peak Identification
14.6 Peak Identification

In HPLC, we usually identify a peak by its retention (or elution) time. However,
the retention time varies slightly, depending on the conditions under which you
are operating the instrument. Thus, it is necessary to use a time window (i. e. , a
time interval during which you expect a peak to elute) in order to identify a
peak.
Two types of windows are available:
Percentage (%) Time window
The time interval for a component peak expressed as a percentage of its
retention time defined in the Component Table.
Absolute Time window
The time interval for a component peak expressed in minutes.
In addition to the time windows, specific rules are used for peak
identification.
For further details, see Section 14.6.3, Peak Identification Rules.
14.6.1 Example of Percentage Time Window (%TIME)

Suppose that a component table contains the following entries:
RT(min)
Name
Window(%)
14.30
Diphenyl
10
The time window for diphenyl is calculated as follows:

Lower limit
14.30 - (14.30 x 10/100) = 12.87 min
Upper limit
14.30 + (14.30 x 10/100) = 15.73 min
Therefore, the window for diphenyl is the time interval from 12.87 min to 15.73 min.
14.6.2 Example of Absolute Time Window (Absolute Time)

Suppose that a component table contains the following entries:
RT(min)
Name
Window(%)
14.30
Diphenyl
0.10
The time window for diphenyl is calculated as follows:

Lower limit
14.30 - 0.10 = 14.20 min
Upper limit
14.30 + 0.10 = 14.40 min
Therefore, the window for diphenyl is the time interval from 14.20 min to 14.40 min
14-10
14.6.3
14.6.3 Peak Identification Rules

For both unknown and standard samples, two selections are available: closest
peak and highest peak.
Highest
The highest peak in the window
Closest
The peak that has a retention time closest to the RT specified in the
Component Table
In DAD data, the spectrum can be checked to the unknown sample.
For all samples, the RRT reference peaks, the Int-Std peak, and the Diagnosis
Peak are the highest peaks within the selected window.
Sometimes several
peaks appear within a window and several windows overlap.
When this occurs,
the Primaide System Manager program applies a supplementary rule for peak
identification. When two windows overlap, Primaide System Manager selects a
peak among the peaks that fall within the earlier window.
Among the
remaining peaks, Primaide System Manager considers for selection only the
peaks that appear after the first selected peak and that fall within the second
window.
In the example below, peaks are present in a standard sample.
P3, which is the highest peak among P1, P2, P3, and P4, is identified as the
peak for the component within Window 1. P5, which is the highest peak among
P4, P5, and P6, is identified as the peak for the component within Window 2. P2
is not considered for Window 2,because it appears before P3, the peak selected
for Window 1.
Rule For Special Peaks

For all samples, the special peaks (e. g. , RRT reference peaks, INT-STD peak,
and DIAGNOSIS peak) are the highest peaks within the selected window.
14-11
14.7 Blank Subtraction
14.7 Blank Subtraction

You can perform blank subtraction if blank injection data is available. The
Primaide System Manager program can perform both 2-D and 3-D blank
subtraction depending on the type of data and the method settings.
If you select the Blank from the same series option in the Method Setup, the
following rules are applied in data processing:
(1) The Primaide System Manager program does not perform any calculation
(e. g. baseline, peak quantification, etc. ) on the blank data. The report is
compiled with or without chromatograms, depending on the Report Format
settings. The blank file is used exclusively for blank subtraction or
signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) calculation in SST.
(2) For on-line data processing, the Primaide System Manager program
performs blank subtraction and S/N calculation only when the first
injection of the series is from a blank; if the first injection is not a blank, the
blank subtraction is not performed for the entire series.
(3) If there is more than one blank injection in a row (no other type in between),
Primaide System Manager uses the last blank data in blank subtraction
and S/N calculation. If repetitive blank injections occur in different
standards-unknown cycles, the Primaide System Manager program uses
the most recent blank data acquired prior to the standards and unknowns
for which blank subtraction or S/N calculation is requested. An example of
an injection sequence follows:
B(vial 1), S1(vial 2), S2(vial 3), U1(vial 4), U2(vial5), B(vial 1), S1(vial 2),
S2(vial 3), U3(vial 6), U4(vial 7)...
In processing, Primaide System Manager uses the data from the first
injection of B for blank subtraction or S/N calculation for S1 and S2 in the
first set of injections and U1 and U2. The second injection of B is used for S1
and S2 in the second set of injections and U3 and U4. Thus, Blank is
updated just like Stds and the corresponding calibration curve.
(4) In postprocessing, Primaide System Manager searches for the blank
injection by moving backward from the first selected (highlighted) injection.
Primaide System Manager uses the first blank it finds for blank
subtraction.
If Primaide System Manager locates no blanks in this backward search, it
then searches for blank data forward from the selected injection and uses
the first blank it finds for blank subtraction.
If Primaide System Manager cannot locate any blank through backward
and forward searching, it does not perform any blank subtraction.
14-12
14.7
(5) For signal-to-noise ratio calculation, the program follows rules 2 to 4 (rules
for on-line and postprocessing) in searching the blank in the same Injection
Table for noise determination. If no blank is available in the same injection
table, Primaide System Manager prints "---" under S/N in the SST table of the
Confidence Report.
If you select the Other Blank Data option in the method settings, the Primaide
System Manager program follows these rules:
(1) For chromatogram data, the program performs blank subtraction using the
specified blank data for both on-line processing and postprocessing,
provided the sampling rate of the blank data is the same as that of the data
being processed.
(2) For DAD data, the program performs 3-D blank subtraction for both on-line
and postprocessing, provided that the spectral interval and bandwidth of
the blank data is the same as that of the DAD data being processed;
otherwise, the program cancels blank subtraction.
(3) In either case, the time range (plus wavelength range for DAD) of the blank
data must be the same or greater than that of the data being processed;
otherwise, blank subtraction is not performed.
If more than one type of injection data are available for the selected blank, the
Primaide System Manager program uses the following rules when searching for
the corresponding blank data:
(1)
Channel 1 (or 2) chromatograms use Channel 1 (or 2) data only. If none is

found, Primaide System Manager does not perform a blank subtraction.
(2)
DAD injection data use a DAD type of blank data only. If none is found,
Primaide System Manager performs no blank subtraction.
(3) When the Extracted Chromatograms are processed, Primaide System

Manager searches the corresponding extracted blank data for blank
subtraction.
The type of the extracted blank must match that of the data being processed.
For example, the third fixed wavelength chromatogram only uses the third
fixed wavelength blank. If no third fixed-wavelength blank is available, no
blank subtraction is performed, even when a second fixed-wavelength blank
is available. Note that if the extracted chromatograms being processed are
extracted from the 3-D, blank-subtracted, DAD data, the program totally
ignores the blank subtraction setup
14-13
14.8 Grouping Individual Components
Note that for all types of extracted chromatograms, Primaide System Manager
performs a 2-D blank subtraction only on the chromatograms. It does not
blank-subtract the extracted peak spectra. You can obtain the blank-subtracted
peak spectra along with the subtracted chromatogram by using a 3-D blank
subtraction before extraction.
14.8 Grouping Individual Components

You can classify components into groups by designating their group numbers in
the FUNC1 or FUNC2 field of the Component Table. You can specify a
maximum of 20 groups.
When you designate one or more groups, Primaide System Manager produces
an additional table that displays the total concentration of each group in the
vial or injection report.
In the example below, Peaks 1 and 6 are considered to belong to GROUP1, and
Peaks 2 and 7 to GROUP2. The sum of the concentrations for Peaks 1 and 6 is
reported as the concentration of GROUP1, and the sum of the concentrations for
Peaks 2 and 7 as the concentration of GROUP2.
14-14
14.9
14.9 Retention Time

14.9.1 Relative Retention Time (RRT)
The relative retention time (RRT) computation is useful for determining the
variations in the retention time which occur due to changing HPLC conditions.
You can designate reference peaks by selecting RRT in the FUNC1 or FUNC2
field of the desired component in the Component Table. To report RRT you need
to set it up in Report Format. The program will then calculate for each
component a ratio of the retention time to the retention time of the RRT
reference peak:
RRTi
TR i
TRRf
where
TR = the measured retention time.
TRRf =the measured retention for the reference peak.

In the illustration below, Peak 3 is the RRT reference peak. Its expected
retention time is 9.5 min.
The relative retention times for peaks 1 to 5 are computed as follows:

8.40
0.84
10.0
9.30
0.93
10.0
10.0
1.0
10.0
111
.
111
.
10.0
11.5
115
.
10.0
RRT1
RRT2
RRT3
RRT4
RRT5
When performing a long analysis, where HPLC conditions such as the

temperature and gradient mode can change appreciably, you can designate
several peaks as RRT peaks in order to correct the deviations. When you
designate a number of RRT peaks, the program automatically determines the
effective range of each reference peak as follows:
The effective range of the first RRT peak is from the beginning of the
chromatogram to one third of the way toward the second reference peak.
The effective range of the second RRT peak is from the end of the effective range
of the first reference peak to one third of the way toward the third reference
peak (or to the end of the chromatogram if no third reference peak exists).
14-15
14.9.2 Corrected Retention Time (CRT)
Determination of the effective range of the other RRT reference peaks is similar.
If any of the reference peaks is missing (because it did not appear within the
specified time window), the effective ranges of the preceding and the succeeding
reference peaks are extended as if the missing reference peak has not been
specified at all.
14.9.2 Corrected Retention Time (CRT)

Corrected Retention Time (CRT) is useful for correcting the variations in the
retention time that depend on various HPLC conditions.
A maximum of 20 reference peaks can be designated by selecting CRT in the
FUNC1, FUNC2, or FUNC3 fields of the desired component in the Component
Table.
When a reference peak (CRT peak) is designated, the Primaide System
Manager first determines a correction factor by dividing the expected retention
time of the reference peak (specified in the Component Table) by its measured
retention time.
Then, the measured retention time of each non-reference peak is corrected by
multiplying it by the correction factor.
The corrected retention time (CRT) for the ith non-reference peak is computed
as follows:
where
TRf is the expected retention time for the reference peak.

TRRf is the measured retention for the reference peak.
TrI is the measured retention time for the ith peak.
In the example shown below, the CRT reference peak is Peak 3. Its expected
retention time is 9.5 min.
The corrected retention times for peaks 1 to 5 are computed as follows:
14-16
14.9.2
When HPLC conditions, such as the temperature and gradient mode, change
appreciably, up to 20 peaks can be designated as CRT reference peaks in order
to correct the deviations.
The Primaide System Manager automatically determines the effective range of
each peak.
The effective range of the first CRT reference peak is from the beginning of
the chromatogram, to one third of the way toward the second reference peak.
The effective range of the second CRT reference peak is from the end of the
effective range of the first reference peak, to one third of the way toward the
third reference peak (or to the end of the chromatogram if no third reference
peak exists).
Determination of the effective range of the other CRT reference peaks is
similar.
If any of the reference peaks is missing (because it does not appear within the
specified time window), the effective ranges of the preceding and the succeeding
reference peaks are extended as if the missing reference peak was not specified
at all.
14-17
14.10 Integration and Baseline Correction
14.10 Integration and Baseline Correction

14.10.1 Peak Detection and Integration
Peak detection and integration is described in the following sections:
Peak Determination (Section 14.10.1. (1))
Peak Start Point (or End Point) (Section 14.10.1. (2))
Tail Peak Processing (Section 14.10.1. (3))
Peak Area and Baseline Correction (Section 14.10.1. (4))
Peak Height (Section 14.10.1. (5))
1) Peak Determination
The top of each peak is detected during data acquisition; the starting and
ending points of each peak are determined after data acquisition. The peak top
is determined by comparing sampling data sequentially according to the
designated sampling period.
In the following example, S1 through S10 represent sampled data points.

S1 and S2 are compared and S2 is judged as the peak top because it is higher
than S1. Next, S2 and S3 are compared. Because S3 is higher than S2, the peak
top is now judged as S3. Data comparison proceeds in this manner until the S7
peak top is replaced with S8 because it is higher than S7. Upon comparing S8
and S9, however, S8 remains the peak top because it is higher than S9. When
the peak top is detected, subsequent falling data points are sequentially
checked.
When a variation (D) among five consecutive sampling data is larger than the
standard () for detecting the peak, a peak is considered to have detected.
The standard for detecting a peak is determined by the resulting noise value
(measured by the NOISE TEST function) and SENSITIVITY. This standard for
peak detection is illustrated below.
14-18
14.10.1
2) Peak Start Point (or End Point)

To determine a peak start point, a variation (Vn) of five consecutive samplings
from the peak top is sequentially calculated and compared with the standard ()
for detecting a peak.
A peak end point is determined by the same method. When the following
conditions are satisfied, a peak starting point (or peak ending point) is
considered to have been found.
(Vn) is larger than () at three or more consecutive points.
|(Vn-V(n-1)| is equal to or smaller than /8. In the illustration below, S is
the peak starting point.
3) Tail Peak Processing

In an inadequately separated peak cluster, a small peak appears on the down
side of the tailing peak.
These small peaks are processed as daughter peaks of the tailing peak. When
the tail peak baseline correction function is used, tailing peaks are processed
based on the standards illustrated and explained below.
Case I: TE 3 x TS
A daughter peak, Pi, that appears after 3 x TS or more from the falling peak
top is subjected to tangential processing if Hi HP/2.
A daughter peak, Pi, that appears within 3 x TS from the falling peak top is
subjected to tangential processing if Hi HP/16.
14-19
14.10.1 Peak Detection and Integration
Case II: TE < 3 x TS

Each daughter peak, Pi, is subjected to tangential processing
when Hi HP/16
Exception:
When PH2 < PH3, tangential processing is not performed, even if the above
conditions are satisfied.
4) Peak Area and Baseline Correction
True peak area (height) can be determined by correcting the baseline of the
peak data acquired from the Primaide System Manager.
For data processing, data points are acquired above a signal level of -10 mV.
Therefore, the area below the baseline must be subtracted to calculate true peak
area.
The following examples illustrate how area is determined by baseline
correction.
Flat Baseline
Drifting Baseline
Tail Baseline Correction

The tail baseline correction function is used to forcibly divide adjacent peaks
that share a common (main) baseline.
A tangential line is drawn to skim a daughter peak.
An example of a tail baseline correction is shown below.
14-20
14.10.2
5) Peak Height
Peak height is determined by using the largest sampling data value (integral) in
the peak.
This is illustrated below.
14.10.2 Noise
Primaide System Manager uses the Noise value displayed in the Integration
Time Table for peak detection and baseline determination. You can edit this
value within a range from 1 to 8000 V. The Noise value associated with data is
measured by a Manual (or Auto) Noise Test run in Idle Monitor (or immediately
after equilibration) and stored within the raw data. You can observe this Noise
value from the Acquisition Information view of the Data Display window. You
can input it to the Integration Time Table if you want to use it for integration.
NOTE:
You cannot enter a noise value at any time other than time zero (the
first row). To change the peak-detection thresh-old in a certain region
of the chromatogram, you should add a new sensitivity value at the
desired time in the Integration Table.
14-21
14.10.3 Bunching
14.10.3 Bunching
Converts a sampling period (SP) of acquired data to a specified SP before
execution of integration processing for chromatogram.
Select a sampling period from 20 ms to 200 ms in the Integration Time Table.
Recalculation does not change the original data.
Bunching process will fail under the following condition.
When a sampling period (SP) selected in the Integration Time Table is shorter
than a SP of acquired data for bunching process.
When a chromatogram to be processed was acquired with plural sampling
periods using a SP timetable.
When a bunching process with 50 ms SP is selected for a chromatogram
acquired with 20 ms SP.
NOTE:
The chromatogram is transformed via bunching process.
This function is recommended when most suitable SP is discussed or a special

processing is required.
14.10.4 Smoothing
The Primaide System Manager performs data smoothing before peak detection
and baseline determination when the Smoothing function on the Integration
Time Table is activated. The smoothing function is one of the default functions
in the table. Savitzky-Golay quadratic-cubic polynomial smoothing filters are
available for chromatogram data smoothing. To smooth the data, you must
select a desired filter (from 5 to 25 points) at time zero. Generally, a greater
enhancement in signal-to-noise ratio is achieved by using a wider smoothing
interval (i. e. , higher points). However, signal distortions become apparent as
the width of the smoothing interval increases.
The user should choose an appropriate filter so that noise reduction is achieved
with a tolerable loss in accuracy.
NOTE:
The chromatogram is transformed via smoothing process.

This function is recommended when a special processing is required.
14-22
14.10.5
14.10.5 Sensitivity
Sensitivity is a variable parameter specified in the Integration Time Table.
The peak-detection threshold is defined as:
= Noise x Sensitivity
where
Noise = the Noise value specified in the Integration Time Table.
The most sensitive value is 1 and the least sensitive value is 255.
14.10.6 Peak Detection

It is possible to change the Noise value to an arbitrary value by editing the
Noise Value entry in the Integration Time Table.
First, Primaide System Manager detects a possible peak top by comparing the
signals obtained at consecutive sampling periods and searching for a maximum
signal value.
It then sequentially checks the subsequent data points for a falling trend.
When the variation among five consecutive data samplings is larger than the
threshold, , Primaide System Manager considers that a peak has been
detected.
14.10.7 N-Method
This function specifies N, the number of peaks under which Primaide System
Manager is supposed to draw a single baseline. The range is from 0 to 100. A
baseline is drawn from the beginning of the first peak to the end of the Nth peak.
This process is repeated for each set of N peaks, provided that a baseline does
not cut across a valley.
When the baseline does cut across a valley, the value of N is decreased
temporarily to the actual N for that particular set of peaks.
The default N-Method value, N = 0, means that N-Method is turned OFF. In the
example shown, N = 3. Therefore, one baseline is drawn under the first 3 peaks,
and another baseline under the next 3 peaks. When N=0, the program uses an
automatic baseline determination algorithm to draw a baseline from the start
point of the first peak to the end point of the last peak for a group of overlapping
peaks.
14-23
14.10.8 Integration-Inhibit
14.10.8 Integration-Inhibit
This function inhibits integration of the peaks that appear in specified regions
of a chromatogram. Therefore, it is used to skip the regions of a chromatogram
that do not require peak quantitation. The range skipped in integration is
specified by On or Off. In the example shown, the first peak is not integrated
because Integ-Inhib function is On from time 5.0 min to time 7.0 min.
Primaide System Manager highlights Integrated peaks and shows them with
their baselines (e. g. , peaks at 8.0 and 9.0 minutes in this illustration).
14.10.9 Tail
This function is used forcibly to divide adjacent peaks that share a common
(main) baseline. In the example shown below, a tangential line is drawn to skim
a daughter peak. The available choices are On or Off.
14.10.10 Vertical
This function is used forcibly to divide adjacent peaks that share a common
(main) baseline. In the example shown, a vertical line is drawn from the valley
to the main baseline. The available choices are On or Off.
14.10.11 Forward- and Backward-Horizontal

The Forward-Horizontal and Backward-Horizontal functions fix the baseline to
a horizontal level in forward and backward direction, respectively. When several
peaks appear within a specified time interval, each peak is divided forcibly
along the horizontal line. In the example shown below, integrated peaks are
highlighted and shown with their baselines.
14-24
14.10.12
14.10.12 Negative Peak

This function converts a negative peak to a positive peak, and then calculates
its area and height.
The available choices are On and Off.
In the example shown below, notice that the second negative peak is not
converted since the Neg-Peak function is turned off at 12.00 min.
14.10.13 Group
Components (peaks) having similar physicochemical properties can be
considered as a group for calculation and reporting purposes. The Primaide
System Manager program is capable of grouping components in two different
ways:
- Grouping by Time Band
Groups components as specified by the Group baseline function in the
Integration Time Table.
- Grouping of Individual Components
Groups components as specified in the Component Table.
When you select the Group option in the Integration Time Table, all the
peaks that appear within the specified time range (specified by On and Off)
are treated as a single peak, and their areas are combined, as follows:
14-25
14.10.14 Precedence of Baseline Functions
14.10.14 Precedence of Baseline Functions

The precedence of the baseline functions is as follows: Integ-Inhib > Back-Horiz
> Fwd-Horiz > Group > N-Method In the example below, the Integration Time
Table specifies a set of baseline functions that overlap in time.
14.10.15 Baseline Code

The results of peak division are printed for BC (baseline code) in the results of
calculation.
B: Base,
L: Leading
V: Valley,
P: Peak start
T: Tailing,
Pe: Peak end
Since both Ps1 and Pe1 are in contact with the baseline, BB is marked to
indicate a peak starting from the baseline and ending at the baseline.
The end point Pe1 of 1st peak and the start point Ps2 of 2nd peak are at the
same level above the baseline (Pe1 = Ps2 at valley V).
The daughter peak on the tailing has a different baseline from that of the
parent peak.
Therefore, the point V is the baseline start point of the daughter peak.
14-26
14.10.15
Two daughter peaks on the tailing are in contact with the baseline at the point
V.
Therefore, these daughter peaks are both marked TBB.
The end point of 1st daughter peak and the start point of 2nd daughter peak are
at the point V above the baseline.
Therefore, the 1st and 2nd daughter peaks are marked TBV and TVB,
respectively.
NOTE:
A manually generated baseline code is indicated as "MC. " The

baseline code of the peak after peak decomposition is indicated as
"Mcd. "
14-27
14.11 Peak Purity Check Using Spectra
14.11 Peak Purity Check Using Spectra

For DAD data or Extracted Chrom data, you can obtain peak purity using their
side spectra. The algorithm for computing peak purity follows:
(1) Primaide System Manager determines the start, top, and end of all peaks
using the integration parameters given in the Integration Time Table. Then
the program uses the Peak Rejection Level specified in the Chromatogram
Display Format screen for method setup as a threshold to eliminate smaller
peaks from the peak-purity check.
(2) The program searches for all overlapped peaks. Two peaks are considered
to overlap if the peak-end point of the earlier peak coincides with the peak
start-point of the later peak. Three peaks are considered to be overlapped if
the first two peaks are overlapped and the second and the third peaks are
overlapped. This definition is extended for any number of peaks.
(3) For each non-overlapped peak, the program determines the baseline by
simply drawing a horizontal line from its peak-start point or peak-end point,
whichever is lower.
For each group of overlapped peaks, the program determines the peak-start
point for the very first peak in the group and the peak-end of the very last
peak in the group. The program draws a horizontal baseline from one of
these two points, whichever is lower. This horizontal line is the baseline for
all peaks that belong to the group.
(4) For each peak, the program then does the following:
Determines the peak height by measuring the vertical distance from its
peak top to the baseline.
Draws a horizontal line at X% of the peak height, where X is the Peak
Height Percentage for Side Spectra specified in the Purity Check section
of the DAD Data Processing screen for method setup.
Finds the two intersections of the horizontal line just drawn with the
current peak (i.e., two intersections that are between the peak-start point
and peak-end point for the current peak). T1 and T2 denote the retention
times corresponding to these intersections, where T1<T2. If the horizontal
line does not intersect the current peak on the left side of the peak top,
then the Primaide System Manager program selects the retention time of
the peak-start point of the current peak as T1. If the horizontal line does
not intersect the current peak on the right side of the peak top, then the
Primaide System Manager program selects the retention time of the
peak-end point of the current peak as T2.
14-28
14.11
Retrieves the spectra at T1 and T2.

Computes the correlation factor of these two spectra, and assigns it as the
peak purity for the current peak.
Uses the Purity Threshold specified in the Purity Check field of the DAD
Data Processing screen for method setup to decide whether the peak is
pure. Those peaks with a purity value greater than the specified
threshold are considered to be pure
.
The following example shows a case where the peak end point is lower than the
peak start point for a non-overlapped peak. It assumes that you have selected
40% as the value of Peak Height Percentage for Side Spectra on the DAD Data
Processing screen for method setup.
14-29
14.12 Spectral Correlation in Spectral Peak ID, Peak Purity, and Spectrum Library Search
14.12 Spectral Correlation in Spectral Peak ID, Peak Purity, and

Spectrum Library Search
The formula for computing the correlation coefficient for two spectra is shown
below.
Let
A=
and B=
denote any two spectra, where ai and bi are the absorbance values at wavelength
i for spectra A and B, respectively. Then, the correlation coefficient for spectra A
and B are computed as follows:
You cannot calculate a correlation coefficient unless the wavelength range

common to the two spectra is sufficiently large.
The minimum for the common
wavelength range must be 50 nm or five times the bandwidth of the spectrum

with the larger bandwidth, whichever is greater.
NOTE:
Each spectrum is linearized prior to this calculation so that equal

weights are maintained for all wavelengths.
14-30
14.13
14.13 Statistical Calculations Used by Primaide System Manager

When you request a statistical calculation, Primaide System Manager applies
the following formulas.
14.13.1 Average
The following formulas are used for averaging:
x avg
x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 x n
n
x w avg
x 1 x 2 2x 3 4 x 4 8x 5 2 n 2 x n
1 1 2 4 82 n 2
n 2
where
xavg = the standard mean
xw-avg = a weighted average that places more weight on recent data
A weighted average is useful when the more recent injection data are more
reliable than previous data.
14.13.2 Dispersion (Variance)

Primaide System Manager calculates the dispersion (variance) as follows:
n
Dx
x avg
n 1

x i
i
n n 1
x 2i
where n > 1
14.13.3 Standard Deviation

The Primaide System Manager program uses the following formula to calculate
the standard deviation:
SD x
Dx
14.13.4 Relative Standard Deviation

The following Primaide System Manager formula is used to calculate the
relative standard deviation:
RSD
SDx
100%
xavg
14-31
14.13.5 Coefficient of Determination
14.13.5 Coefficient of Determination

The following formula is used to calculate the coefficient of determination:
n
R2 1
fx i
i
n
y avg
The value R2 is displayed with a multilevel calibration curve.

For a single-level calibration, the value 2Dx is displayed.
14-32
14.14
14.14 System Suitability Test (SST)

You can print a System Suitability Test (SST) report by selecting the System
Suit-ability Test option on the Confidence Report dialog and by checking the
Confidence Report option on the Report Format dialog.
You can select the calculation methods for some SST parameters based on the
regulations of different geographical regions: USP for the U.S.A. , EP for Europe,
and JP15/JP for Japan.
In USP calculations, the peak width at the baseline (full width) is used, while in
EUP and JP calculations, the peak width at a half peak height (half width) is
used.
An example of an SST report follows immediately below, along with
explanations of the report format:
RT of Non-Retained Peak: 2.0
RT
(min. )
4.36
5.05
5.74
7.10
8.81
Name
k'
Asym
Diphenyl
Phenanth
Flourant
Chrysene
Benz(b)
1.18
1.53
1.87
2.55
3.41
1.05
1.34*
--1.25
1.25
N
(USP)
3377
3834*
--4532
4191
N
(JP)
3377
3834*
4532
4191
Resolution
(USP)
Resolution
(JP)
Alpha
S/N
2.13
1.98
2.09
3.14
2.13
1.98
2.09
3.14
1.05
1.05
1.2
1.5
59.5
70.5
89.1
77.1
55.1
Noise
(V)
2.50
5.25
6.75
9.75
3.50
Blank Data File: xxxxxxxxxxxxxx n/a

WARNING: Criterion for Asymmetry not satisfied.
WARNING: Criterion for Theoretical Plates not satisfied.
WARNING: Asymmetry is outside allowable range.
Allowable range of asymmetry: 0.800 to 1.200
Within warning range of theoretical plate number: 5000
Within warning range of resolution (R): 0.800
Within warning range of S/N ratio: 3
As many WARNING messages as necessary will appear in the printed report.
The values that have caused the warning messages are marked with an asterisk
(*). See 1.34* and 3834* in the above example.
The underlined resolution value indicates an estimated resolution for
overlapping peaks. The dashed lines, ---, indicate that the value is not available.
The following are examples of warning messages:
Criterion for Asymmetry not satisfied
The asymmetry value, if calculated, is out of range.
Criterion for Theoretical Plates not satisfied
The number of theoretical plates, if calculated, is less than the limit.
Criterion for Resolution not satisfied
14-33
14.14.1 Capacity Factor, (k')
The resolution value, if calculated, is less than the limit.

A series of asterisks (********)
The computed value is too large to fit in the column.
Equations used in calculating SST parameters follow:
14.14.1 Capacity Factor, (k')

The Capacity Factor is calculated as follows:
tR
1
t0
where
tR = the actual retention time of the SST peak
t0 = the elution time of the un-retained mobile phase.
14.14.2 Selectivity, ()
Selectivity is calculated as follows:
k 2
k1
where
The program calculates the separation selectivity () of an SST peak using the
nearest SST peak with a smaller RT value (as defined above).
Therefore, it is not possible to calculate the separation selectivity of the SST
peak that has the smallest RT value.
In this case, the dashed lines, ---, is reported in the SST table.
14-34
14.14.3
14.14.3 Number of Theoretical Plates, N

1) USP
The following equation is used to calculate the number of theoretical plates
according to USP standards:
2
RT
N 16
W
where
RT = the actual full retention time of the SST peak

W = the peak width obtained by drawing tangents to each side of the peak and
calculating the distance between the two points where the tangents meet the
baseline.
2) EP and JP
The following equations calculate the number of theoretical plates according to
EP, JP15 and JP standards:
For EP and JP15
RT
N 5.54
W1
For JP
RT
N 5.55
W1
2
where
RT = the actual full retention time of the SST peak
W1/2 = the peak width obtained by drawing tangents to both sides of the peak
and calculating the distance between the two points where these tangents meet
a line that runs parallel to the baseline at half peak-height.
14-35
14.14.3 Number of Theoretical Plates, N
NOTE:
When actual data points are not available at exactly half of peak
height, the Primaide System Manager program interpolates them,
using the adjacent data points.
When Primaide System Manager cannot correctly evaluate W1/2 (i. e. , when
the peak width at the half peak height extends into the previous or next peak)
as shown below, no N is calculated and the program prints --- in the Theoretical
Plates field.
14-36
14.14.4
14.14.4 Resolution, R
The value R is calculated as a measure of resolution for an SST peak relative to
the SST peak on its immediate left-hand side.
For the left-most SST peak, R cannot be calculated (since there is no SST peak
to its left).
Therefore, the entry "---" appears in the Resolution column of the SST table for
the left-most peak.
1) USP
The USP applications, the equation applied to calculate R is:
2 t 2 t 1
W2 W1
where
W1, W2 = the full peak widths obtained by drawing tangents to each side of the
peaks and calculating the distance between the two points where the peak's
tangents meet the baseline.
For further details, see Section 14.14.3, Number of Theoretical Plates,N.
2) EP and JP
For EP and JP applications, the equation applied to calculate resolution is:
118
. t 2 t1
W11 2 W21 2
where
W1(1/2), W2(1/2) = the peak widths obtained by drawing tangents to each side of
the peaks and calculating the distance between the two points
where the tangents meet a line parallel to the baseline at
half-peak height.
14-37
14.14.4 Resolution, R
When W and W1/2 cannot be correctly evaluated (i. e. , when the peak width at
the half peak height extends into the previous or next peak), R is estimated by
the following formula:
k 2
N 1
k 2 1
R
where
k' = the capacity factor

= the selectivity
N = the number of theoretical plates obtainable from a neighboring SST peak
using the following rule.
3) Rules for Determining the Number of Theoretical Plates
When the value of N for an SST peak cannot be determined, the value of N
for the nearest SST peak with a larger RT is used. If N is not available for
such an SST peak, then the SST peak with the next larger RT is examined,
and so on.
If no suitable SST peak with a larger RT can be found, then N for the nearest
SST peak with a smaller RT is used. If N is not available for such a peak, then
the SST peak with the next smaller RT is examined, and so on.
If none of the SST peaks has a valid value of N, then the resolution for the
cur-rent SST peak cannot be calculated, and the program prints n/a
instead of a numeric value.
14-38
14.14.5
14.14.5 Asymmetry, Asym

The Primaide System Manager program uses the following equation to
calculate asymmetry:
Asym
1
B
1
2
A
where A and B are evaluated at a 5% peak height of an SST peak.
NOTE:
When the actual data points are not available exactly at a 5% peak
height, Primaide System Manager interpolates them from the
adjacent data points.
When A extends into the previous peak, A cannot be correctly evaluated.

Similarly, when B extends into the next peak, B cannot be correctly evaluated
as shown below.
In this case, the Asym value cannot be calculated, and the program prints --instead of a numerical value.
14-39
14.14.6 Signal -to- Noise Ratio
14.14.6 Signal -to- Noise Ratio

The equation Primaide System Manager uses to calculate signal-to-noise ratio
(S/N) is
S
2H
N
hn
where
H = peak height
hn = an observed value of the largest noise fluctuation obtained in a time frame
that is 20 times peak width at half-height and is positioned symmetrically
around the RT of the expected peak.
NOTE:
For the SST peaks that are close to each end of the chromatogram (e.
g. , the first and the last SST peaks), the noise determination range
may be shortened to whatever is available (for example, if 10 times
the value of W1/2 from the peak RT exceeds the data range).
The observed value hn is determined from the corresponding blank-data file.

The blank data must be acquired in the same data series. If no blank data is
found in the same data series, the signal-to-noise ratio is not calculated, and the
S/N field on the report indicates [---].
For on-line processing, if more than one blank file from repetitive injections
exist in the data series, the most recent blank file (with respect to the processed
data) is used for the signal-to-noise ratio calculation.
14-40
14.14.6
For example, in the series listed below, Blank2 is used to calculate the S/N ratio
of Standard3 to Standard5 and Unknown6, while Blank7 is used to calculate
the S/N ratio of Standard8 to Standard10 and Unknown11.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Sample
Blank1
Blank2
Standard3
Standard4
Standard5
Unknown6
Blank7
Standard8
Standard9
Standard10
Unknown1
1
Similarly, when postprocessing, the Primaide System Manager program

automatically searches the blank within the same series.
For more information, see Section, Blank Subtraction.
14-41
14.15 Data Diagnosis
14.15 Data Diagnosis

You can perform data diagnosis by selecting the Data Diagnosis option on the
Confidence Report dialog. The result is then printed in the Confidence Report.
14.15.1 Designating a Diagnosis Peak

You can designate one peak as the Diagnosis Peak by specifying the following in
the Confidence Report:
The expected retention time (RT) for the peak in minutes
A tolerance WINDOW% or WINDOW(min) for the retention time
The expected AREA, HEIGHT, or concentration of the peak
A tolerance(%) on the expected AREA or HEIGHT
The program calculates the time interval in which the Diagnosis Peak is
expected to appear using RT and WINDOW% or WINDOW. (See Section 14.6.1,
Example of Percentage Time Window (%TIME), and Section 14.6.2, Example of
Absolute Time Window (Absolute Time). )
When several peaks appear between Time1 and Time2, the highest peak is
selected as the Diagnosis Peak.
The actual peak area or peak height of the selected peak is compared with its
expected value.
Lower limit
The expected area (or height) x (1.00 - tolerance%/100)
Upper limit
The expected area (or height) x (1.00 + tolerance%/100)
If the lower limit is smaller than the actual peak area (or height) and the upper
limit is larger than the actual peak area (or height), chromatogram data pass
the diagnosis; otherwise, the chromatogram data are diagnosed to be abnormal
and a warning message appears on the Confidence Report (e. g. , Diagnosis
Peak concentration is out of range).
NOTE:
The Diagnosis Peak is only used to judge STD chromatogram data. If

a STD injection is diagnosed as abnormal, it is automatically excluded
from calibration.
14-42
14.15.2
14.15.2 Designating Expected Concentration (E-Conc) Peaks

With the E-Conc option in the Func1 or Func2 column in the Component Table,
you can designate the desired components as the Expected Concentration
Peaks.
For each component, you must specify two additional parameters in the
Component Table:
The expected concentration of the component
A percent (%) tolerance for the expected concentration
Using the Area% calculation method, you can designate E-Conc peaks in the
same way as setting up a special component table which contains only E-Conc
and SST functions.
Note that the E-Conc peaks are only used to judge components in UNK
chromatogram data.
The time interval in which an Expected Conc Peak is expected to appear is
calculated from RT and Window% or Window(min). (See Section 14.6.1,
Example of Percentage Time Window (%TIME), and Section 14.6.2, Example of
Absolute Time Window (Absolute Time). )
When several peaks appear within a window, the peak that is closest to the
center of the window is taken as the Expected Conc Peak.
In the example above, the expected concentration for Peak1 is 7 mg 5%, which
sets a range between 6.65 mg and 7.35 mg.
Similarly, the expected concentration for Peak2 is 13 mg 2%; therefore, the
range is between 12.74 mg and 13.26 mg.
If the actual areas of Peak1 and Peak2 obtained from the chromatogram are
within their expected-concentration ranges, respectively, they are judged to be
normal.
If any of these peaks is judged to be out of its expected concentration range, the
result is reported in the Confidence Report. This feature is available only if
Each-Run is selected for the Report Frequency option in the Report Setup dialog.
14-43
14.16 Decomposed Substance Report
14.16 Decomposed Substance Report

A decomposed substance report indicates a relative quantity of a decomposed
component (a product of main component's decomposition) with respect to the
main component. This report will be issued when you add "decomposed
substance report table" to "method layout" in the Report Layout Editor.
14.16.1 Rule on Component Peak Search

A decomposed substance report will be issued when the main component peak
and decomposed component peaks are detected with the main and decomposed
components specified in the function specifying columns of a component table.
When "identified components only" is specified for report output peaks, report
output is unavailable for undetected decomposed components. Firstly, the
main-component peak is searched. In case multiple main components exist, the
one detected at first is identified as the main-component peak. After search of
the main-component peak, decomposed-component peaks are searched. If a
detected peak has already been identified as that of the main component, it is
not handled as a decomposed-component peak. For example, because "aaaa" is a
main-component to be detected at first as shown below, it becomes the main
component, and "cccc" and "dddd" are reported as decomposed substances.
RT (min)
1.0
1.5
1.8
2.0
Allowable
width (%)
10
10
10
10
Component name
Functional specification 1
Functional specification 2
aaab
bbbb
cccc
dddd
Main
Main
Main
Decomposed component
14-44
14.16.2
14.16.2 Calculation Method for Decomposed Substance Report

The resolution thing of the main element is calculated by relative area % method.
It becomes like the next expression.
Degrade[i ]
Area[i ]
100
Area _ Main
Degrade[i]: Amount of i-th decomposed component

Area[i]: Peak area of i-th decomposed component
Area_Main: Peak area of main component
(If the main-component peak is not detected, Degrade[i] will not be calculated. )
The results of calculation are reported as a decomposed component table.
Main component and decomposed components are marked (m) and (d), respectively.
Component name
RT(min)
Area
Relative
dddd(m)
3.0
10000
100.00
aaaa(d)
2.3
325
3.25
bbbb(d)
3.8
215
2.15
Total of decomposed substances
14-45
5.40
area %
14.17 Troubleshooting
14.17 Troubleshooting
This section describes how to identify and solve two categories of problems:
peak determination
qualitative and quantitative analysis
Further details follow for each category.
14.17.1 Peak Determination Problems

The criteria for detecting a peak are determined by the noise and sensitivity
values set in the Integration Time Table.
You may face the following problems during peak detection:
Small peaks are not detected.
Peak integration terminates at the midpoint.
Broad peaks are not detected.
A single peak is divided into two or more spectra.
An sharp peak after a broad peak is not detected.
Undesirable peaks appear.
Take the actions described below to solve one of these problems.
1) Problem: Small peaks are not detected.
Suggestions
Change the sensitivity and noise values
The sensitivity and noise values in the Integration Time Table are used to
calculate the peak-detection threshold which is used to prevent noise
detection. When the peak-detection threshold value is too large, small
peaks are treated as noise and, therefore, are not detected. To resolve this
problem, display the Integration Time Table for method setup and reduce
the sensitivity value. Adjust noise value if it is not appropriate. (See
Section 14.10, Integration and Baseline Correction.)
Reduce the Peak Rejection Level
The Peak Rejection Level in the Chromatogram Display Format dialog for
method setup can be used to specify a value that eliminates small peaks
from the report. When the Peak Rejection Level is too high, small peaks
are rejected in the report. To solve this problem, reduce the peak-rejection
level.
14-46
14.17.1
Reduce the Sampling Period

Small peaks may not be detected if the specified sampling period value is
too large. To resolve this problem, reduce the sampling period to ensure
more than 10 data points per peak. (See Section 14.3, Determining a
Sampling Period). You may set up the sampling period manually or use
the auto mode. (See Section 4.5, Module Setup Menu. ) Since the
parameters relating to the sampling period are used only for data
acquisition, they have no effect during data processing. Thus, if any of
these parameters are modified, you must re-acquire data.
Perform a Noise Test
When selected, the Noise Test function that is available in the Monitor
window during data acquisition collects data to determine the noise value
for the detector (See Section 6.2.4, Performing a Manual and Auto Noise
Test, for details). You can view the noise value saved with the raw data by
displaying the data on the Acquisition Information View screen. If the
noise value is too high, the detector does not detect small peaks. In such a
case, adjust the conditions of the HPLC units to reduce the noise, and
then re-acquire data. To make sure the noise is not larger, prior to
acquiring the series, the noise value is compared with the allowable
maximum noise value given in the Sample Table.
2) Problem: Peak integration terminates at the midpoint.
Suggestions
Increase the Sampling Period
When integration terminates at the midpoint of a peak, the sampling
period value is probably too short. To resolve this problem, the sampling
period must be lengthened, but you must also ensure that there are 10 or
more points per peak. You may set up the sampling period manually or
use the auto mode. (See Section 4.5, Module Setup Menu. ) Since the
acquisition, they have no effect during data processing. Thus, after
changing any of these parameters, you must re-acquire data.
3) Problem: Broad peaks are not detected.
Suggestion
Reduce the Sensitivity value
When broad peaks are not detected, it is usually because the sensitivity v
alue is too large. To resolve this problem, display the Integration Time
Table and reduce the sensitivity value.
14-47
14.17.1 Peak Determination Problems
4) Problem: A single peak is divided into two or more peaks.

Suggestion
When a single peak is divided into two or more peaks, it is either because
the sampling period value is too low or because the sensitivity value is too
low. To correct the problem do one of the following:
Increase the Sensitivity value Display Integration Time Table, increase
the Sensitivity value, and recalculate.
Increase the Sampling Period value for the detector Display the Sample
Table and increase the Sampling Period value. Make sure that there are
10 or more points per peak. Since the parameters relating to the sampling
period are used only for data acquisition, they have no effect during data
processing. Thus, if any of these parameters are modified, you must
re-acquire data.
5) Problem: A sharp peak that follows a broad peak is not detected.
Suggestion
Adjust the Sampling Rate parameter
When a sharp peak that follows a broad peak is not detected, it is usually
because the sampling rate is inadequate. To solve this problem, adjust the
sampling rate so that there are more than 20 points per peak. Since the
acquisition, they have no effect during data processing. Thus, if any of
these parameters are modified, you must reacquire data.
6) Problem: Undesired peaks appear.
Suggestion:
Use the INTEG-INHIB function
When a solvent peak or undesired peaks appear in the chromatogram,
you can exclude them from calculation by turning the INTEG-INHIB
function on over the time interval where the undesired peaks appear.
14-48
14.17.2
14.17.2 Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis Problems

1) Problem: Peak cannot be identified.
Suggestion
Change the Retention Time or Window value
When a peak cannot be identified during calibration, either the retention
time or the window value is incorrect. To solve this problem, open the
Component Table and change the values of the retention time and/or the
window. If several peaks are within the window, you may need to reduce
the window value.
2) Problem: Peak identification is incorrect.
Suggestion
Increase STD vials in the Sample Table
Correct peak identification is sometimes impossible due to drifting
retention times when several analyses are being run. To solve this
problem, open the Sample Table and specify more STD vials. Since
retention times recorded in the Component Table are updated
automatically with the averages of the observed retention times after
each calibration, this enables the Primaide System Manager program to
follow the drifting retention times more accurately.
3) Problem: Cannot identify internal standard peak.
Suggestion
When an internal-standard peak cannot be identified, either the retention
Component Table and change the values for the retention time and/or the
window for the internal-standard peak. If several peaks are within the
window, you may need to reduce the window value.
4) Problem: Cannot identify RRT reference peak.
Suggestion
When an internal-standard peak cannot be identified, either the retention
Component Table and change the values for the retention time and/or the
window for the internal-standard peak. If several peaks are within the
window, you may need to reduce the window value.
14-49
14.17.3 Error Clearing Method
14.17.3 Error Clearing Method

Explained here is the error evading method usable when an error occurs in a
module. This method differs between when the data acquisition monitor
window is open and when it is not open.
Carry out error clearing according to the procedure given below.
1) When data acquisition monitor window is not open
a) When an error message is displayed, you should read it and after
correcting the error on the module side, click the [OK] button to close
the dialog.
(Example of error message for 1110 pump)
b) Click the Status icon of the HPLC system.

Status display is now "Error. " Clear the module error by clicking the
[Release Error] button.
Status display
[Relaese Error] button
14-50
14.17.3
2) When data acquisition monitor window is open

a) When an error message is displayed, you should read it and after
correcting the error on the module side, click the [OK] button to close
the dialog.
(Example of error message for 1110 pump)
b) System status display is now "Error. " Clear the module error by
clicking the [Monitor] button.
Status display
[Monitor] button
14-51
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1. FUNCTION AND OPERATION OF ONLINE DDE
Online DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) refers to a function for exporting the
result of data processing to other software during data acquisition or data
reprocessing.
The Primaide System Manager is provided with the online DDE program for
exporting the result of data processing (part of a report generated by
STANDARD layout) to Microsoft Excel (just called Microsoft Excel hereafter).
NOTE:
Make sure a graphic file for Windows metafile (extension code wmf) is
registered in Microsoft Excel. If not registered, an error on the
acquisition of a Windows metafile will occur. Therefore, register a
graphic file for Windows metafile (extension code wmf) into Microsoft
Excel.
AP.1.1 Operating Environment of Attached Online DDE Program

For using the online DDE program, it is necessary to create a work directory
(folder) "TMP" for this program in "C: drive. " And for creating the work
directory, "Explorer" must be used.
Enter TMP in half-size and uppercase.
Microsoft Excel's directory "Excel" needs to be present in the same directory "
Primaide " as for the Primaide System Manager program.
APPENDIX 1-1
AP.1.2 Setting of Method

Online DDE is settable on the "Report Output window" for Method setup.
Two examples of Macros are available:

ONLINE. XLS
used for generating a special on-line report.
The default path is c:\win32app\primaide\ddemacro.
REPROC. XLS
used for generating an off-line recalculated report.
The default path is c:\win32app\primaide\ddemacro.
Use ONLINE. XLS for On-line Reporting during Data Acquisition
1. Open the Method to be used in Data Acquisition.
Check Online DDE for Report Destination on the Report Format screen and
select ONLINE. XLS from the Macro list. Note that if there are two detectors,
ONLINE DDE will be selected automatically for both channels.
2. Set up a Sample Table with the Method. Start Data Acquisition using the
Sample Table.
APPENDIX 1-2
AP.1.3 Details of Attached Online DDE Program

The online DDE program (Online.xls and Reproc.xls) attached to the Primaide
System Manager pastes the following items to "sheets" of Microsoft Excel
according to the respective reports (results of data processing) generated by
default "Standard" layout.
Items of Manager Report sheet
Date of analysis, date of report generation, system name, Method for data
processing, application, series, vial, sample name, vial type, injection volume,
number of injection times, sample comment
Channel 1: Chromatogram type, relevant chromatogram, and counter
Channel 2: Chromatogram type and relevant chromatogram
Items of Tables sheet
Channel 1: Chromatogram type, peak quantitation, quantitative calculation
method, sample volume, scale factor 1, data processing result table
Channel 2: Chromatogram type, peak quantitation, quantitative calculation
method, sample volume, scale factor 1, data processing result table
Items of Confidence Report sheet
Date of analysis, date of report generation, system name, Method for data
processing, application, series, vial, sample name, vial type, injection volume,
number of injection times, sample comment
Channel 1: Chromatogram type, system suitability report, un-retained peak
time, system suitability report result
Channel 2: Chromatogram type, system suitability report, un-retained peak
time, system suitability report result
NOTE:
The online DDE program attached to the Primaide System Manager

software supports the report items generated by using "Standard
layout template. " The report items generated using other layout
templates cannot be exported to Microsoft Excel.
The results exported to Microsoft Excel are saved as files of the respective
injection data. File names are given as follows.
APPENDIX 1-3
Files exported through data acquisition (using Online.xls program)

Files are named in the order of injection data exporting.
Inj0001.xls, Inj0002.xls, Inj0003.xls, ...Injn.xls
When Injn.xls already exists in work directory TMP, file names are given
excluding the Injn.xls.
For example, when exporting was attempted despite the presence of Inj0002.xls
and Inj0003.xls in the work directory, file names are given in the order of
injection data exporting as follows.
Inj0001.xls, Inj0004.xls, Inj0005.xls, ...Injn.xls
Files exported through reprocessing (using Repoc.xls program)
Files are named in the order of injection data reprocessing.
Reprc0001.xls, Reprc0002.xls, Reprc0003.xls, ...Reprcn.xls
When Reprcn.xls already exists in work directory TMP, file names are given
excluding the Reprcn.xls.
For example, when exporting was attempted despite the presence of
Reprc0002.xls and Reprc0003.xls in the work directory, file names are given in
the order of injection data exporting as follows.
Reprc0001.xls, Reprc0004.xls, Reprc0005.xls, ...Reprcn.xls
For making file names easy to distinguish, move the exported result files
(Injn.xls and Reprc.xls) from the work directory TMP to other directory.
Management of exported result files will be facilitated by using the name of the
directory at the file moving destination.
For file operation, utilize Explorer.
APPENDIX 1-4
AP.1.4 Setup of Online DDE

The online DDE contains "data acquisition online DDE" and "reprocessing
online DDE," which are settable as follows.
1) Setup of data acquisition online DDE
a) On the analysis file (Method) report output window, set the DDE
parameter as follows.
b) Save Method.
c)
Start data acquisition by clicking the Data Acquisition icon. The result
of data processing for each injection will be automatically exported to
Microsoft Excel.
2) Setup of reprocessing online DDE

a) Open the data reprocessing table by clicking the Data Reprocessing
icon.
b) Select Method from the window menu and move the Method Setup
window to the topmost position.
c)
On the Port Output window, set the DDE parameter as follows.
d) Click the Update Parameter icon.

e) In the data reprocessing table, specify a data reprocessing range and click the
[Recalculate] button. After reprocessing of the data within the specified range,
its result will be automatically exported to Microsoft Excel.
APPENDIX 1-5
AP.1.5 Example of Online DDE Result

The contents of an online DDE result file (Injn.xls and Reprcn.xls) are as shown
below.
Name of exported file
Sheet tab
APPENDIX 1-6
APPENDIX 2. APPLICATION OF PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER

AP.2.1 Application in Internal Standard Method
Internal standard method is a quantitation method in which an internal
standard substance is added at the same concentration to the standard sample
and an unknown sample, and calculation is carried out based on the peak of the
internal standard substance.
Quantitation by the internal standard method has two methods; (1) method of
quantitating component concentration as in external standard method and (2)
method of quantitating area (height) ratio between the internal standard
substance and component.
On the Method Setup window, perform the following operations.
1) Component concentration quantitating method
a) On the Quantitation Method window, select "Quantitation method:
Internal standard method. "
b) On the Component Table window, specify an "Internal standard"
component.
c)
On the Concentration Table window, input the concentration of each

component.
d) On the Sample Table window, input the concentration of the internal

standard substance.
APPENDIX 2-1
e) Generate a calibration curve using the STD vial and quantitate the
unknown sample.
NO
Retention
Area
time
Conc1(ppm
Component
Name
2.34
710914
N/A
Naphthalene
2.64
1079429
20.079
Anthracene
3.10
291567
30.703
Chrysene
2081910
51.782
2) Area (height) ratio quantitating method

a) On the Quantitation Method window, select "Quantitation method:
Internal standard method. "
b) On the Component Table window, specify an "Internal standard"
component.
c)
On the Factor Table window, enter "1" for the calibration curve factor
"A1" of every component so that "concentration value equals area
(height) value. "
d) Quantitate the unknown sample without STD vial calculation

(calibration curve already generated in step 3).
NO
1
2
3
Retention time
2.34
2.64
3.10
Area
710914
1079429
291567
2081910
APPENDIX 2-2
Conc1(ppm)
N/A
1.518
0.413
2.928
Component Name
Naphthalene
Anthracene
Chrysene
AP.2.2 Application of Report Output

The result of data processing can be reported in "Primary report" and
"Secondary report. " "Primary report" will be issued whenever data processing is
completed after injection of a sample.
"Secondary report" will be output collectively after completion of a series
analysis.
When specifying output of both reports, 2 kinds of reports can be output
through one series analysis.
For example, a report can be output with reporting items classified as shown
below.
Primary report :Standard layout report
(Output items: Sample information, data processing information,
chromatogram, calibration curve information, calculation result table, etc. )
Secondary report :Calculation result list report
(Output items: Sample name, number of injections, calculation result table)
Data management will be facilitated by outputting the calculation result list
report after a series analysis.
APPENDIX 2-3
APPENDIX. 3 AIA FILE CONVERSIONS

Use the following procedures to convert raw data files to AIA format files and
AIA format files to raw data files.
AP3.1 To Convert from Raw Data to AIA Format

(1)
Click
. The Open File dialog opens.
(2)
In the File Type group, check the Data button.
(3)
Highlight (select) a series in the Data Name column of the display list box.
(4)
Click OK. The Injection Table window opens.
(5)
Select Convert AIA command on the Option menu. The Convert AIA dialog
opens.
APPENDIX 3-1
(6)
Click
(Destination button). The Select Destination Directory opens
for you to specify a path.
(7)
If the specified path does not exist, type the new path into the Destination
text box. A new directory will be generated during the conversion process.
If the specified drive does not exist, an error message is displayed.
(8)
Select drive from Drive drop-down list and directory from Destination
Directories.
(9)
Click OK to accept path and close directory. The focus returns to the
Convert AIA dialog.
APPENDIX 3-2
(10) To specify a different file name, click the File Name button. The AIA File
Name dialog opens for you enter a new name.
(11) Specify the file name prefix, the default is DATA, and a sequence number
between 1-999, the default is 2.
(12)Click OK. The focus returns to the Convert AIA dialog.
(13)Click Convert button. During conversion, a dialog with progress bar is
displayed. When the conversion is complete, the dialog closes.
NOTE:
If the file name specified already exists, a message is displayed that

states the file already exists and whether you want to overwrite it.
APPENDIX 3-3
APPENDIX. 4 CAUTION ON SETTING OF SAMPLING PERIOD

Upon start of data acquisition, the Primaide System Manager program samples
detector signals at the constant acquisition intervals. The constant acquisition
interval is called "sampling period (SP). " For accurate determination of a peak
area, an appropriate SP value needs to be set depending on the peak width to be
measured.
How chromatogram varies with sampling period setup is introduced here.
<Chromatogram>
Signal intensity (mV)
(measuring conditions: response 0.5 sec, noise 10 mV, peak sensitivity 5)
Retention time (min)
Expanding the area near baseline
Data acquired at SP 200 ms
Peak start/end point abnormal
Peaks undetectable

At SP 200 ms, peak start and end points were not recognized properly. Peak
detection may involve problems such as failure to detect broad and small peaks.
Those problems can be solved by widening SP.
Therefore, an appropriate SP value should be set in advance of peak detection.
Note that SP is a parameter for data acquisition. This signifies that
recalculation with a change in SP is not allowed.
APPENDIX 4-1
<Reference> Referential set values

Peak width:
Shorter than 0.1 minute: 200 ms
0.1 to 0.5 minute: 400 ms
0.5 to 1.0 minute: 800 ms
Longer than 1.0 minute: 1600 ms
Longer than 1.0 minute with peak height less than 1 mV: 3200 ms
Shown below are chromatograms acquired at different SP values.

APPENDIX 4-2
APPENDIX. 5 CAUTION ON SETTING OF RESPONSE

Response refers to a response speed of the detector. A large response value
stands for a slow response. When response is slow, the detector cannot catch up
with sharp peaks. Therefore, peaks may become low or broaden to cause a poor
resolution, etc. , thus affecting chromatogram output. In particular, the peaks of
the sample components which are eluted within 5 minutes are apt to be
influenced.
By contrast, an unnecessarily small response value tends to increase noise and
degrade reproducibility. It is recommended to actually measure a sample with
different response settings and check differences in chromatogram, noise level,
baseline processing, etc. How chromatogram varies with response setup is
introduced here.
<Reference> Referential set values of response.
Short-time analysis with short column:0.05 to 0.1 sec (when measurement will
end in a few minutes)
Usual analysis :0.5 to 1.0 sec
Analysis with large-noise detector : 2.0 sec
Shown below are chromatograms measured by changing response alone with
sampling period (SP) fixed at 400 ms.
Attention should be focused on peak shapes within 4 minutes.
It can be seen that smaller peaks received larger influences by differences in
response.
Measured with response 0.1 sec (SP = 400 ms)
APPENDIX 5-1
APPENDIX 5-2
APPENDIX. 6 ABOUT ERROR MESSAGE

It explains the error message ,when the error occurs by each module.
AP6.1 1110 Pump A/B

Description
PC board malfunctions.
Module display
ROM ERROR
RAM ERROR
PARAMETER
ERROR
LOG
INFORMATION
ERROR
EEPROM ERROR
Solvent is leaking through

the flow path of instrument.
Solvent remains in the
drain.
During data acquisition,
data transfer to the
interface board has been
disabled to cause an
overflow from the data
buffer.
Upper pressure limit
exceeded.
PUMP OFF BY
LEAKAGE
Lower pressure limit

exceeded.
PRESSURE MIN
LIMIT ERROR
Motor rotation is abnormal.
MOTOR
INITIALIZE
ERROR
PUMP OFF BY
EXTERNAL
ERROR
Communication
Error
An error has occurred in

other unit connected.
Displayed when Primaide
can not communicate with
the module.
Error message
Self-checking function of 1110 Pump A/B
detected error :ROM Error.
Self-checking function of 1110 Pump A/B
detected error :RAM Error.
The self-checking function of 1110 Pump A/B
detected abnormalities :Parameter Error. The
parameter of 1110 Pump A/B was initialized.
detected abnormalities :Log Information Error.
The maintenance log of 1110 Pump A/B was
initialized.
detected abnormalities :EEPROM Error. The
instrument information of 1110 Pump A/B was
initialized.
detected abnormalities :Leak Error.
DATA BUFFER
OVERFLOW

detected abnormalities :Pressure Profile Data
Buffer Overflow.
PRESSURE MAX
LIMIT ERROR

detected abnormalities :Upper Pressure Limit
Error.
detected abnormalities :Lower Pressure Limit
Error.
detected abnormalities :Motor Initial Position
Error.
The error contact signal was received from the
module.
The communication error occurred in 1110
Pump A/B. Close Primaide System Manager.
Check a power supply and cable connection of
instrument.
APPENDIX 6-1
AP6.2 1210 Autosampler

Description
The thermo unit is set in the USE
status though the autosampler is not
equipped with this unit.
Module display
THERMO UNIT IS
NOT CONNECTED
Communication is abnormal.
THERMO UNIT
TIME OUT ERROR
ROM ERROR
RAM ERROR
PARAMETER
ERROR
LOG
INFORMATION
ERROR
EEPROM ERROR
Solvent is leaking through the flow

path of instrument.
Solvent remains in the drain.
The sample rack or sample vial is
blocking movement.
There is an obstacle on the moving
route of sample rack X (in left-right
direction).
The electric system malfunctions.
route of arm Y (in front-rear
direction).
route of needle Z (vertically).
STOPPED BY
LEAKAGE
The inside of syringe is dried up.

Syringe capacity input code is wrong.
route of syringe (vertically).
ERROR-SYRINGE
ERROR-X
Error message
The self-checking function of 1210
Autosampler detected
abnormalities :Cooling Unit
Connection Error.
Connection Communication Error.
Self-checking function of 1210
Autosampler detected error :ROM
Error.
Autosampler detected error :RAM
Error.
abnormalities :Parameter Error. The
parameter of 1210 Autosampler was
initialized.
abnormalities :Log Information
Error. The maintenance log of 1210
Autosampler was initialized.
abnormalities :EEPROM Error. The
instrument information of 1210
Autosampler was initialized.
abnormalities :Leak Error.
abnormalities :Rack Operation Error.
ERROR-Y

abnormalities :Arm Operation Error.
ERROR-Z

abnormalities :Needle Operation
Error.
abnormalities :Syringe Error.
APPENDIX 6-2
The syringe valve seal has worn out.

The inside of syringe valve is dried
up.
The injection valve seal has worn
out.
The inside of injection valve is dried
up.
The flow rate used is small.
The e-line cable is not connected.
ERROR-SVALVE

abnormalities :Syringe Valve Error.
ERROR-IVALVE

abnormalities :Injection Valve Error.
INJ TIMING ERROR

abnormalities :Injection Synchronous
Signal Detection Error.
No sample vials are set.

The clearance between the top face of
sample vial and the detection lever is
inappropriate. Or the detector lever
is caught.
When starting analysis (pressing the
START key), vial numbers beyond
the maximum number of vials as a
rack parameter are set in a
sequential program.
An injection volume that cannot be
handled with the mounted syringe is
set.
NO TUBE

abnormalities :Vial Detection Error.
CHECK VIAL NO.

abnormalities :Vial No. Error.
CHECK TOTAL VOL
A syringe speed that cannot be

achieved with the mounted syringe is
set.
A washing speed that cannot be
achieved with the mounted syringe is
set.
Other unit connected is in the busy
status.
CHECK SYRINGE
SPEED

abnormalities :Syringe Total Volume
Error.
Autosampler detected abnormalities :
Syringe Speed Error.
abnormalities :Washing Speed Error.
abnormalities :External Connection
Module BUSY Error.
abnormalities :Cooling Unit Control
Error.
The error contact signal was
received from the module.
Autosampler detected error :Cooling
Unit ROM Error.
Autosampler detected error :Cooling
Unit RAM Error.
This message (warning message) is

indicated if START key input cannot
be accepted after recovery from an
error.
An error has occurred in other unit
connected.
CHECK WASH
SPEED
SYSTEM
BUSY:CHECK
OTHER MODULE
STATUS
START KEY IS NOT
ACCEPTABLE
THERMO UNIT IS
NOT CONTROLLED
STOPPED BY
EXTERNAL ERROR
THERMO UNIT
ROM ERROR
THERMO UNIT
RAM ERROR
APPENDIX 6-3
THERMO UNIT
PARAMETER
ERROR
At initialization, power supply of the

thermo unit is not connected.
Power supply of the thermo unit is
cut off after initialization.
At initialization, power supply of the
thermo unit is not connected.
Power supply of the thermo unit is
cut off after initialization.
It displays it when there is no
response between 3s when
communicating with the
refrigeration unit.
The upper or lower limit of the
temperature control range is
exceeded.
THERMO UNIT
POWER ON ERROR
Displayed when Primaide can not

communicate with the module.
THERMO UNIT
POWER ON ERROR
THERMO UNIT
TIME OUT ERROR
ABNORMAL
TEMPERATURE
(THERMO
UNIT):**
Communication
Error

Parameter Error. The parameterof
cooling unit and instrument
information was initialized.
abnormalities :Cooling Unit Power
Supply OFF Under Connection.
abnormalities :Cooling Unit Power
Supply OFF.
abnormalities :Cooling Unit Mutual
Communication Error.
abnormalities :The Abnormalities in
Cooling Unit Temperature: %. 1f .
The communication error occurred in
1210 Autosampler. Close Primaide
System Manager. Check a power
supply and cable connection of
instrument.
AP6.3 1310 Column Oven

Description
Module display
ROM ERROR
RAM ERROR
PARAMETER ERROR
LOG INFORMATION
ERROR
EEPROM ERROR
APPENDIX 6-4
Error message
Self-checking function of 1310 Column
Oven detected error :ROM Error.
Self-checking function of 1310 Column
Oven detected error :RAM Error.
The self-checking function of 1310 Column
Oven detected abnormalities :Parameter
Error. The parameter of 1310 Column
Oven was initialized.
Oven detected abnormalities :Log
Information Error. The maintenance log of
1310 Column Oven was initialized.
Oven detected abnormalities :EEPROM
Error. The instrument information of 1310
Column Oven was initialized.

the flow path of column oven.
Solvent remains in column
oven.
Alarm level of leak sensor is
too low.
The liquid leakage occurs in
the column oven, or there is
the mobile phase in the
column oven.
During data acquisition, data
transfer to the interface
board has been disabled to
cause an overflow from the
data buffer.
Upper temperature limit too
low (The upper limit of
temperature is set at a level
lower than ambient
temperature. )
Temperature sensor
abnormal.
Temperature sensor
abnormal
TEMP CONTROL OFF

BY LEAKAGE (GAS)

Oven detected abnormalities :Leak Error
(GAS).
TEMP CONTROL OFF

BY LEAKAGE
(LIQUID)

Oven detected abnormalities :Leak Error
(LIQUID).
DATA BUFFER
OVERFLOW

Oven detected abnormalities :Temperature
Profile Data Buffer Overflow.
OVER MAX
TEMPERATURE
LIMIT:**

Oven detected abnormalities :Upper
Temperature Limiter Error : %. 1f .
ABNORMAL
TEMPERATURE
(OVEN) : **
Temperature sensor
abnormal
ABNORMAL
TEMPERATURE
(OVEN) : **
Temperature sensor
abnormal
ABNORMAL
TEMPERATURE
(PELTIER) : **
Temperature sensor
abnormal
ABNORMAL
TEMPERATURE
(PELTIER) : **

the flow path of column oven.
Solvent remains in column
oven. Alarm level of leak
sensor is too low
Displayed when Primaide
can not communicate with
the module.
TEMP CONTROL OFF

BY EXTERNAL
ERROR

Oven detected abnormalities :Lower
Temperature Limit Trouble (OVEN): %.
1f .
Temperature Limit Trouble (OVEN): %.
1f .
Oven detected abnormalities :Lower
Temperature Limit Trouble (PELTIER): %.
1f .
Temperature Limit Trouble (PELTIER): %.
1f .
The error contact signal was received from
the module.
Communication Error
APPENDIX 6-5
The communication error occurred in 1310

Column Oven. Close Primaide System
Manager. Check a power supply and cable
connection of instrument.
AP6.4 1410UV Detector

Description
Wavelength has been set since
self-diagnosis (initialize) test
has been run.
Module display
WL DRIVE
MECHANISM
ERROR
An error has occurred during

ADC initialization.
ADC INITIALIZE
ERROR
Data transfer from ADC has

been interrupted.
ADC ERROR
Data transfer to DAC has been

interrupted.
DAC ERROR
ROM ERROR
RAM ERROR
PARAMETER ERROR
LOG INFORMATION
ERROR
EEPROM ERROR
Leakage is detected during

analysis.
LAMP OFF BY
LEAKAGE
The self-checking function of 1410 UV

Detector Ch1/2 detected
abnormalities :Leak Error.

transfer to the interface board
has been disabled to cause an
overflow from the data buffer.
Auto zero is specified in excess
of allowable range.
DATA BUFFER
OVERFLOW

abnormalities :Data Buffer Overflow.
A/Z OVER RANGE
The 656 nm bright line of D2

lamp is not found in
self-diagnosis (at
initialization).
WL CALIBRATION
ERROR

abnormalities :Auto Zero Over Range.
abnormalities :Wavelength Calibration
Error.
APPENDIX 6-6
Error message
abnormalities :Wavelength Starting Point
Error.
abnormalities :ADC Initializing Error.
abnormalities :ADC Error.
abnormalities :DAC Error.
Self-checking function of 1410 UV
Detector Ch1/2 detected error :ROM
Error.
Self-checking function of 1410 UV
Detector Ch1/2 detected error :RAM
Error.
abnormalities :Parameter Error. The
parameter of 1410 UV Detector Ch1/2 was
initialized.
abnormalities :Log Information Error.
The maintenance log of 1410 UV Detector
Ch1/2 was initialized.
abnormalities :EEPROM Error. The
instrument information of 1410 UV
Detector Ch1/2 was initialized.
D2 lamp goes off during

analysis or fails to come on.
D2 LAMP ERROR
Hg lamp goes off during

Hg LAMP ERROR
The lamp has been turned off

due to an external contact
input.
An error has occurred in other
unit connected.
Displayed when Primaide can
not communicate with the
module.
LAMP OFF BY
EXTERNAL INPUT
LAMP OFF BY
EXTERNAL ERROR
Communication Error

abnormalities :D2 Lamp Error.
abnormalities :Hg Lamp Error.
The lamp OFF contact input switched off
the lamp.
The error contact signal was received
from the module.
The communication error occurred in
1410 UV Detector Ch1/2. Close Primaide
System Manager. Check a power supply
and cable connection of instrument.
AP6.5 USB-AID
Description
Module display
ADC ERROR
ROM ERROR
RAM ERROR
PARAMETER
ERROR
EEPROM
ERROR

transfer to the interface board
has been disabled to cause an
overflow from the data buffer.
DATA BUFFER
OVERFLOW

module.
ADC
CALIBRATION
ERROR
Communication
Error
Error message
An abnormality has been detected on the USB-AID
Ch1/2 :ADC Error
The self-checking function of USB-AID Ch1/2
detected abnormalities :ROM Error
detected abnormalities :RAM Error
parameter of USB-AID Ch1/2 was initialized.
instrument information of USB-AID Ch1/2 was
initialized.
Ch1/2 :Data Buffer Overflow

Ch1/2 :ADC CALIBRATION ERROR
The communication error occurred in USB-AID
Ch1/2. Close Primaide System Manager. Check a
power supply and cable connection of instrument.
APPENDIX 6-7
AP6.6 1430 DAD

Description
Module display
ROM ERROR
RAM ERROR
LOG
INFORMATION
ERROR
EEPROM
ERROR
PARAMETER
ERROR
The D2 lamp blows out or

fails to come on.
Hg lamp goes off during
The W lamp blows out or fails
to come on.
(1) Air bubbles are contained
in the flow cell.
(2) The flow cell is
contaminated.
(3) Failure in shutter
operation.
(1) Air bubbles are contained
in the flow cell.
(2) The flow cell is
contaminated.
(3) Failure in slit switching.
Disruption of data transfer to
DAC.
Leakage is detected during
analysis.
An error has occurred in other
unit connected.
D2 LAMP
ERROR
Hg LAMP
ERROR
W LAMP
ERROR
SLIT ERROR
The cooling fan stops.

module.
NOTE:
Error message
Self-checking function of 1430 DAD Ch1 detected
error :ROM Error
Self-checking function of 1430 DAD Ch1 detected
error :RAM Error
The self-checking function of 1430 DAD Ch1
detected abnormalities :Log Information Error.
The maintenance log of 1430 DAD Ch1 was
initialized.
instrument information of 1430 DAD Ch1 was
initialized.
parameter of 1430 DAD Ch1 was initialized.
detected abnormalities :D2 Lamp Error
detected abnormalities :Hg Lamp Error
detected abnormalities :W Lamp Error
detected abnormalities :Slit Error. The lamp
energy of the 1430 DAD is unusually low. Please
check the optical path of the flow cell.
SHUTTER
ERROR

detected abnormalities :Shutter Error. The lamp
energy of the 1430 DAD is unusually low. Please
check the optical path of the flow cell.
DSP ERROR
The error contact signal was received from the

module.
detected abnormalities :Leak Error
The lamp OFF contact input switched off the lamp.
LAMP OFF BY
LEAKAGE
LAMP OFF BY
EXTERNAL
ERROR
LAMP OFF BY
FAN ERROR
Communication
Error

detected abnormalities :LAMP OFF BY FAN
ERROR
The communication error occurred in 1430 DAD
Ch1. Close Primaide System Manager. Check a
power supply and cable connection of instrument.
When error for error contact input from each module is received two or
more times, It displays it only once by the error contact input of IFB.
APPENDIX 6-8
TERMINOLOGY
AIA
Analytical Instrument Association, the standard format specified
by the Analytical Instrument Association (AIA).
Primaide
System Manager allow you to import it and export it.

AID
AID stands for Analog Input Device.
This is the device for an
acquisition of the analog signal.

Application
A directory to store of the related files (method, sample table,
data, report).
Auto zero
Absorbance is electrically adjusted to zero to cancel insignificant
parts of data.
In common analytical practice, perform auto zero
adjustment immediately before or after the start of operation.

DDE
Dynamic Data Exchange, a function to transfer data to and from
other software.
Deconvolution
A function to model the chromatogram peaks using EMG
(Exponential Modified Gaussian). Both tailing and fronting peaks
can be fitted with the EMG.
TERMINOLOGY - 1
Extracted chromatogram
A chromatogram extracted from 3D data.
e-line cable
A digital network used exclusively for analysis.
IFB
IFB, which is short for USB Interface Board, is an interface
board required for controlling the Primaide 1000 Series system
from a PC.
Primaide
A general name for the Primaide 1000 Series High-Performance
Liquid Chromatograph.
TERMINOLOGY - 2
INDEX
A
AIA File Conversions ........................................................................................... APPENDIX 3-1
Area% Method ........................................................................................................... 4-39, 14-40
Application of Primaide System Manager ............................................................ APPENDIX 2-1
Asymmetry ................................................................................................................ 4-54, 14-35
B
Blank Subtraction ............................................................................................. 4-34, 6-22, 14-11
C
Calibration .......................................................................................................... 6-21, 7-10, 14-3
Capacity Factor .................................................................................................................. 14-32
Change Application ................................................................................................................ 3-6
Coefficient of Determination................................................................................................ 14-29
Coefficient Table................................................................................................................... 4-43
Component Table ................................................................................................................. 4-37
D
Data Acquisition............................................................................................................. 6-2, 6-11
Diagnosis Peak.......................................................................................................... 4-54, 14-38
E
External Standard Method ........................................................................................... 4-33, 14-4
G
Grouping............................................................................................................................. 14-13
I
Integration Time Table ................................................................................................. 4-44, 8-10
Internal Standard Method ............................................................................................ 5-15, 14-7
M
Metafile ................................................................................................................................. 8-15
N
Normalized-% Method ................................................................................................. 4-33, 14-6
Number of Theoretical Plates .................................................................................... 4-54, 14-32
O
Online DDE ......................................................................................................... APPENDIX 1-1
On-Line Data Processing ...................................................................................................... 6-21
INDEX - 1
P
Peak-Purity Check ........................................................................................ 12-24, 14-26, 14-26
Q
Quick Analysis Start.............................................................................................................. 6-24
R
Recalculating ........................................................................................................................ 7-21
Resolution ................................................................................................................. 4-54, 14-34
S
Sample Table ................................................................................................................ 5-1, 6-18
Spectrum ............................................................................................. 12-21, 12-28, 13-1, 14-28
Starting/Exiting the Primaide System Manager ....................................................................... 2-1
System Suitability Test .............................................................................................. 4-53, 14-31
S/N ..................................................................................................................................... 14-36
T
The Primaide System Manager .............................................................................................. 1-1
INDEX - 2

Manual HPLC Primaide Hitachi

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Manual HPLC Primaide Hitachi

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

This system is intended for research use only.

Please read through this manual carefully

Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation

Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation 2012.

1st Edition, 2012

Be sure to read through and understand the following points

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Limitations and Exclusions on Warranty

Failure due to operation at a place not meeting the

Failure due to power supply voltage/frequency other

Corrosion or deterioration of the piping due to

Corrosion of the electric circuits or deterioration of

Failure due to use of software, hardware or spare

Failure due to use not described in the manual or

Failure due to maintenance or repair by other than

Failure due to relocation or transport conducted not

Failure due to disassembly, modification or relocation

Failure due to acts of God, including fire, earthquake,

Failure of the hardware, or damage to the system

After disposal of this instrument, after its resale

Installation, Relocation and After-sale Technical Service

Installation and Relocation

Installation at delivery shall not be carried out by the

Before installation, the user shall make preparations

If relocation becomes necessary after initial

For after-sales service, contact our sales

For service after the warranty period, consult us with

Technical Seminars and Training Courses for Users

Handling of Chemicals and Samples

The user is responsible for following relevant legal

Reagents, standard solutions and accuracy-control

Indicates an instruction for ensuring correct use

Installation, Maintenance, and Relocation

DANGER does not apply to this product.

WARNING does not apply to this product.

OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................... 1-1

STARTING/EXITING THE PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER ........................................... 2-1

PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER MAIN WINDOW .......................................................... 3-1

Sampler Setup Icon .............................................. 3-8

FUNCTION AND OPERATION OF METHOD WINDOW ................................................. 4-1

4.4.10 Confidence Report ............................................. 4-54

SAMPLE TABLE ............................................................................................................. 5-1

ACQUIRING DATA.......................................................................................................... 6-1

FUCTION AND OPERATION OF DATA-PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW .............. 7-1

DATA-PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW -CHROMATOGRAM- ................................ 8-1

8.3.5 Window Menu .................................................... 8-26

MODIFY REPORT ........................................................................................................... 9-1

10. REPORT LAYOUT EDITOR .......................................................................................... 10-1

10.10 Special Report Items .................................................. 10-39

12.2.6 Data Reprocessing of Extracted

13. Spectrum Library Window .......................................................................................... 13-1

Quantification Methods................................................ 14-3

14.14.2 Selectivity, () .................................................. 14-34

AP6.5 USB-AID ........................................... APPENDIX 6-7

1.1 The Primaide System Manager

Primaide System Manager

1.2 The Main Function

1.2 The Main Function

2. STARTING/EXITING THE PRIMAIDE SYSTEM MANAGER

NOT RESPONDING message will be indicated on the screen of

Please wait for a completion of

2.2 Starting/Exiting the Primaide System Manager

2.2 Starting/Exiting the Primaide System Manager